Kisah Para Rasul 1:1--17:34
Konteks1:1 I wrote 1 the former 2 account, 3 Theophilus, 4 about all that Jesus began to do and teach 1:2 until the day he was taken up to heaven, 5 after he had given orders 6 by 7 the Holy Spirit to the apostles he had chosen. 1:3 To the same apostles 8 also, after his suffering, 9 he presented himself alive with many convincing proofs. He was seen by them over a forty-day period 10 and spoke about matters concerning the kingdom of God. 1:4 While he was with them, 11 he declared, 12 “Do not leave Jerusalem, 13 but wait there 14 for what my 15 Father promised, 16 which you heard about from me. 17 1:5 For 18 John baptized with water, but you 19 will be baptized with the Holy Spirit not many days from now.”
1:6 So when they had gathered together, they began to ask him, 20 “Lord, is this the time when you are restoring the kingdom to Israel?” 1:7 He told them, “You are not permitted to know 21 the times or periods that the Father has set by his own authority. 1:8 But you will receive power when the Holy Spirit has come upon you, and you will be my witnesses in Jerusalem, and in all Judea and Samaria, and to the farthest parts 22 of the earth.” 1:9 After 23 he had said this, while they were watching, he was lifted up and a cloud hid him from their sight. 1:10 As 24 they were still staring into the sky while he was going, suddenly 25 two men in white clothing stood near them 1:11 and said, “Men of Galilee, why do you stand here 26 looking up into the sky? This same Jesus who has been taken up from you into heaven 27 will come back in the same way you saw him go into heaven.”
1:12 Then they returned to Jerusalem 28 from the mountain 29 called the Mount of Olives 30 (which is near Jerusalem, a Sabbath day’s journey 31 away). 1:13 When 32 they had entered Jerusalem, 33 they went to the upstairs room where they were staying. Peter 34 and John, and James, and Andrew, Philip and Thomas, Bartholomew and Matthew, James son of Alphaeus and Simon the Zealot, and Judas son of James were there. 35 1:14 All these continued together in prayer with one mind, together with the women, along with Mary the mother of Jesus, and his brothers. 36 1:15 In those days 37 Peter stood up among the believers 38 (a gathering of about one hundred and twenty people) and said, 1:16 “Brothers, 39 the scripture had to be fulfilled that the Holy Spirit foretold through 40 David concerning Judas – who became the guide for those who arrested Jesus – 1:17 for he was counted as one of us and received a share in this ministry.” 41 1:18 (Now this man Judas 42 acquired a field with the reward of his unjust deed, 43 and falling headfirst 44 he burst open in the middle and all his intestines 45 gushed out. 1:19 This 46 became known to all who lived in Jerusalem, so that in their own language 47 they called that field 48 Hakeldama, that is, “Field of Blood.”) 1:20 “For it is written in the book of Psalms, ‘Let his house become deserted, 49 and let there be no one to live in it,’ 50 and ‘Let another take his position of responsibility.’ 51 1:21 Thus one of the men 52 who have accompanied us during all the time the Lord Jesus associated with 53 us, 1:22 beginning from his baptism by John until the day he 54 was taken up from us – one of these must become a witness of his resurrection together with us.” 1:23 So they 55 proposed two candidates: 56 Joseph called Barsabbas (also called Justus) and Matthias. 1:24 Then they prayed, 57 “Lord, you know the hearts of all. Show us which one of these two you have chosen 1:25 to assume the task 58 of this service 59 and apostleship from which Judas turned aside 60 to go to his own place.” 61 1:26 Then 62 they cast lots for them, and the one chosen was Matthias; 63 so he was counted with the eleven apostles. 64
2:1 Now 65 when the day of Pentecost had come, they were all together in one place. 2:2 Suddenly 66 a sound 67 like a violent wind blowing 68 came from heaven 69 and filled the entire house where they were sitting. 2:3 And tongues spreading out like a fire 70 appeared to them and came to rest on each one of them. 2:4 All 71 of them were filled with the Holy Spirit, and they began to speak in other languages 72 as the Spirit enabled them. 73
2:5 Now there were devout Jews 74 from every nation under heaven residing in Jerusalem. 75 2:6 When this sound 76 occurred, a crowd gathered and was in confusion, 77 because each one heard them speaking in his own language. 2:7 Completely baffled, they said, 78 “Aren’t 79 all these who are speaking Galileans? 2:8 And how is it that each one of us hears them 80 in our own native language? 81 2:9 Parthians, Medes, Elamites, and residents of Mesopotamia, Judea and Cappadocia, Pontus and the province of Asia, 82 2:10 Phrygia and Pamphylia, Egypt and the parts of Libya near Cyrene, 83 and visitors from Rome, 84 2:11 both Jews and proselytes, 85 Cretans and Arabs – we hear them speaking in our own languages about the great deeds God has done!” 86 2:12 All were astounded and greatly confused, saying to one another, “What does this mean?” 2:13 But others jeered at the speakers, 87 saying, “They are drunk on new wine!” 88
2:14 But Peter stood up 89 with the eleven, raised his voice, and addressed them: “You men of Judea 90 and all you who live in Jerusalem, 91 know this 92 and listen carefully to what I say. 2:15 In spite of what you think, these men are not drunk, 93 for it is only nine o’clock in the morning. 94 2:16 But this is what was spoken about through the prophet Joel: 95
2:17 ‘And in the last days 96 it will be,’ God says,
‘that I will pour out my Spirit on all people, 97
and your sons and your daughters will prophesy,
and your young men will see visions,
and your old men will dream dreams.
2:18 Even on my servants, 98 both men and women,
I will pour out my Spirit in those days, and they will prophesy. 99
2:19 And I will perform wonders in the sky 100 above
and miraculous signs 101 on the earth below,
blood and fire and clouds of smoke.
2:20 The sun will be changed to darkness
and the moon to blood
before the great and glorious 102 day of the Lord comes.
2:21 And then 103 everyone who calls on the name of the Lord will be saved.’ 104
2:22 “Men of Israel, 105 listen to these words: Jesus the Nazarene, a man clearly attested to you by God with powerful deeds, 106 wonders, and miraculous signs 107 that God performed among you through him, just as you yourselves know – 2:23 this man, who was handed over by the predetermined plan and foreknowledge of God, you executed 108 by nailing him to a cross at the hands of Gentiles. 109 2:24 But God raised him up, 110 having released 111 him from the pains 112 of death, because it was not possible for him to be held in its power. 113 2:25 For David says about him,
‘I saw the Lord always in front of me, 114
for he is at my right hand so that I will not be shaken.
2:26 Therefore my heart was glad and my tongue rejoiced;
my body 115 also will live in hope,
2:27 because you will not leave my soul in Hades, 116
nor permit your Holy One to experience 117 decay.
2:28 You have made known to me the paths of life;
you will make me full of joy with your presence.’ 118
2:29 “Brothers, 119 I can speak confidently 120 to you about our forefather 121 David, that he both died and was buried, and his tomb is with us to this day. 2:30 So then, because 122 he was a prophet and knew that God had sworn to him with an oath to seat one of his descendants 123 on his throne, 124 2:31 David by foreseeing this 125 spoke about the resurrection of the Christ, 126 that he was neither abandoned to Hades, 127 nor did his body 128 experience 129 decay. 130 2:32 This Jesus God raised up, and we are all witnesses of it. 131 2:33 So then, exalted 132 to the right hand 133 of God, and having received 134 the promise of the Holy Spirit 135 from the Father, he has poured out 136 what you both see and hear. 2:34 For David did not ascend into heaven, but he himself says,
‘The Lord said to my lord,
“Sit 137 at my right hand
2:35 until I make your enemies a footstool 138 for your feet.”’ 139
2:36 Therefore let all the house of Israel know beyond a doubt 140 that God has made this Jesus whom you crucified 141 both Lord 142 and Christ.” 143
2:37 Now when they heard this, 144 they were acutely distressed 145 and said to Peter and the rest of the apostles, “What should we do, brothers?” 2:38 Peter said to them, “Repent, and each one of you be baptized 146 in the name of Jesus Christ 147 for 148 the forgiveness of your sins, and you will receive the gift of the Holy Spirit. 149 2:39 For the promise 150 is for you and your children, and for all who are far away, as many as the Lord our God will call to himself.” 2:40 With many other words he testified 151 and exhorted them saying, “Save yourselves from this perverse 152 generation!” 2:41 So those who accepted 153 his message 154 were baptized, and that day about three thousand people 155 were added. 156
2:42 They were devoting themselves to the apostles’ teaching and to fellowship, 157 to the breaking of bread and to prayer. 158 2:43 Reverential awe 159 came over everyone, 160 and many wonders and miraculous signs 161 came about by the apostles. 2:44 All who believed were together and held 162 everything in common, 2:45 and they began selling 163 their property 164 and possessions and distributing the proceeds 165 to everyone, as anyone had need. 2:46 Every day 166 they continued to gather together by common consent in the temple courts, 167 breaking bread from 168 house to house, sharing their food with glad 169 and humble hearts, 170 2:47 praising God and having the good will 171 of all the people. And the Lord was adding to their number every day 172 those who were being saved.
3:1 Now Peter and John were going up to the temple at the time 173 for prayer, 174 at three o’clock in the afternoon. 175 3:2 And a man lame 176 from birth 177 was being carried up, who was placed at the temple gate called “the Beautiful Gate” every day 178 so he could beg for money 179 from those going into the temple courts. 180 3:3 When he saw Peter and John about to go into the temple courts, 181 he asked them for money. 182 3:4 Peter looked directly 183 at him (as did John) and said, “Look at us!” 3:5 So the lame man 184 paid attention to them, expecting to receive something from them. 3:6 But Peter said, “I have no silver or gold, 185 but what I do have I give you. In the name 186 of Jesus Christ 187 the Nazarene, stand up and 188 walk!” 3:7 Then 189 Peter 190 took hold 191 of him by the right hand and raised him up, and at once the man’s 192 feet and ankles were made strong. 193 3:8 He 194 jumped up, 195 stood and began walking around, and he entered the temple courts 196 with them, walking and leaping and praising God. 3:9 All 197 the people saw him walking and praising God, 3:10 and they recognized him as the man who used to sit and ask for donations 198 at the Beautiful Gate of the temple, and they were filled with astonishment and amazement 199 at what had happened to him.
3:11 While the man 200 was hanging on to Peter and John, all the people, completely astounded, ran together to them in the covered walkway 201 called Solomon’s Portico. 202 3:12 When Peter saw this, he declared to the people, “Men of Israel, 203 why are you amazed at this? Why 204 do you stare at us as if we had made this man 205 walk by our own power or piety? 3:13 The God of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, 206 the God of our forefathers, 207 has glorified 208 his servant 209 Jesus, whom you handed over and rejected 210 in the presence of Pilate after he had decided 211 to release him. 3:14 But you rejected 212 the Holy and Righteous One and asked that a man who was a murderer be released to you. 3:15 You killed 213 the Originator 214 of life, whom God raised 215 from the dead. To this fact we are witnesses! 216 3:16 And on the basis of faith in Jesus’ 217 name, 218 his very name has made this man – whom you see and know – strong. The 219 faith that is through Jesus 220 has given him this complete health in the presence 221 of you all. 3:17 And now, brothers, I know you acted in ignorance, 222 as your rulers did too. 3:18 But the things God foretold 223 long ago through 224 all the prophets – that his Christ 225 would suffer – he has fulfilled in this way. 3:19 Therefore repent and turn back so that your sins may be wiped out, 3:20 so that times of refreshing 226 may come from the presence of the Lord, 227 and so that he may send the Messiah 228 appointed 229 for you – that is, Jesus. 3:21 This one 230 heaven must 231 receive until the time all things are restored, 232 which God declared 233 from times long ago 234 through his holy prophets. 3:22 Moses said, ‘The Lord your God will raise up for you a prophet like me from among your brothers. You must obey 235 him in everything he tells you. 236 3:23 Every person 237 who does not obey that prophet will be destroyed and thus removed 238 from the people.’ 239 3:24 And all the prophets, from Samuel and those who followed him, have spoken about and announced 240 these days. 3:25 You are the sons of the prophets and of the covenant that God made with your ancestors, 241 saying to Abraham, ‘And in your descendants 242 all the nations 243 of the earth will be blessed.’ 244 3:26 God raised up 245 his servant and sent him first to you, to bless you by turning 246 each one of you from your iniquities.” 247
4:1 While Peter and John 248 were speaking to the people, the priests and the commander 249 of the temple guard 250 and the Sadducees 251 came up 252 to them, 4:2 angry 253 because they were teaching the people and announcing 254 in Jesus the resurrection of the dead. 4:3 So 255 they seized 256 them and put them in jail 257 until the next day (for it was already evening). 4:4 But many of those who had listened to 258 the message 259 believed, and the number of the men 260 came to about five thousand.
4:5 On the next day, 261 their rulers, elders, and experts in the law 262 came together 263 in Jerusalem. 264 4:6 Annas the high priest was there, and Caiaphas, John, Alexander, and others who were members of the high priest’s family. 265 4:7 After 266 making Peter and John 267 stand in their midst, they began to inquire, “By what power or by what name 268 did you do this?” 4:8 Then Peter, filled with the Holy Spirit, 269 replied, 270 “Rulers of the people and elders, 271 4:9 if 272 we are being examined 273 today for a good deed 274 done to a sick man – by what means this man was healed 275 – 4:10 let it be known to all of you and to all the people of Israel that by the name of Jesus Christ 276 the Nazarene whom you crucified, whom God raised from the dead, this man stands before you healthy. 4:11 This Jesus 277 is the stone that was rejected by you, 278 the builders, that has become the cornerstone. 279 4:12 And there is salvation in no one else, for there is no other name under heaven given among people 280 by which we must 281 be saved.”
4:13 When they saw the boldness 282 of Peter and John, and discovered 283 that they were uneducated 284 and ordinary 285 men, they were amazed and recognized these men had been with Jesus. 4:14 And because they saw the man who had been healed standing with them, they had nothing to say against this. 286 4:15 But when they had ordered them to go outside the council, 287 they began to confer with one another, 4:16 saying, “What should we do with these men? For it is plain 288 to all who live in Jerusalem that a notable miraculous sign 289 has come about through them, 290 and we cannot deny it. 4:17 But to keep this matter from spreading any further among the people, let us warn them to speak no more 291 to anyone in this name.” 4:18 And they called them in and ordered 292 them not to speak or teach at all in the name 293 of Jesus. 4:19 But Peter and John replied, 294 “Whether it is right before God to obey 295 you rather than God, you decide, 4:20 for it is impossible 296 for us not to speak about what we have seen and heard.” 4:21 After threatening them further, they released them, for they could not find how to punish them on account of the people, because they were all praising 297 God for what had happened. 4:22 For the man, on whom this miraculous sign 298 of healing had been performed, 299 was over forty years old.
4:23 When they were released, Peter and John 300 went to their fellow believers 301 and reported everything the high priests and the elders had said to them. 4:24 When they heard this, they raised their voices to God with one mind 302 and said, “Master of all, 303 you who made the heaven, the earth, 304 the sea, and everything that is in them, 4:25 who said by the Holy Spirit through 305 your servant David our forefather, 306
‘Why do the nations 307 rage, 308
and the peoples plot foolish 309 things?
4:26 The kings of the earth stood together, 310
and the rulers assembled together,
against the Lord and against his 311 Christ.’ 312
4:27 “For indeed both Herod and Pontius Pilate, with the Gentiles and the people of Israel, assembled together in this city against 313 your holy servant Jesus, whom you anointed, 314 4:28 to do as much as your power 315 and your plan 316 had decided beforehand 317 would happen. 4:29 And now, Lord, pay attention to 318 their threats, and grant 319 to your servants 320 to speak your message 321 with great courage, 322 4:30 while you extend your hand to heal, and to bring about miraculous signs 323 and wonders through the name of your holy servant Jesus.” 4:31 When 324 they had prayed, the place where they were assembled together was shaken, 325 and they were all filled with the Holy Spirit and began to speak 326 the word of God 327 courageously. 328
4:32 The group of those who believed were of one heart and mind, 329 and no one said that any of his possessions was his own, but everything was held in common. 330 4:33 With 331 great power the apostles were giving testimony 332 to the resurrection of the Lord Jesus, and great grace was on them all. 4:34 For there was no one needy 333 among them, because those who were owners of land or houses were selling 334 them 335 and bringing the proceeds from the sales 4:35 and placing them at the apostles’ feet. The proceeds 336 were distributed to each, as anyone had need. 4:36 So Joseph, a Levite who was a native of Cyprus, called by the apostles Barnabas (which is translated “son of encouragement”), 337 4:37 sold 338 a field 339 that belonged to him and brought the money 340 and placed it at the apostles’ feet.
5:1 Now a man named Ananias, together with Sapphira his wife, sold a piece of property. 5:2 He 341 kept back for himself part of the proceeds with his wife’s knowledge; he brought 342 only part of it and placed it at the apostles’ feet. 5:3 But Peter said, “Ananias, why has Satan filled 343 your heart to lie to the Holy Spirit and keep back for yourself part of the proceeds from the sale of 344 the land? 5:4 Before it was sold, 345 did it not 346 belong to you? And when it was sold, was the money 347 not at your disposal? How have you thought up this deed in your heart? 348 You have not lied to people 349 but to God!”
5:5 When Ananias heard these words he collapsed and died, and great fear gripped 350 all who heard about it. 5:6 So the young men came, 351 wrapped him up, 352 carried him out, and buried 353 him. 5:7 After an interval of about three hours, 354 his wife came in, but she did not know 355 what had happened. 5:8 Peter said to her, “Tell me, were the two of you 356 paid this amount 357 for the land?” Sapphira 358 said, “Yes, that much.” 5:9 Peter then told her, “Why have you agreed together to test the Spirit of the Lord? Look! The feet of those who have buried your husband are at the door, and they will carry you out!” 5:10 At once 359 she collapsed at his feet and died. So when the young men came in, they found her dead, and they carried her out and buried her beside her husband. 5:11 Great 360 fear gripped 361 the whole church 362 and all who heard about these things.
5:12 Now many miraculous signs 363 and wonders came about among the people through the hands of the apostles. By 364 common consent 365 they were all meeting together in Solomon’s Portico. 366 5:13 None of the rest dared to join them, 367 but the people held them in high honor. 368 5:14 More and more believers in the Lord were added to their number, 369 crowds of both men and women. 5:15 Thus 370 they even carried the sick out into the streets, and put them on cots and pallets, so that when Peter came by at least his shadow would fall on some of them. 5:16 A crowd of people from the towns around Jerusalem 371 also came together, bringing the sick and those troubled by unclean spirits. 372 They 373 were all 374 being healed.
5:17 Now the high priest rose up, and all those with him (that is, the religious party of the Sadducees 375 ), 376 and they were filled with jealousy. 377 5:18 They 378 laid hands on 379 the apostles and put them in a public jail. 5:19 But during the night an angel of the Lord 380 opened 381 the doors of the prison, 382 led them out, 383 and said, 5:20 “Go and stand in the temple courts 384 and proclaim 385 to the people all the words of this life.” 5:21 When they heard this, they entered the temple courts 386 at daybreak and began teaching. 387
Now when the high priest and those who were with him arrived, they summoned the Sanhedrin 388 – that is, the whole high council 389 of the Israelites 390 – and sent to the jail to have the apostles 391 brought before them. 392 5:22 But the officers 393 who came for them 394 did not find them in the prison, so they returned and reported, 395 5:23 “We found the jail locked securely and the guards standing at the doors, but when we opened them, 396 we found no one inside.” 5:24 Now when the commander 397 of the temple guard 398 and the chief priests heard this report, 399 they were greatly puzzled concerning it, 400 wondering what this could 401 be. 5:25 But someone came and reported to them, “Look! The men you put in prison are standing in the temple courts 402 and teaching 403 the people!” 5:26 Then the commander 404 of the temple guard 405 went with the officers 406 and brought the apostles 407 without the use of force 408 (for they were afraid of being stoned by the people). 409
5:27 When they had brought them, they stood them before the council, 410 and the high priest questioned 411 them, 5:28 saying, “We gave 412 you strict orders 413 not to teach in this name. 414 Look, 415 you have filled Jerusalem 416 with your teaching, and you intend to bring this man’s blood 417 on us!” 5:29 But Peter and the apostles replied, 418 “We must obey 419 God rather than people. 420 5:30 The God of our forefathers 421 raised up Jesus, whom you seized and killed by hanging him on a tree. 422 5:31 God exalted him 423 to his right hand as Leader 424 and Savior, to give repentance to Israel and forgiveness of sins. 425 5:32 And we are witnesses of these events, 426 and so is the Holy Spirit whom God has given to those who obey 427 him.”
5:33 Now when they heard this, they became furious 428 and wanted to execute them. 429 5:34 But a Pharisee 430 whose name was Gamaliel, 431 a teacher of the law who was respected by all the people, stood up 432 in the council 433 and ordered the men to be put outside for a short time. 5:35 Then he said to the council, 434 “Men of Israel, 435 pay close attention to 436 what you are about to do to these men. 5:36 For some time ago 437 Theudas rose up, claiming to be somebody, and about four hundred men joined him. He 438 was killed, and all who followed him were dispersed and nothing came of it. 439 5:37 After him Judas the Galilean arose in the days of the census, 440 and incited people to follow him in revolt. 441 He too was killed, and all who followed him were scattered. 5:38 So in this case I say to you, stay away from these men and leave them alone, because if this plan or this undertaking originates with people, 442 it will come to nothing, 443 5:39 but if 444 it is from God, you will not be able to stop them, or you may even be found 445 fighting against God.” He convinced them, 446 5:40 and they summoned the apostles and had them beaten. 447 Then 448 they ordered them not to speak in the name of Jesus and released them. 5:41 So they left the council rejoicing because they had been considered worthy 449 to suffer dishonor for the sake of the name. 450 5:42 And every day both in the temple courts 451 and from house to house, they did not stop teaching and proclaiming the good news 452 that Jesus was the Christ. 453
6:1 Now in those 454 days, when the disciples were growing in number, 455 a complaint arose on the part of the Greek-speaking Jews 456 against the native Hebraic Jews, 457 because their widows 458 were being overlooked 459 in the daily distribution of food. 460 6:2 So the twelve 461 called 462 the whole group 463 of the disciples together and said, “It is not right for us to neglect the word of God to wait on tables. 464 6:3 But carefully select from among you, brothers, 465 seven 466 men who are well-attested, 467 full of the Spirit and of wisdom, whom we may put in charge 468 of this necessary task. 469 6:4 But we will devote ourselves to prayer and to the ministry of the word.” 6:5 The 470 proposal pleased the entire group, so 471 they chose Stephen, a man full of faith and of the Holy Spirit, with 472 Philip, 473 Prochorus, Nicanor, Timon, Parmenas, and Nicolas, a Gentile convert to Judaism 474 from Antioch. 475 6:6 They stood these men before the apostles, who prayed 476 and placed 477 their hands on them. 6:7 The word of God continued to spread, 478 the number of disciples in Jerusalem 479 increased greatly, and a large group 480 of priests became obedient to the faith.
6:8 Now Stephen, full of grace and power, was performing great wonders and miraculous signs 481 among the people. 6:9 But some men from the Synagogue 482 of the Freedmen (as it was called), 483 both Cyrenians and Alexandrians, as well as some from Cilicia and the province of Asia, 484 stood up and argued with Stephen. 6:10 Yet 485 they were not able to resist 486 the wisdom and the Spirit with which he spoke. 6:11 Then they secretly instigated 487 some men to say, “We have heard this man 488 speaking blasphemous words against Moses and God.” 6:12 They incited the people, the 489 elders, and the experts in the law; 490 then they approached Stephen, 491 seized him, and brought him before the council. 492 6:13 They brought forward false witnesses who said, “This man does not stop saying things against this holy place 493 and the law. 494 6:14 For we have heard him saying that Jesus the Nazarene will destroy this place and change the customs 495 that Moses handed down to us.” 6:15 All 496 who were sitting in the council 497 looked intently at Stephen 498 and saw his face was like the face of an angel. 499
7:1 Then the high priest said, “Are these things true?” 500 7:2 So he replied, 501 “Brothers and fathers, listen to me. The God of glory appeared to our forefather 502 Abraham when he was in Mesopotamia, before he settled in Haran, 7:3 and said to him, ‘Go out from your country and from your relatives, and come to the land I will show you.’ 503 7:4 Then he went out from the country of the Chaldeans and settled in Haran. After his father died, God 504 made him move 505 to this country where you now live. 7:5 He 506 did not give any of it to him for an inheritance, 507 not even a foot of ground, 508 yet God 509 promised to give it to him as his possession, and to his descendants after him, 510 even though Abraham 511 as yet had no child. 7:6 But God spoke as follows: ‘Your 512 descendants will be foreigners 513 in a foreign country, whose citizens will enslave them and mistreat them for four hundred years. 514 7:7 But I will punish 515 the nation they serve as slaves,’ said God, ‘and after these things they will come out of there 516 and worship 517 me in this place.’ 518 7:8 Then God 519 gave Abraham 520 the covenant 521 of circumcision, and so he became the father of Isaac and circumcised him when he was eight days old, 522 and Isaac became the father of 523 Jacob, and Jacob of the twelve patriarchs. 524 7:9 The 525 patriarchs, because they were jealous of Joseph, sold 526 him into Egypt. But 527 God was with him, 7:10 and rescued him from all his troubles, and granted him favor and wisdom in the presence of Pharaoh, king of Egypt, who made 528 him ruler over Egypt and over all his household. 7:11 Then a famine occurred throughout 529 Egypt and Canaan, causing 530 great suffering, and our 531 ancestors 532 could not find food. 7:12 So when Jacob heard that there was grain 533 in Egypt, he sent our ancestors 534 there 535 the first time. 7:13 On their second visit Joseph made himself known to his brothers again, and Joseph’s family 536 became known to Pharaoh. 7:14 So Joseph sent a message 537 and invited 538 his father Jacob and all his relatives to come, seventy-five people 539 in all. 7:15 So Jacob went down to Egypt and died there, 540 along with our ancestors, 541 7:16 and their bones 542 were later moved to Shechem and placed in the tomb that Abraham had bought for a certain sum of money 543 from the sons of Hamor in Shechem.
7:17 “But as the time drew near for God to fulfill the promise he had declared to Abraham, 544 the people increased greatly in number 545 in Egypt, 7:18 until another king who did not know about 546 Joseph ruled 547 over Egypt. 548 7:19 This was the one who exploited 549 our people 550 and was cruel to our ancestors, 551 forcing them to abandon 552 their infants so they would die. 553 7:20 At that time Moses was born, and he was beautiful 554 to God. For 555 three months he was brought up in his father’s house, 7:21 and when he had been abandoned, 556 Pharaoh’s daughter adopted 557 him and brought him up 558 as her own son. 7:22 So Moses was trained 559 in all the wisdom of the Egyptians and was powerful 560 in his words and deeds. 7:23 But when he was about forty years old, it entered his mind 561 to visit his fellow countrymen 562 the Israelites. 563 7:24 When 564 he saw one of them being hurt unfairly, 565 Moses 566 came to his defense 567 and avenged the person who was mistreated by striking down the Egyptian. 7:25 He thought his own people 568 would understand that God was delivering them 569 through him, 570 but they did not understand. 571 7:26 The next day Moses 572 saw two men 573 fighting, and tried to make peace between 574 them, saying, ‘Men, you are brothers; why are you hurting one another?’ 7:27 But the man who was unfairly hurting his neighbor pushed 575 Moses 576 aside, saying, ‘Who made 577 you a ruler and judge over us? 7:28 You don’t want to kill me the way you killed the Egyptian yesterday, do you?’ 578 7:29 When the man said this, 579 Moses fled and became a foreigner 580 in the land of Midian, where he became the father of two sons.
7:30 “After 581 forty years had passed, an angel appeared to him in the desert 582 of Mount Sinai, in the flame of a burning bush. 583 7:31 When Moses saw it, he was amazed at the sight, and when he approached to investigate, there came the voice of the Lord, 7:32 ‘I am the God of your forefathers, 584 the God of Abraham, Isaac, 585 and Jacob.’ 586 Moses began to tremble and did not dare to look more closely. 587 7:33 But the Lord said to him, ‘Take the sandals off your feet, for the place where you are standing is holy ground. 588 7:34 I have certainly seen the suffering 589 of my people who are in Egypt and have heard their groaning, and I have come down to rescue them. 590 Now 591 come, I will send you to Egypt.’ 592 7:35 This same 593 Moses they had rejected, saying, ‘Who made you a ruler and judge?’ 594 God sent as both ruler and deliverer 595 through the hand of the angel 596 who appeared to him in the bush. 7:36 This man led them out, performing wonders and miraculous signs 597 in the land of Egypt, 598 at 599 the Red Sea, and in the wilderness 600 for forty years. 7:37 This is the Moses who said to the Israelites, 601 ‘God will raise up for you a prophet like me from among your brothers.’ 602 7:38 This is the man who was in the congregation 603 in the wilderness 604 with the angel who spoke to him at Mount Sinai, and with our ancestors, 605 and he 606 received living oracles 607 to give to you. 608 7:39 Our 609 ancestors 610 were unwilling to obey 611 him, but pushed him aside 612 and turned back to Egypt in their hearts, 7:40 saying to Aaron, ‘Make us gods who will go in front of us, for this Moses, who led us out of the land of Egypt 613 – we do not know what has happened to him!’ 614 7:41 At 615 that time 616 they made an idol in the form of a calf, 617 brought 618 a sacrifice to the idol, and began rejoicing 619 in the works of their hands. 620 7:42 But God turned away from them and gave them over 621 to worship the host 622 of heaven, as it is written in the book of the prophets: ‘It was not to me that you offered slain animals and sacrifices 623 forty years in the wilderness, was it, 624 house of Israel? 7:43 But you took along the tabernacle 625 of Moloch 626 and the star of the 627 god Rephan, 628 the images you made to worship, but I will deport 629 you beyond Babylon.’ 630 7:44 Our ancestors 631 had the tabernacle 632 of testimony in the wilderness, 633 just as God 634 who spoke to Moses ordered him 635 to make it according to the design he had seen. 7:45 Our 636 ancestors 637 received possession of it and brought it in with Joshua when they dispossessed the nations that God drove out before our ancestors, 638 until the time 639 of David. 7:46 He 640 found favor 641 with 642 God and asked that he could 643 find a dwelling place 644 for the house 645 of Jacob. 7:47 But Solomon built a house 646 for him. 7:48 Yet the Most High 647 does not live in houses made by human hands, 648 as the prophet says,
7:49 ‘Heaven is my throne,
and earth is the footstool for my feet.
What kind of house will you build for me, says the Lord,
or what is my resting place? 649
7:50 Did my hand 650 not make all these things?’ 651
7:51 “You stubborn 652 people, with uncircumcised 653 hearts and ears! 654 You are always resisting the Holy Spirit, like your ancestors 655 did! 7:52 Which of the prophets did your ancestors 656 not persecute? 657 They 658 killed those who foretold long ago the coming of the Righteous One, 659 whose betrayers and murderers you have now become! 660 7:53 You 661 received the law by decrees given by angels, 662 but you did not obey 663 it.” 664
7:54 When they heard these things, they became furious 665 and ground their teeth 666 at him. 7:55 But Stephen, 667 full 668 of the Holy Spirit, looked intently 669 toward heaven and saw the glory of God, and Jesus standing 670 at the right hand of God. 7:56 “Look!” he said. 671 “I see the heavens opened, and the Son of Man standing at the right hand of God!” 7:57 But they covered their ears, 672 shouting out with a loud voice, and rushed at him with one intent. 7:58 When 673 they had driven him out of the city, they began to stone him, 674 and the witnesses laid their cloaks 675 at the feet of a young man named Saul. 7:59 They 676 continued to stone Stephen while he prayed, “Lord Jesus, receive my spirit!” 7:60 Then he fell 677 to his knees and cried out with a loud voice, “Lord, do not hold this sin against them!” 678 When 679 he had said this, he died. 680 8:1 And Saul agreed completely with killing 681 him.
Now on that day a great 682 persecution began 683 against the church in Jerusalem, 684 and all 685 except the apostles were forced to scatter throughout the regions 686 of Judea and Samaria. 8:2 Some 687 devout men buried Stephen and made loud lamentation 688 over him. 689 8:3 But Saul was trying to destroy 690 the church; entering one house after another, he dragged off 691 both men and women and put them in prison. 692
8:4 Now those who had been forced to scatter went around proclaiming the good news of the word. 8:5 Philip went down to the main city of Samaria 693 and began proclaiming 694 the Christ 695 to them. 8:6 The crowds were paying attention with one mind to what Philip said, 696 as they heard and saw the miraculous signs 697 he was performing. 8:7 For unclean spirits, 698 crying with loud shrieks, were coming out of many who were possessed, 699 and many paralyzed and lame people were healed. 8:8 So there was 700 great joy 701 in that city.
8:9 Now in that city was a man named Simon, who had been practicing magic 702 and amazing the people of Samaria, claiming to be someone great. 8:10 All the people, 703 from the least to the greatest, paid close attention to him, saying, “This man is the power of God that is called ‘Great.’” 704 8:11 And they paid close attention to him because he had amazed them for a long time with his magic. 8:12 But when they believed Philip as he was proclaiming the good news about the kingdom of God 705 and the name of Jesus Christ, 706 they began to be baptized, 707 both men and women. 8:13 Even Simon himself believed, and after he was baptized, he stayed close to 708 Philip constantly, and when he saw the signs and great miracles that were occurring, he was amazed. 709
8:14 Now when the apostles in Jerusalem 710 heard that Samaria had accepted the word 711 of God, they sent 712 Peter and John to them. 8:15 These two 713 went down and prayed for them so that they would receive the Holy Spirit. 8:16 (For the Spirit 714 had not yet come upon 715 any of them, but they had only been baptized in the name of the Lord Jesus.) 716 8:17 Then Peter and John placed their hands on the Samaritans, 717 and they received the Holy Spirit. 718
8:18 Now Simon, when he saw that the Spirit 719 was given through the laying on of the apostles’ hands, offered them money, 8:19 saying, “Give me this power 720 too, so that everyone I place my hands on may receive the Holy Spirit.” 8:20 But Peter said to him, “May your silver perish with you, 721 because you thought you could acquire 722 God’s gift with money! 8:21 You have no share or part 723 in this matter 724 because your heart is not right before God! 8:22 Therefore repent of this wickedness of yours, and pray to the Lord 725 that he may perhaps forgive you for the intent of your heart. 726 8:23 For I see that you are bitterly envious 727 and in bondage to sin.” 8:24 But Simon replied, 728 “You pray to the Lord for me so that nothing of what you have said may happen to 729 me.”
8:25 So after Peter and John 730 had solemnly testified 731 and spoken the word of the Lord, 732 they started back to Jerusalem, proclaiming 733 the good news to many Samaritan villages 734 as they went. 735
8:26 Then an angel of the Lord 736 said to Philip, 737 “Get up and go south 738 on the road that goes down from Jerusalem 739 to Gaza.” (This is a desert 740 road.) 741 8:27 So 742 he got up 743 and went. There 744 he met 745 an Ethiopian eunuch, 746 a court official of Candace, 747 queen of the Ethiopians, who was in charge of all her treasury. He 748 had come to Jerusalem to worship, 749 8:28 and was returning home, sitting 750 in his chariot, reading 751 the prophet Isaiah. 8:29 Then the Spirit said to Philip, “Go over and join this chariot.” 8:30 So Philip ran up 752 to it 753 and heard the man 754 reading Isaiah the prophet. He 755 asked him, 756 “Do you understand what you’re reading?” 8:31 The man 757 replied, “How in the world can I, 758 unless someone guides me?” So he invited Philip to come up and sit with him. 8:32 Now the passage of scripture the man 759 was reading was this:
“He was led like a sheep to slaughter,
and like a lamb before its shearer is silent,
so he did 760 not open his mouth.
8:33 In humiliation 761 justice was taken from him. 762
Who can describe his posterity? 763
For his life was taken away 764 from the earth.” 765
8:34 Then the eunuch said 766 to Philip, “Please tell me, 767 who is the prophet saying this about – himself or someone else?” 768 8:35 So Philip started speaking, 769 and beginning with this scripture 770 proclaimed the good news about Jesus to him. 8:36 Now as they were going along the road, they came to some water, and the eunuch said, “Look, there is water! What is to stop me 771 from being baptized?” 8:37 [[EMPTY]] 772 8:38 So he ordered the chariot to stop, and both Philip and the eunuch went down into the water, 773 and Philip baptized 774 him. 8:39 Now when they came up out of the water, the Spirit of the Lord snatched Philip away, and the eunuch did not see him any more, but 775 went on his way rejoicing. 776 8:40 Philip, however, found himself 777 at Azotus, 778 and as he passed through the area, 779 he proclaimed the good news 780 to all the towns 781 until he came to Caesarea. 782
9:1 Meanwhile Saul, still breathing out threats 783 to murder 784 the Lord’s disciples, went to the high priest 9:2 and requested letters from him to the synagogues 785 in Damascus, so that if he found any who belonged to the Way, 786 either men or women, he could bring them as prisoners 787 to Jerusalem. 788 9:3 As he was going along, approaching 789 Damascus, suddenly a light from heaven flashed 790 around him. 9:4 He 791 fell to the ground and heard a voice saying to him, “Saul, Saul, 792 why are you persecuting me?” 793 9:5 So he said, “Who are you, Lord?” He replied, “I am Jesus whom you are persecuting! 9:6 But stand up 794 and enter the city and you will be told 795 what you must do.” 9:7 (Now the men 796 who were traveling with him stood there speechless, 797 because they heard the voice but saw no one.) 798 9:8 So Saul got up from the ground, but although his eyes were open, 799 he could see nothing. 800 Leading him by the hand, his companions 801 brought him into Damascus. 9:9 For 802 three days he could not see, and he neither ate nor drank anything. 803
9:10 Now there was a disciple in Damascus named Ananias. The 804 Lord 805 said to him in a vision, “Ananias,” and he replied, “Here I am, 806 Lord.” 9:11 Then the Lord told him, “Get up and go to the street called ‘Straight,’ 807 and at Judas’ house look for a man from Tarsus named Saul. For he is praying, 9:12 and he has seen in a vision 808 a man named Ananias come in and place his hands on him so that he may see again.” 9:13 But Ananias replied, 809 “Lord, I have heard from many people 810 about this man, how much harm he has done to your saints in Jerusalem, 9:14 and here he has authority from the chief priests to imprison 811 all who call on your name!” 812 9:15 But the Lord said to him, “Go, because this man is my chosen instrument 813 to carry my name before Gentiles and kings and the people of Israel. 814 9:16 For I will show him how much he must suffer for the sake of my name.” 815 9:17 So Ananias departed and entered the house, placed 816 his hands on Saul 817 and said, “Brother Saul, the Lord Jesus, who appeared to you on the road as you came here, 818 has sent me so that you may see again and be filled with the Holy Spirit.” 819 9:18 Immediately 820 something like scales 821 fell from his eyes, and he could see again. He 822 got up and was baptized, 9:19 and after taking some food, his strength returned.
For several days 823 he was with the disciples in Damascus, 9:20 and immediately he began to proclaim Jesus in the synagogues, 824 saying, “This man is the Son of God.” 825 9:21 All 826 who heard him were amazed and were saying, “Is this not 827 the man who in Jerusalem was ravaging 828 those who call on this name, and who had come here to bring them as prisoners 829 to the chief priests?” 9:22 But Saul became more and more capable, 830 and was causing consternation 831 among the Jews who lived in Damascus by proving 832 that Jesus 833 is the Christ. 834
9:23 Now after some days had passed, the Jews plotted 835 together to kill him, 9:24 but Saul learned of their plot against him. 836 They were also watching 837 the city gates 838 day and night so that they could kill him. 9:25 But his disciples took him at night and let him down through an opening 839 in the wall by lowering him in a basket. 840
9:26 When he arrived in Jerusalem, 841 he attempted to associate 842 with the disciples, and they were all afraid of him, because they did not believe 843 that he was a disciple. 9:27 But Barnabas took 844 Saul, 845 brought 846 him to the apostles, and related to them how he had seen the Lord on the road, that 847 the Lord had spoken to him, and how in Damascus he had spoken out boldly 848 in the name of Jesus. 9:28 So he was staying with them, associating openly with them 849 in Jerusalem, speaking out boldly in the name of the Lord. 9:29 He was speaking and debating 850 with the Greek-speaking Jews, 851 but they were trying to kill him. 9:30 When the brothers found out about this, they brought him down to Caesarea 852 and sent him away to Tarsus.
9:31 Then 853 the church throughout Judea, Galilee, 854 and Samaria experienced 855 peace and thus was strengthened. 856 Living 857 in the fear of the Lord and in the encouragement of the Holy Spirit, the church 858 increased in numbers.
9:32 Now 859 as Peter was traveling around from place to place, 860 he also came down to the saints who lived in Lydda. 861 9:33 He found there a man named Aeneas who had been confined to a mattress for eight years because 862 he was paralyzed. 9:34 Peter 863 said to him, “Aeneas, Jesus the Christ 864 heals you. Get up and make your own bed!” 865 And immediately he got up. 9:35 All 866 those who lived in Lydda 867 and Sharon 868 saw him, and they 869 turned 870 to the Lord.
9:36 Now in Joppa 871 there was a disciple named Tabitha (which in translation means 872 Dorcas). 873 She was continually doing good deeds and acts of charity. 874 9:37 At that time 875 she became sick 876 and died. When they had washed 877 her body, 878 they placed it in an upstairs room. 9:38 Because Lydda 879 was near Joppa, when the disciples heard that Peter was there, they sent two men to him and urged him, “Come to us without delay.” 880 9:39 So Peter got up and went with them, and 881 when he arrived 882 they brought him to the upper room. All 883 the widows stood beside him, crying and showing him 884 the tunics 885 and other clothing 886 Dorcas used to make 887 while she was with them. 9:40 But Peter sent them all outside, 888 knelt down, 889 and prayed. Turning 890 to the body, he said, “Tabitha, get up.” Then she opened her eyes, and when she saw Peter, she sat up. 891 9:41 He gave 892 her his hand and helped her get up. Then he called 893 the saints and widows and presented her alive. 9:42 This became known throughout all 894 Joppa, and many believed in the Lord. 895 9:43 So 896 Peter 897 stayed many days in Joppa with a man named 898 Simon, a tanner. 899
10:1 Now there was a man in Caesarea 900 named Cornelius, a centurion 901 of what was known as the Italian Cohort. 902 10:2 He 903 was a devout, God-fearing man, 904 as was all his household; he did many acts of charity for the people 905 and prayed to God regularly. 10:3 About three o’clock one afternoon 906 he saw clearly in a vision an angel of God 907 who came in 908 and said to him, “Cornelius.” 10:4 Staring at him and becoming greatly afraid, Cornelius 909 replied, 910 “What is it, Lord?” The angel 911 said to him, “Your prayers and your acts of charity 912 have gone up as a memorial 913 before God. 10:5 Now 914 send men to Joppa 915 and summon a man named Simon, 916 who is called Peter. 10:6 This man is staying as a guest with a man named Simon, a tanner, 917 whose house is by the sea.” 10:7 When the angel who had spoken to him departed, Cornelius 918 called two of his personal servants 919 and a devout soldier from among those who served him, 920 10:8 and when he had explained everything to them, he sent them to Joppa.
10:9 About noon 921 the next day, while they were on their way and approaching 922 the city, Peter went up on the roof 923 to pray. 10:10 He became hungry and wanted to eat, but while they were preparing the meal, a trance came over him. 924 10:11 He 925 saw heaven 926 opened 927 and an object something like a large sheet 928 descending, 929 being let down to earth 930 by its four corners. 10:12 In it 931 were all kinds of four-footed animals and reptiles 932 of the earth and wild birds. 933 10:13 Then 934 a voice said 935 to him, “Get up, Peter; slaughter 936 and eat!” 10:14 But Peter said, “Certainly not, Lord, for I have never eaten anything defiled and ritually unclean!” 937 10:15 The voice 938 spoke to him again, a second time, “What God has made clean, you must not consider 939 ritually unclean!” 940 10:16 This happened three times, and immediately the object was taken up into heaven. 941
10:17 Now while Peter was puzzling over 942 what the vision he had seen could signify, the men sent by Cornelius had learned where Simon’s house was 943 and approached 944 the gate. 10:18 They 945 called out to ask if Simon, known as Peter, 946 was staying there as a guest. 10:19 While Peter was still thinking seriously about 947 the vision, the Spirit said to him, “Look! Three men are looking for you. 10:20 But get up, 948 go down, and accompany them without hesitation, 949 because I have sent them.” 10:21 So Peter went down 950 to the men and said, “Here I am, 951 the person you’re looking for. Why have you come?” 10:22 They said, “Cornelius the centurion, 952 a righteous 953 and God-fearing man, well spoken of by the whole Jewish nation, 954 was directed by a holy angel to summon you to his house and to hear a message 955 from you.” 10:23 So Peter 956 invited them in and entertained them as guests.
On the next day he got up and set out 957 with them, and some of the brothers from Joppa 958 accompanied him. 10:24 The following day 959 he entered Caesarea. 960 Now Cornelius was waiting anxiously 961 for them and had called together his relatives and close friends. 10:25 So when 962 Peter came in, Cornelius met 963 him, fell 964 at his feet, and worshiped 965 him. 10:26 But Peter helped him up, 966 saying, “Stand up. I too am a mere mortal.” 967 10:27 Peter 968 continued talking with him as he went in, and he found many people gathered together. 969 10:28 He said to them, “You know that 970 it is unlawful 971 for a Jew 972 to associate with or visit a Gentile, 973 yet God has shown me that I should call no person 974 defiled or ritually unclean. 975 10:29 Therefore when you sent for me, 976 I came without any objection. Now may I ask why 977 you sent for me?” 10:30 Cornelius 978 replied, 979 “Four days ago at this very hour, at three o’clock in the afternoon, 980 I was praying in my house, and suddenly 981 a man in shining clothing stood before me 10:31 and said, ‘Cornelius, your prayer has been heard and your acts of charity 982 have been remembered before God. 983 10:32 Therefore send to Joppa and summon Simon, who is called Peter. This man is staying as a guest in the house of Simon the tanner, 984 by the sea.’ 10:33 Therefore I sent for you at once, and you were kind enough to come. 985 So now we are all here in the presence of God 986 to listen 987 to everything the Lord has commanded you to say to us.” 988
10:34 Then Peter started speaking: 989 “I now truly understand that God does not show favoritism in dealing with people, 990 10:35 but in every nation 991 the person who fears him 992 and does what is right 993 is welcomed before him. 10:36 You know 994 the message 995 he sent to the people 996 of Israel, proclaiming the good news of peace 997 through 998 Jesus Christ 999 (he is Lord 1000 of all) – 10:37 you know what happened throughout Judea, beginning from Galilee after the baptism that John announced: 1001 10:38 with respect to Jesus from Nazareth, 1002 that 1003 God anointed him with the Holy Spirit and with power. He 1004 went around doing good and healing all who were oppressed by the devil, 1005 because God was with him. 1006 10:39 We 1007 are witnesses of all the things he did both in Judea 1008 and in Jerusalem. 1009 They 1010 killed him by hanging him on a tree, 1011 10:40 but 1012 God raised him up on the third day and caused him to be seen, 1013 10:41 not by all the people, but by us, the witnesses God had already chosen, 1014 who ate and drank 1015 with him after he rose from the dead. 10:42 He 1016 commanded us to preach to the people and to warn 1017 them 1018 that he is the one 1019 appointed 1020 by God as judge 1021 of the living and the dead. 10:43 About him all the prophets testify, 1022 that everyone who believes in him receives forgiveness of sins 1023 through his name.”
10:44 While Peter was still speaking these words, the Holy Spirit fell on 1024 all those who heard the message. 1025 10:45 The 1026 circumcised believers 1027 who had accompanied Peter were greatly astonished 1028 that 1029 the gift of the Holy Spirit 1030 had been poured out 1031 even on the Gentiles, 10:46 for they heard them speaking in tongues and praising 1032 God. Then Peter said, 10:47 “No one can withhold the water for these people to be baptized, who have received the Holy Spirit just as we did, 1033 can he?” 1034 10:48 So he gave orders to have them baptized 1035 in the name of Jesus Christ. 1036 Then they asked him to stay for several days.
11:1 Now the apostles and the brothers who were throughout Judea heard that the Gentiles too had accepted 1037 the word of God. 1038 11:2 So when Peter went up to Jerusalem, 1039 the circumcised believers 1040 took issue with 1041 him, 11:3 saying, “You went to 1042 uncircumcised men and shared a meal with 1043 them.” 11:4 But Peter began and explained it to them point by point, 1044 saying, 11:5 “I was in the city of Joppa praying, and in a trance I saw a vision, 1045 an object something like a large sheet descending, 1046 being let down from heaven 1047 by its four corners, and it came to me. 11:6 As I stared 1048 I looked into it and saw four-footed animals of the earth, wild animals, reptiles, 1049 and wild birds. 1050 11:7 I also heard a voice saying to me, ‘Get up, Peter; slaughter 1051 and eat!’ 11:8 But I said, ‘Certainly not, Lord, for nothing defiled or ritually unclean 1052 has ever entered my mouth!’ 11:9 But the voice replied a second time from heaven, ‘What God has made clean, you must not consider 1053 ritually unclean!’ 11:10 This happened three times, and then everything was pulled up to heaven again. 11:11 At that very moment, 1054 three men sent to me from Caesarea 1055 approached 1056 the house where we were staying. 1057 11:12 The Spirit told me to accompany them without hesitation. These six brothers 1058 also went with me, and we entered the man’s house. 11:13 He informed us how he had seen an angel standing in his house and saying, ‘Send to Joppa and summon Simon, who is called Peter, 11:14 who will speak a message 1059 to you by which you and your entire household will be saved.’ 11:15 Then as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit fell on 1060 them just as he did 1061 on us at the beginning. 1062 11:16 And I remembered the word of the Lord, 1063 as he used to say, 1064 ‘John baptized with water, but you will be baptized with the Holy Spirit.’ 1065 11:17 Therefore if God 1066 gave them the same gift 1067 as he also gave us after believing 1068 in the Lord Jesus Christ, 1069 who was I to hinder 1070 God?” 11:18 When they heard this, 1071 they ceased their objections 1072 and praised 1073 God, saying, “So then, God has granted the repentance 1074 that leads to life even to the Gentiles.” 1075
11:19 Now those who had been scattered because of the persecution that took place over Stephen 1076 went as far as 1077 Phoenicia, 1078 Cyprus, 1079 and Antioch, 1080 speaking the message 1081 to no one but Jews. 11:20 But there were some men from Cyprus 1082 and Cyrene 1083 among them who came 1084 to Antioch 1085 and began to speak to the Greeks 1086 too, proclaiming the good news of the Lord Jesus. 11:21 The 1087 hand of the Lord was with them, and a great number who believed 1088 turned 1089 to the Lord. 11:22 A report 1090 about them came to the attention 1091 of the church in Jerusalem, 1092 and they sent Barnabas 1093 to Antioch. 1094 11:23 When 1095 he came and saw the grace of God, he rejoiced and encouraged them all to remain true 1096 to the Lord with devoted hearts, 1097 11:24 because he was a good man, full of the Holy Spirit and of faith, and a significant number of people 1098 were brought to the Lord. 11:25 Then Barnabas departed for Tarsus to look for Saul, 11:26 and when he found him, he brought him to Antioch. 1099 So 1100 for a whole year Barnabas and Saul 1101 met with the church and taught a significant number of people. 1102 Now it was in Antioch 1103 that the disciples were first called Christians. 1104
11:27 At that time 1105 some 1106 prophets 1107 came down 1108 from Jerusalem 1109 to Antioch. 1110 11:28 One of them, named Agabus, got up 1111 and predicted 1112 by the Spirit that a severe 1113 famine 1114 was about to come over the whole inhabited world. 1115 (This 1116 took place during the reign of Claudius.) 1117 11:29 So the disciples, each in accordance with his financial ability, 1118 decided 1119 to send relief 1120 to the brothers living in Judea. 11:30 They did so, 1121 sending their financial aid 1122 to the elders by Barnabas and Saul.
12:1 About that time King Herod 1123 laid hands on 1124 some from the church to harm them. 1125 12:2 He had James, the brother of John, executed with a sword. 1126 12:3 When he saw that this pleased the Jews, 1127 he proceeded to arrest Peter too. (This took place during the feast of Unleavened Bread.) 1128 12:4 When he had seized him, he put him in prison, handing him over to four squads 1129 of soldiers to guard him. Herod 1130 planned 1131 to bring him out for public trial 1132 after the Passover. 12:5 So Peter was kept in prison, but those in the church were earnestly 1133 praying to God for him. 1134 12:6 On that very night before Herod was going to bring him out for trial, 1135 Peter was sleeping between two soldiers, bound with two chains, while 1136 guards in front of the door were keeping watch 1137 over the prison. 12:7 Suddenly 1138 an angel of the Lord 1139 appeared, and a light shone in the prison cell. He struck 1140 Peter on the side and woke him up, saying, “Get up quickly!” And the chains fell off Peter’s 1141 wrists. 1142 12:8 The angel said to him, “Fasten your belt 1143 and put on your sandals.” Peter 1144 did so. Then the angel 1145 said to him, “Put on your cloak 1146 and follow me.” 12:9 Peter 1147 went out 1148 and followed him; 1149 he did not realize that what was happening through the angel was real, 1150 but thought he was seeing a vision. 12:10 After they had passed the first and second guards, 1151 they came to the iron 1152 gate leading into the city. It 1153 opened for them by itself, 1154 and they went outside and walked down one narrow street, 1155 when at once the angel left him. 12:11 When 1156 Peter came to himself, he said, “Now I know for certain that the Lord has sent his angel and rescued 1157 me from the hand 1158 of Herod 1159 and from everything the Jewish people 1160 were expecting to happen.”
12:12 When Peter 1161 realized this, he went to the house of Mary, the mother of John Mark, 1162 where many people had gathered together and were praying. 12:13 When he knocked at the door of the outer gate, a slave girl named Rhoda answered. 1163 12:14 When she recognized Peter’s voice, she was so overjoyed she did not open the gate, but ran back in and told 1164 them 1165 that Peter was standing at the gate. 12:15 But they said to her, “You’ve lost your mind!” 1166 But she kept insisting that it was Peter, 1167 and they kept saying, 1168 “It is his angel!” 1169 12:16 Now Peter continued knocking, and when they opened the door 1170 and saw him, they were greatly astonished. 1171 12:17 He motioned to them 1172 with his hand to be quiet and then related 1173 how the Lord had brought 1174 him out of the prison. He said, “Tell James and the brothers these things,” and then he left and went to another place. 1175
12:18 At daybreak 1176 there was great consternation 1177 among the soldiers over what had become of Peter. 12:19 When Herod 1178 had searched 1179 for him and did not find him, he questioned 1180 the guards and commanded that they be led away to execution. 1181 Then 1182 Herod 1183 went down from Judea to Caesarea 1184 and stayed there.
12:20 Now Herod 1185 was having an angry quarrel 1186 with the people of Tyre 1187 and Sidon. 1188 So they joined together 1189 and presented themselves before him. And after convincing 1190 Blastus, the king’s personal assistant, 1191 to help them, 1192 they asked for peace, 1193 because their country’s food supply was provided by the king’s country. 12:21 On a day determined in advance, Herod 1194 put on his royal robes, 1195 sat down on the judgment seat, 1196 and made a speech 1197 to them. 12:22 But the crowd 1198 began to shout, 1199 “The voice of a god, 1200 and not of a man!” 12:23 Immediately an angel of the Lord 1201 struck 1202 Herod 1203 down because he did not give the glory to God, and he was eaten by worms and died. 1204 12:24 But the word of God 1205 kept on increasing 1206 and multiplying.
12:25 So Barnabas and Saul returned to 1207 Jerusalem 1208 when they had completed 1209 their mission, 1210 bringing along with them John Mark. 1211
13:1 Now there were these prophets and teachers in the church at Antioch: 1212 Barnabas, Simeon called Niger, 1213 Lucius the Cyrenian, 1214 Manaen (a close friend of Herod 1215 the tetrarch 1216 from childhood 1217 ) and Saul. 13:2 While they were serving 1218 the Lord and fasting, the Holy Spirit said, “Set apart 1219 for me Barnabas and Saul for the work to which I have called them.” 13:3 Then, after they had fasted 1220 and 1221 prayed and placed their hands 1222 on them, they sent them off.
13:4 So Barnabas and Saul, 1223 sent out by the Holy Spirit, went down to Seleucia, 1224 and from there they sailed to Cyprus. 1225 13:5 When 1226 they arrived 1227 in Salamis, 1228 they began to proclaim 1229 the word of God in the Jewish synagogues. 1230 (Now they also had John 1231 as their assistant.) 1232 13:6 When they had crossed over 1233 the whole island as far as Paphos, 1234 they found a magician, a Jewish false prophet named Bar-Jesus, 1235 13:7 who was with the proconsul 1236 Sergius Paulus, an intelligent man. The proconsul 1237 summoned 1238 Barnabas and Saul and wanted to hear 1239 the word of God. 13:8 But the magician Elymas 1240 (for that is the way his name is translated) 1241 opposed them, trying to turn the proconsul 1242 away from the faith. 13:9 But Saul (also known as Paul), 1243 filled with the Holy Spirit, 1244 stared straight 1245 at him 13:10 and said, “You who are full of all deceit and all wrongdoing, 1246 you son of the devil, you enemy of all righteousness – will you not stop making crooked the straight paths of the Lord? 1247 13:11 Now 1248 look, the hand of the Lord is against 1249 you, and you will be blind, unable to see the sun for a time!” Immediately mistiness 1250 and darkness came over 1251 him, and he went around seeking people 1252 to lead him by the hand. 13:12 Then when the proconsul 1253 saw what had happened, he believed, 1254 because he was greatly astounded 1255 at the teaching about 1256 the Lord.
13:13 Then Paul and his companions put out to sea 1257 from Paphos 1258 and came to Perga 1259 in Pamphylia, 1260 but John 1261 left them and returned to Jerusalem. 1262 13:14 Moving on from 1263 Perga, 1264 they arrived at Pisidian Antioch, 1265 and on the Sabbath day they went into 1266 the synagogue 1267 and sat down. 13:15 After the reading from the law and the prophets, 1268 the leaders of the synagogue 1269 sent them a message, 1270 saying, “Brothers, 1271 if you have any message 1272 of exhortation 1273 for the people, speak it.” 1274 13:16 So Paul stood up, 1275 gestured 1276 with his hand and said,
“Men of Israel, 1277 and you Gentiles who fear God, 1278 listen: 13:17 The God of this people Israel 1279 chose our ancestors 1280 and made the people great 1281 during their stay as foreigners 1282 in the country 1283 of Egypt, and with uplifted arm 1284 he led them out of it. 13:18 For 1285 a period of about forty years he put up with 1286 them in the wilderness. 1287 13:19 After 1288 he had destroyed 1289 seven nations 1290 in the land of Canaan, he gave his people their land as an inheritance. 1291 13:20 All this took 1292 about four hundred fifty years. After this 1293 he gave them judges until the time of 1294 Samuel the prophet. 13:21 Then they asked for a king, and God gave them Saul son of Kish, a man from the tribe of Benjamin, who ruled 1295 forty years. 13:22 After removing him, God 1296 raised up 1297 David their king. He testified about him: 1298 ‘I have found David 1299 the son of Jesse to be a man after my heart, 1300 who will accomplish everything I want him to do.’ 1301 13:23 From the descendants 1302 of this man 1303 God brought to Israel a Savior, Jesus, just as he promised. 1304 13:24 Before 1305 Jesus 1306 arrived, John 1307 had proclaimed a baptism for repentance 1308 to all the people of Israel. 13:25 But while John was completing his mission, 1309 he said repeatedly, 1310 ‘What do you think I am? I am not he. But look, one is coming after me. I am not worthy to untie the sandals on his feet!’ 1311 13:26 Brothers, 1312 descendants 1313 of Abraham’s family, 1314 and those Gentiles among you who fear God, 1315 the message 1316 of this salvation has been sent to us. 13:27 For the people who live in Jerusalem and their rulers did not recognize 1317 him, 1318 and they fulfilled the sayings 1319 of the prophets that are read every Sabbath by condemning 1320 him. 1321 13:28 Though 1322 they found 1323 no basis 1324 for a death sentence, 1325 they asked Pilate to have him executed. 13:29 When they had accomplished 1326 everything that was written 1327 about him, they took him down 1328 from the cross 1329 and placed him 1330 in a tomb. 13:30 But God raised 1331 him from the dead, 13:31 and 1332 for many days he appeared to those who had accompanied 1333 him from Galilee to Jerusalem. These 1334 are now his witnesses to the people. 13:32 And we proclaim to you the good news about the promise to our ancestors, 1335 13:33 that this promise 1336 God has fulfilled to us, their children, by raising 1337 Jesus, as also it is written in the second psalm, ‘You are my Son; 1338 today I have fathered you.’ 1339 13:34 But regarding the fact that he has raised Jesus 1340 from the dead, never 1341 again to be 1342 in a state of decay, God 1343 has spoken in this way: ‘I will give you 1344 the holy and trustworthy promises 1345 made to David.’ 1346 13:35 Therefore he also says in another psalm, 1347 ‘You will not permit your Holy One 1348 to experience 1349 decay.’ 1350 13:36 For David, after he had served 1351 God’s purpose in his own generation, died, 1352 was buried with his ancestors, 1353 and experienced 1354 decay, 13:37 but the one 1355 whom God raised up did not experience 1356 decay. 13:38 Therefore let it be known to you, brothers, that through this one 1357 forgiveness of sins is proclaimed to you, 13:39 and by this one 1358 everyone who believes is justified 1359 from everything from which the law of Moses could not justify 1360 you. 1361 13:40 Watch out, 1362 then, that what is spoken about by 1363 the prophets does not happen to you:
13:41 ‘Look, you scoffers; be amazed and perish! 1364
For I am doing a work in your days,
a work you would never believe, even if someone tells you.’” 1365
13:42 As Paul and Barnabas 1366 were going out, 1367 the people 1368 were urging 1369 them to speak about these things 1370 on the next Sabbath. 13:43 When the meeting of the synagogue 1371 had broken up, 1372 many of the Jews and God-fearing proselytes 1373 followed Paul and Barnabas, who were speaking with them and were persuading 1374 them 1375 to continue 1376 in the grace of God.
13:44 On the next Sabbath almost the whole city assembled together to hear the word of the Lord. 1377 13:45 But when the Jews saw the crowds, they were filled with jealousy, 1378 and they began to contradict 1379 what Paul was saying 1380 by reviling him. 1381 13:46 Both Paul and Barnabas replied courageously, 1382 “It was necessary to speak the word of God 1383 to you first. Since you reject it and do not consider yourselves worthy 1384 of eternal life, we 1385 are turning to the Gentiles. 1386 13:47 For this 1387 is what the Lord has commanded us: ‘I have appointed 1388 you to be a light 1389 for the Gentiles, to bring salvation 1390 to the ends of the earth.’” 1391 13:48 When the Gentiles heard this, they began to rejoice 1392 and praise 1393 the word of the Lord, and all who had been appointed for eternal life 1394 believed. 13:49 So the word of the Lord was spreading 1395 through the entire region. 13:50 But the Jews incited 1396 the God-fearing women of high social standing and the prominent men of the city, stirred up persecution against Paul and Barnabas, and threw them out 1397 of their region. 13:51 So after they shook 1398 the dust off their feet 1399 in protest against them, they went to Iconium. 1400 13:52 And the disciples were filled with joy 1401 and with the Holy Spirit.
14:1 The same thing happened in Iconium 1402 when Paul and Barnabas 1403 went into the Jewish synagogue 1404 and spoke in such a way that a large group 1405 of both Jews and Greeks believed. 14:2 But the Jews who refused to believe 1406 stirred up the Gentiles and poisoned their minds 1407 against the brothers. 14:3 So they stayed there 1408 for a considerable time, speaking out courageously for the Lord, who testified 1409 to the message 1410 of his grace, granting miraculous signs 1411 and wonders to be performed through their hands. 14:4 But the population 1412 of the city was divided; some 1413 sided with the Jews, and some with the apostles. 14:5 When both the Gentiles and the Jews (together with their rulers) made 1414 an attempt to mistreat 1415 them and stone them, 1416 14:6 Paul and Barnabas 1417 learned about it 1418 and fled to the Lycaonian cities of Lystra 1419 and Derbe 1420 and the surrounding region. 14:7 There 1421 they continued to proclaim 1422 the good news.
14:8 In 1423 Lystra 1424 sat a man who could not use his feet, 1425 lame from birth, 1426 who had never walked. 14:9 This man was listening to Paul as he was speaking. When Paul 1427 stared 1428 intently at him and saw he had faith to be healed, 14:10 he said with a loud voice, “Stand upright on your feet.” 1429 And the man 1430 leaped up and began walking. 1431 14:11 So when the crowds saw what Paul had done, they shouted 1432 in the Lycaonian language, 1433 “The gods have come down to us in human form!” 1434 14:12 They began to call 1435 Barnabas Zeus 1436 and Paul Hermes, 1437 because he was the chief speaker. 14:13 The priest of the temple 1438 of Zeus, 1439 located just outside the city, brought bulls 1440 and garlands 1441 to the city gates; he and the crowds wanted to offer sacrifices to them. 1442 14:14 But when the apostles 1443 Barnabas and Paul heard about 1444 it, they tore 1445 their clothes and rushed out 1446 into the crowd, shouting, 1447 14:15 “Men, why are you doing these things? We too are men, with human natures 1448 just like you! We are proclaiming the good news to you, so that you should turn 1449 from these worthless 1450 things to the living God, who made the heaven, the earth, 1451 the sea, and everything that is in them. 14:16 In 1452 past 1453 generations he allowed all the nations 1454 to go their own ways, 14:17 yet he did not leave himself without a witness by doing good, 1455 by giving you rain from heaven 1456 and fruitful seasons, satisfying you 1457 with food and your hearts with joy.” 1458 14:18 Even by saying 1459 these things, they scarcely persuaded 1460 the crowds not to offer sacrifice to them.
14:19 But Jews came from Antioch 1461 and Iconium, 1462 and after winning 1463 the crowds over, they stoned 1464 Paul and dragged him out of the city, presuming him to be dead. 14:20 But after the disciples had surrounded him, he got up and went back 1465 into the city. On 1466 the next day he left with Barnabas for Derbe. 1467
14:21 After they had proclaimed the good news in that city and made many disciples, they returned to Lystra, 1468 to Iconium, 1469 and to Antioch. 1470 14:22 They strengthened 1471 the souls of the disciples and encouraged them to continue 1472 in the faith, saying, “We must enter the kingdom 1473 of God through many persecutions.” 1474 14:23 When they had appointed elders 1475 for them in the various churches, 1476 with prayer and fasting 1477 they entrusted them to the protection 1478 of the Lord in whom they had believed. 14:24 Then they passed through 1479 Pisidia and came into Pamphylia, 1480 14:25 and when they had spoken the word 1481 in Perga, 1482 they went down to Attalia. 1483 14:26 From there they sailed back to Antioch, 1484 where they had been commended 1485 to the grace of God for the work they had now completed. 1486 14:27 When they arrived and gathered the church together, they reported 1487 all the things God 1488 had done with them, and that he had opened a door 1489 of faith for the Gentiles. 14:28 So they spent 1490 considerable 1491 time with the disciples.
15:1 Now some men came down from Judea 1492 and began to teach the brothers, “Unless you are circumcised 1493 according to the custom of Moses, you cannot be saved.” 15:2 When Paul and Barnabas had a major argument and debate 1494 with them, the church 1495 appointed Paul and Barnabas and some others from among them to go up to meet with 1496 the apostles and elders in Jerusalem 1497 about this point of disagreement. 1498 15:3 So they were sent on their way by the church, and as they passed through both Phoenicia 1499 and Samaria, they were relating at length 1500 the conversion of the Gentiles and bringing great joy 1501 to all the brothers. 15:4 When they arrived in Jerusalem, they were received 1502 by the church and the apostles and the elders, and they reported 1503 all the things God had done with them. 1504 15:5 But some from the religious party of the Pharisees 1505 who had believed stood up and said, “It is necessary 1506 to circumcise the Gentiles 1507 and to order them to observe 1508 the law of Moses.”
15:6 Both the apostles and the elders met together to deliberate 1509 about this matter. 15:7 After there had been much debate, 1510 Peter stood up and said to them, “Brothers, you know that some time ago 1511 God chose 1512 me to preach to the Gentiles so they would hear the message 1513 of the gospel 1514 and believe. 1515 15:8 And God, who knows the heart, 1516 has testified 1517 to them by giving them the Holy Spirit just as he did to us, 1518 15:9 and he made no distinction 1519 between them and us, cleansing 1520 their hearts by faith. 15:10 So now why are you putting God to the test 1521 by placing on the neck of the disciples a yoke 1522 that neither our ancestors 1523 nor we have been able to bear? 15:11 On the contrary, we believe that we are saved through 1524 the grace of the Lord Jesus, in the same way as they are.” 1525
15:12 The whole group kept quiet 1526 and listened to Barnabas and Paul while they explained all the miraculous signs 1527 and wonders God had done among the Gentiles through them. 15:13 After they stopped speaking, 1528 James replied, 1529 “Brothers, listen to me. 15:14 Simeon 1530 has explained 1531 how God first concerned himself 1532 to select 1533 from among the Gentiles 1534 a people for his name. 15:15 The 1535 words of the prophets agree 1536 with this, as it is written,
15:16 ‘After this 1537 I 1538 will return,
and I will rebuild the fallen tent 1539 of David;
I will rebuild its ruins and restore 1540 it,
15:17 so that the rest of humanity 1541 may seek the Lord,
namely, 1542 all the Gentiles 1543 I have called to be my own,’ 1544 says the Lord, 1545 who makes these things 15:18 known 1546 from long ago. 1547
15:19 “Therefore I conclude 1548 that we should not cause extra difficulty 1549 for those among the Gentiles 1550 who are turning to God, 15:20 but that we should write them a letter 1551 telling them to abstain 1552 from things defiled 1553 by idols and from sexual immorality and from what has been strangled 1554 and from blood. 15:21 For Moses has had those who proclaim him in every town from ancient times, 1555 because he is read aloud 1556 in the synagogues 1557 every Sabbath.”
15:22 Then the apostles and elders, with the whole church, decided 1558 to send men chosen from among them, Judas called Barsabbas and Silas, 1559 leaders among the brothers, to Antioch 1560 with Paul and Barnabas. 15:23 They sent this letter with them: 1561
From the apostles 1562 and elders, your brothers, 1563 to the Gentile brothers and sisters 1564 in Antioch, 1565 Syria, 1566 and Cilicia, greetings! 15:24 Since we have heard that some have gone out from among us with no orders from us and have confused 1567 you, upsetting 1568 your minds 1569 by what they said, 1570 15:25 we have unanimously 1571 decided 1572 to choose men to send to you along with our dear friends Barnabas and Paul, 15:26 who 1573 have risked their lives 1574 for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ. 1575 15:27 Therefore we are sending 1576 Judas and Silas 1577 who will tell you these things themselves in person. 1578 15:28 For it seemed best to the Holy Spirit and to us 1579 not to place any greater burden on you than these necessary rules: 1580 15:29 that you abstain from meat that has been sacrificed to idols 1581 and from blood and from what has been strangled 1582 and from sexual immorality. 1583 If you keep yourselves from doing these things, 1584 you will do well. Farewell. 1585
15:30 So when they were dismissed, 1586 they went down to Antioch, 1587 and after gathering the entire group 1588 together, they delivered the letter. 15:31 When they read it aloud, 1589 the people 1590 rejoiced at its encouragement. 1591 15:32 Both Judas and Silas, who were prophets themselves, encouraged and strengthened the brothers with a long speech. 1592 15:33 After 1593 they had spent some time there, 1594 they were sent off in peace by the brothers to those who had sent them. 15:34 [[EMPTY]] 1595 15:35 But Paul and Barnabas remained in Antioch, 1596 teaching and proclaiming (along with many others) 1597 the word of the Lord. 1598
15:36 After some days Paul said to Barnabas, “Let’s return 1599 and visit the brothers in every town where we proclaimed the word of the Lord 1600 to see how they are doing.” 1601 15:37 Barnabas wanted to bring John called Mark along with them too, 15:38 but Paul insisted 1602 that they should not take along this one who had left them in Pamphylia 1603 and had not accompanied them in the work. 15:39 They had 1604 a sharp disagreement, 1605 so that they parted company. Barnabas took along 1606 Mark and sailed away to Cyprus, 1607 15:40 but Paul chose Silas and set out, commended 1608 to the grace of the Lord by the brothers and sisters. 1609 15:41 He passed through Syria and Cilicia, strengthening 1610 the churches.
16:1 He also came to Derbe 1611 and to Lystra. 1612 A disciple 1613 named Timothy was there, the son of a Jewish woman who was a believer, 1614 but whose father was a Greek. 1615 16:2 The brothers in Lystra 1616 and Iconium 1617 spoke well 1618 of him. 1619 16:3 Paul wanted Timothy 1620 to accompany him, and he took 1621 him and circumcised 1622 him because of the Jews who were in those places, 1623 for they all knew that his father was Greek. 1624 16:4 As they went through the towns, 1625 they passed on 1626 the decrees that had been decided on by the apostles and elders in Jerusalem 1627 for the Gentile believers 1628 to obey. 1629 16:5 So the churches were being strengthened in the faith and were increasing in number every day. 1630
16:6 They went through the region of Phrygia 1631 and Galatia, 1632 having been prevented 1633 by the Holy Spirit from speaking the message 1634 in the province of Asia. 1635 16:7 When they came to 1636 Mysia, 1637 they attempted to go into Bithynia, 1638 but the Spirit of Jesus did not allow 1639 them to do this, 1640 16:8 so they passed through 1641 Mysia 1642 and went down to Troas. 1643 16:9 A 1644 vision appeared to Paul during the night: A Macedonian man was standing there 1645 urging him, 1646 “Come over 1647 to Macedonia 1648 and help us!” 16:10 After Paul 1649 saw the vision, we attempted 1650 immediately to go over to Macedonia, 1651 concluding that God had called 1652 us to proclaim the good news to them.
16:11 We put out to sea 1653 from Troas 1654 and sailed a straight course 1655 to Samothrace, 1656 the next day to Neapolis, 1657 16:12 and from there to Philippi, 1658 which is a leading city of that district 1659 of Macedonia, 1660 a Roman colony. 1661 We stayed in this city for some days. 16:13 On the Sabbath day we went outside the city gate to the side of the river, where we thought there would be a place of prayer, and we sat down 1662 and began to speak 1663 to the women 1664 who had assembled there. 1665 16:14 A 1666 woman named Lydia, a dealer in purple cloth 1667 from the city of Thyatira, 1668 a God-fearing woman, listened to us. 1669 The Lord opened her heart to respond 1670 to what Paul was saying. 16:15 After she and her household were baptized, she urged us, 1671 “If 1672 you consider me to be a believer in the Lord, 1673 come and stay in my house.” And she persuaded 1674 us.
16:16 Now 1675 as we were going to the place of prayer, a slave girl met us who had a spirit that enabled her to foretell the future by supernatural means. 1676 She 1677 brought her owners 1678 a great profit by fortune-telling. 1679 16:17 She followed behind Paul and us and kept crying out, 1680 “These men are servants 1681 of the Most High God, who are proclaiming to you the way 1682 of salvation.” 1683 16:18 She continued to do this for many days. But Paul became greatly annoyed, 1684 and turned 1685 and said to the spirit, “I command you in the name of Jesus Christ 1686 to come out of her!” And it came out of her at once. 1687 16:19 But when her owners 1688 saw their hope of profit 1689 was gone, they seized 1690 Paul and Silas and dragged 1691 them into the marketplace before the authorities. 16:20 When 1692 they had brought them 1693 before the magistrates, they said, “These men are throwing our city into confusion. 1694 They are 1695 Jews 16:21 and are advocating 1696 customs that are not lawful for us to accept 1697 or practice, 1698 since we are 1699 Romans.”
16:22 The crowd joined the attack 1700 against them, and the magistrates tore the clothes 1701 off Paul and Silas 1702 and ordered them to be beaten with rods. 1703 16:23 After they had beaten them severely, 1704 they threw them into prison and commanded 1705 the jailer to guard them securely. 16:24 Receiving such orders, he threw them in the inner cell 1706 and fastened their feet in the stocks. 1707
16:25 About midnight Paul and Silas were praying 1708 and singing hymns to God, 1709 and the rest of 1710 the prisoners were listening to them. 16:26 Suddenly a great earthquake occurred, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken. Immediately all the doors flew open, and the bonds 1711 of all the prisoners came loose. 16:27 When the jailer woke up 1712 and saw the doors of the prison standing open, 1713 he drew his sword and was about to kill himself, 1714 because he assumed 1715 the prisoners had escaped. 16:28 But Paul called out loudly, 1716 “Do not harm yourself, 1717 for we are all here!” 16:29 Calling for lights, the jailer 1718 rushed in and fell down 1719 trembling at the feet of Paul and Silas. 16:30 Then he brought them outside 1720 and asked, “Sirs, what must 1721 I do to be saved?” 16:31 They replied, 1722 “Believe 1723 in the Lord Jesus 1724 and you will be saved, you and your household.” 16:32 Then 1725 they spoke the word of the Lord 1726 to him, along with all those who were in his house. 16:33 At 1727 that hour of the night he took them 1728 and washed their wounds; 1729 then 1730 he and all his family 1731 were baptized right away. 1732 16:34 The jailer 1733 brought them into his house and set food 1734 before them, and he rejoiced greatly 1735 that he had come to believe 1736 in God, together with his entire household. 1737 16:35 At daybreak 1738 the magistrates 1739 sent their police officers, 1740 saying, “Release those men.” 16:36 The jailer reported these words to Paul, saying, 1741 “The magistrates have sent orders 1742 to release you. So come out now and go in peace.” 1743 16:37 But Paul said to the police officers, 1744 “They had us beaten in public 1745 without a proper trial 1746 – even though we are Roman citizens 1747 – and they threw us 1748 in prison. And now they want to send us away 1749 secretly? Absolutely not! They 1750 themselves must come and escort us out!” 1751 16:38 The police officers reported these words to the magistrates. They were frightened when they heard Paul and Silas 1752 were Roman citizens 1753 16:39 and came 1754 and apologized to them. After 1755 they brought them out, they asked them repeatedly 1756 to leave the city. 16:40 When they came out of the prison, they entered Lydia’s house, and when they saw the brothers, they encouraged them and then 1757 departed.
17:1 After they traveled through 1758 Amphipolis 1759 and Apollonia, 1760 they came to Thessalonica, 1761 where there was a Jewish synagogue. 1762 17:2 Paul went to the Jews in the synagogue, 1763 as he customarily did, and on three Sabbath days he addressed 1764 them from the scriptures, 17:3 explaining and demonstrating 1765 that the Christ 1766 had to suffer and to rise from the dead, 1767 saying, 1768 “This Jesus I am proclaiming to you is the Christ.” 1769 17:4 Some of them were persuaded 1770 and joined Paul and Silas, along with a large group 1771 of God-fearing Greeks 1772 and quite a few 1773 prominent women. 17:5 But the Jews became jealous, 1774 and gathering together some worthless men from the rabble in the marketplace, 1775 they formed a mob 1776 and set the city in an uproar. 1777 They attacked Jason’s house, 1778 trying to find Paul and Silas 1779 to bring them out to the assembly. 1780 17:6 When they did not find them, they dragged 1781 Jason and some of the brothers before the city officials, 1782 screaming, “These people who have stirred up trouble 1783 throughout the world 1784 have come here too, 17:7 and 1785 Jason has welcomed them as guests! They 1786 are all acting against Caesar’s 1787 decrees, saying there is another king named 1788 Jesus!” 1789 17:8 They caused confusion among 1790 the crowd and the city officials 1791 who heard these things. 17:9 After 1792 the city officials 1793 had received bail 1794 from Jason and the others, they released them.
17:10 The brothers sent Paul and Silas off to Berea 1795 at once, during the night. When they arrived, 1796 they went to the Jewish synagogue. 1797 17:11 These Jews 1798 were more open-minded 1799 than those in Thessalonica, 1800 for they eagerly 1801 received 1802 the message, examining 1803 the scriptures carefully every day 1804 to see if these things were so. 17:12 Therefore many of them believed, along with quite a few 1805 prominent 1806 Greek women and men. 17:13 But when the Jews from Thessalonica 1807 heard that Paul had also proclaimed the word of God 1808 in Berea, 1809 they came there too, inciting 1810 and disturbing 1811 the crowds. 17:14 Then the brothers sent Paul away to the coast 1812 at once, but Silas and Timothy remained in Berea. 1813 17:15 Those who accompanied Paul escorted him as far as Athens, 1814 and after receiving an order for Silas and Timothy to come to him as soon as possible, they left. 1815
17:16 While Paul was waiting for them in Athens, 1816 his spirit was greatly upset 1817 because he saw 1818 the city was full of idols. 17:17 So he was addressing 1819 the Jews and the God-fearing Gentiles 1820 in the synagogue, 1821 and in the marketplace every day 1822 those who happened to be there. 17:18 Also some of the Epicurean 1823 and Stoic 1824 philosophers were conversing 1825 with him, and some were asking, 1826 “What does this foolish babbler 1827 want to say?” Others said, “He seems to be a proclaimer of foreign gods.” 1828 (They said this because he was proclaiming the good news about Jesus and the resurrection.) 1829 17:19 So they took Paul and 1830 brought him to the Areopagus, 1831 saying, “May we know what this new teaching is that you are proclaiming? 17:20 For you are bringing some surprising things 1832 to our ears, so we want to know what they 1833 mean.” 17:21 (All the Athenians and the foreigners who lived there used to spend their time 1834 in nothing else than telling 1835 or listening to something new.) 1836
17:22 So Paul stood 1837 before the Areopagus and said, “Men of Athens, I see that you are very religious 1838 in all respects. 1839 17:23 For as I went around and observed closely your objects of worship, 1840 I even found an altar with this inscription: 1841 ‘To an unknown god.’ Therefore what you worship without knowing it, 1842 this I proclaim to you. 17:24 The God who made the world and everything in it, 1843 who is 1844 Lord of heaven and earth, does not live in temples made by human hands, 1845 17:25 nor is he served by human hands, as if he needed anything, 1846 because he himself gives life and breath and everything to everyone. 1847 17:26 From one man 1848 he made every nation of the human race 1849 to inhabit the entire earth, 1850 determining their set times 1851 and the fixed limits of the places where they would live, 1852 17:27 so that they would search for God and perhaps grope around 1853 for him and find him, 1854 though he is 1855 not far from each one of us. 17:28 For in him we live and move about 1856 and exist, as even some of your own poets have said, ‘For we too are his offspring.’ 1857 17:29 So since we are God’s offspring, we should not think the deity 1858 is like gold or silver or stone, an image 1859 made by human 1860 skill 1861 and imagination. 1862 17:30 Therefore, although God has overlooked 1863 such times of ignorance, 1864 he now commands all people 1865 everywhere to repent, 1866 17:31 because he has set 1867 a day on which he is going to judge the world 1868 in righteousness, by a man whom he designated, 1869 having provided proof to everyone by raising 1870 him from the dead.”
17:32 Now when they heard about 1871 the resurrection from the dead, some began to scoff, 1872 but others said, “We will hear you again about this.” 17:33 So Paul left the Areopagus. 1873 17:34 But some people 1874 joined him 1875 and believed. Among them 1876 were Dionysius, who was a member of the Areopagus, 1877 a woman 1878 named Damaris, and others with them.
Kisah Para Rasul 19:5-6
Konteks19:5 When they heard this, they were baptized in the name of the Lord Jesus, 19:6 and when Paul placed 1879 his hands on them, the Holy Spirit came 1880 upon them, and they began to speak 1881 in tongues and to prophesy. 1882
[1:1] 1 tn Or “produced,” Grk “made.”
[1:1] 2 tn Or “first.” The translation “former” is preferred because “first” could imply to the modern English reader that the author means that his previous account was the first one to be written down. The Greek term πρῶτος (prwtos) does not necessarily mean “first” in an absolute sense, but can refer to the first in a set or series. That is what is intended here – the first account (known as the Gospel of Luke) as compared to the second one (known as Acts).
[1:1] 3 tn The Greek word λόγος (logos) is sometimes translated “book” (NRSV, NIV) or “treatise” (KJV). A formal, systematic treatment of a subject is implied, but the word “book” may be too specific and slightly misleading to the modern reader, so “account” has been used.
[1:1] sn The former account refers to the Gospel of Luke, which was “volume one” of the two-volume work Luke-Acts.
[1:1] 4 tn Grk “O Theophilus,” but the usage of the vocative in Acts with ὦ (w) is unemphatic, following more the classical idiom (see ExSyn 69).
[1:2] 5 tn The words “to heaven” are not in the Greek text, but are supplied from v. 11. Several modern translations (NIV, NRSV) supply the words “to heaven” after “taken up” to specify the destination explicitly mentioned later in 1:11.
[1:2] 6 tn Or “commands.” Although some modern translations render ἐντειλάμενος (enteilameno") as “instructions” (NIV, NRSV), the word implies authority or official sanction (G. Schrenk, TDNT 2:545), so that a word like “orders” conveys the idea more effectively. The action of the temporal participle is antecedent (prior) to the action of the verb it modifies (“taken up”).
[1:3] 8 tn Grk “to them”; the referent (the apostles) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[1:3] 9 sn After his suffering is a reference to Jesus’ crucifixion and the abuse which preceded it.
[1:3] 10 tn Grk “during forty days.” The phrase “over a forty-day period” is used rather than “during forty days” because (as the other NT accounts of Jesus’ appearances make clear) Jesus was not continually visible to the apostles during the forty days, but appeared to them on various occasions.
[1:4] 11 tn Or “While he was assembling with them,” or “while he was sharing a meal with them.” There are three basic options for translating the verb συναλίζω (sunalizw): (1) “Eat (salt) with, share a meal with”; (2) “bring together, assemble”; (3) “spend the night with, stay with” (see BDAG 964 s.v.). The difficulty with the first option is that it does not fit the context, and this meaning is not found elsewhere. The second option is difficult because of the singular number and the present tense. The third option is based on a spelling variation of συναυλιζόμενος (sunaulizomeno"), which some minuscules actually read here. The difference in meaning between (2) and (3) is not great, but (3) seems to fit the context somewhat better here.
[1:4] 12 tn Grk “ordered them”; the command “Do not leave” is not in Greek but is an indirect quotation in the original (see note at end of the verse for explanation).
[1:4] 13 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[1:4] 14 tn The word “there” is not in the Greek text (direct objects in Greek were frequently omitted when clear from the context).
[1:4] 15 tn Grk “the,” with the article used as a possessive pronoun (ExSyn 215).
[1:4] 16 tn Grk “for the promise of the Father.” Jesus is referring to the promised gift of the Holy Spirit (see the following verse).
[1:4] 17 tn Grk “While he was with them, he ordered them not to leave Jerusalem, but to wait there for ‘what my Father promised, which you heard about from me.’” This verse moves from indirect to direct discourse. This abrupt change is very awkward, so the entire quotation has been rendered as direct discourse in the translation.
[1:5] 18 tn In the Greek text v. 5 is a continuation of the previous sentence, which is long and complicated. In keeping with the tendency of contemporary English to use shorter sentences, a new sentence was started here in the translation.
[1:5] 19 tn The pronoun is plural in Greek.
[1:6] 20 tn Grk “they began to ask him, saying.” The participle λέγοντες (legontes) is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated. The imperfect tense of the Greek verb ἠρώτων (hrwtwn) has been translated as an ingressive imperfect.
[1:7] 21 tn Grk “It is not for you to know.”
[1:9] 23 tn Grk “And after.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[1:10] 24 tn Grk “And as.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[1:11] 26 tn The word “here” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects were frequently omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[1:11] 27 tc Codex Bezae (D) and several other witnesses lack the words εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν (ei" ton ouranon, “into heaven”) here, most likely by way of accidental deletion. In any event, it is hardly correct to suppose that the Western text has intentionally suppressed references to the ascension of Christ here, for the phrase is solidly attested in the final clause of the verse.
[1:11] tn Or “into the sky.” The Greek word οὐρανός (ouranos) may be translated “sky” (vv. 10, 11a) or “heaven” (twice in v. 11b) depending on the context.
[1:12] 28 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[1:12] 29 tn Or “from the hill.” The Greek term ὄρος (oros) refers to a relatively high elevation of land in contrast with βουνός (bounos, “hill”).
[1:12] 30 sn The Mount of Olives is the traditional name for this mountain, also called Olivet. The Mount of Olives is really a ridge running north to south about 1.8 mi (3 km) long, east of Jerusalem across the Kidron Valley. Its central elevation is about 100 ft (30 m) higher than Jerusalem. It was named for the large number of olive trees which grew on it.
[1:12] 31 sn The phrase a Sabbath day’s journey refers to the distance the rabbis permitted a person to travel on the Sabbath without breaking the Sabbath, specified in tractate Sotah 5:3 of the Mishnah as 2,000 cubits (a cubit was about 18 inches). In this case the distance was about half a mile (1 km).
[1:13] 32 tn Grk “And when.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[1:13] 33 tn The word “Jerusalem” is not in the Greek text but is implied (direct objects were often omitted when clear from the context).
[1:13] 34 sn In the various lists of the twelve, Peter (also called Simon) is always mentioned first (see also Matt 10:1-4; Mark 3:16-19; Luke 6:13-16) and the first four are always the same, though not in the same order after Peter.
[1:13] 35 tn The words “were there” are not in the Greek text, but are implied.
[1:14] 36 sn Jesus’ brothers are mentioned in Matt 13:55 and John 7:3.
[1:15] 37 tn Grk “And in those days.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[1:15] 38 tn Or “brethren” (but the term includes both male and female believers present in this gathering, as indicated by those named in vv. 13-14).
[1:16] 39 tn Grk “Men brothers.” In light of the compound phrase ἄνδρες ἀδελφοί (andre" adelfoi, “Men brothers”) Peter’s words are best understood as directly addressed to the males present, possibly referring specifically to the twelve (really ten at this point – eleven minus the speaker, Peter) mentioned by name in v. 13.
[1:16] 40 tn Grk “foretold by the mouth of.”
[1:17] 41 tn Or “and was chosen to have a share in this ministry.” The term λαγχάνω (lancanw) here and in 2 Pet 1:1 can be understood as referring to the process of divine choice and thus be translated, “was chosen to have.”
[1:18] 42 tn The referent of “this man” (Judas) was specified in the translation for clarity.
[1:18] 43 tn Traditionally, “with the reward of his wickedness.”
[1:18] 44 tn Traditionally, “falling headlong.”
[1:18] 45 tn Or “all his bowels.”
[1:19] 46 tn Grk “And this.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[1:19] 47 sn Their own language refers to Aramaic, the primary language spoken in Palestine in Jesus’ day.
[1:19] 48 tn Grk “that field was called.” The passive voice has been converted to active in the translation in keeping with contemporary English style.
[1:20] 49 tn Or “uninhabited” or “empty.”
[1:20] 50 sn A quotation from Ps 69:25.
[1:20] 51 tn Or “Let another take his office.”
[1:20] sn A quotation from Ps 109:8.
[1:21] 52 tn The Greek term here is ἀνήρ (anhr), which only exceptionally is used in a generic sense of both males and females. In this context, where a successor to Judas is being chosen, only men were under consideration in the original historical context.
[1:21] 53 tn Grk “the Lord Jesus went in and out among us.” According to BDAG 294 s.v. εἰσέρχομαι 1.b.β, “ἐν παντὶ χρόνῳ ᾧ εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ᾿ ἡμᾶς went in and out among us = associated with us Ac 1:21.”
[1:22] 54 tn Here the pronoun “he” refers to Jesus.
[1:23] 55 tc Codex Bezae (D) and other Western witnesses have “he proposed,” referring to Peter, thus emphasizing his role above the other apostles. The Western text displays a conscious pattern of elevating Peter in Acts, and thus the singular verb here is a palpably motivated reading.
[1:23] 56 tn Grk “So they proposed two.” The word “candidates” was supplied in the text for clarity.
[1:24] 57 tn Grk “And praying, they said.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[1:25] 58 tn Grk “to take the place.”
[1:25] 59 tn Or “of this ministry.”
[1:25] 60 tn Or “the task of this service and apostleship which Judas ceased to perform.”
[1:25] 61 sn To go to his own place. This may well be a euphemism for Judas’ judged fate. He separated himself from them, and thus separated he would remain.
[1:26] 62 tn Here καί (kai) has been translated as “then” to indicate the continuity with the preceding verse. Greek style often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” but English style does not.
[1:26] 63 tn Grk “and the lot fell on Matthias.”
[1:26] 64 tn Or “he was counted as one of the apostles along with the eleven.”
[2:1] 65 tn Grk “And” Here καί (kai) has been translated as “now” to indicate the transition to a new topic. Greek style often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” but English style does not.
[2:2] 66 tn Here καί (kai) has not been translated for stylistic reasons. It occurs as part of the formula καὶ ἐγένετο (kai egeneto) which is often left untranslated in Luke-Acts because it is redundant in contemporary English. Here it is possible (and indeed necessary) to translate ἐγένετο as “came” so that the initial clause of the English translation contains a verb; nevertheless the translation of the conjunction καί is not necessary.
[2:2] 68 tn While φέρω (ferw) generally refers to movement from one place to another with the possible implication of causing the movement of other objects, in Acts 2:2 φέρομαι (feromai) should probably be understood in a more idiomatic sense of “blowing” since it is combined with the noun for wind (πνοή, pnoh).
[2:2] 69 tn Or “from the sky.” The Greek word οὐρανός (ouranos) may be translated “sky” or “heaven” depending on the context.
[2:3] 70 tn Or “And divided tongues as of fire.” The precise meaning of διαμερίζομαι (diamerizomai) in Acts 2:3 is difficult to determine. The meaning could be “tongues as of fire dividing up one to each person,” but it is also possible that the individual tongues of fire were divided (“And divided tongues as of fire appeared”). The translation adopted in the text (“tongues spreading out like a fire”) attempts to be somewhat ambiguous.
[2:4] 71 tn Grk “And all.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[2:4] 72 tn The Greek term is γλώσσαις (glwssai"), the same word used for the tongues of fire.
[2:4] sn Other languages. Acts 2:6-7 indicates that these were languages understandable to the hearers, a diverse group from “every nation under heaven.”
[2:4] 73 tn Grk “just as the spirit gave them to utter.” The verb ἀποφθέγγομαι (apofqengomai) was used of special utterances in Classical Greek (BDAG 125 s.v.).
[2:5] 74 tn Grk “Jews, devout men.” It is possible that only men are in view here in light of OT commands for Jewish men to make a pilgrimage to Jerusalem at various times during the year (cf. Exod 23:17, 34:23; Deut 16:16). However, other evidence seems to indicate that both men and women might be in view. Luke 2:41-52 shows that whole families would make the temporary trip to Jerusalem. In addition, it is probable that the audience consisted of families who had taken up permanent residence in Jerusalem. The verb κατοικέω (katoikew) normally means “reside” or “dwell,” and archaeological evidence from tombs in Jerusalem does indicate that many families immigrated to Jerusalem permanently (see B. Witherington, Acts, 135); this would naturally include women. Also, the word ἀνήρ (ajnhr), which usually does mean “male” or “man” (as opposed to woman), sometimes is used generically to mean “a person” (BDAG 79 s.v. 2; cf. Matt 12:41). Given this evidence, then, it is conceivable that the audience in view here is not individual male pilgrims but a mixed group of men and women.
[2:5] 75 tn Grk “Now there were residing in Jerusalem Jews, devout men from every nation under heaven.”
[2:5] map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[2:6] 77 tn Or “was bewildered.”
[2:7] 78 tn Grk “They were astounded and amazed, saying.” The two imperfect verbs, ἐξίσταντο (existanto) and ἐθαύμαζον (eqaumazon), show both the surprise and the confusion on the part of the hearers. The verb ἐξίσταντο (from ἐξίστημι, existhmi) often implies an illogical perception or response (BDAG 350 s.v. ἐξίστημι): “to be so astonished as to almost fail to comprehend what one has experienced” (L&N 25.218).
[2:7] 79 tn Grk “Behold, aren’t all these.” The Greek word ἰδού (idou) at the beginning of this statement has not been translated because it has no exact English equivalent here, but adds interest and emphasis (BDAG 468 s.v. 1).
[2:8] 80 tn Grk “we hear them, each one of us.”
[2:8] 81 tn Grk “in our own language in which we were born.”
[2:9] 82 tn Grk “Asia”; in the NT this always refers to the Roman province of Asia, made up of about one-third of the west and southwest end of modern Asia Minor. Asia lay to the west of the region of Phrygia and Galatia. The words “the province of” are supplied to indicate to the modern reader that this does not refer to the continent of Asia.
[2:10] 83 tn According to BDAG 595 s.v. Λιβύη, the western part of Libya, Libya Cyrenaica, is referred to here (see also Josephus, Ant. 16.6.1 [16.160] for a similar phrase).
[2:10] 84 map For location see JP4 A1.
[2:11] 85 sn Proselytes refers to Gentile (i.e., non-Jewish) converts to Judaism.
[2:11] 86 tn Or “God’s mighty works.” Here the genitive τοῦ θεοῦ (tou qeou) has been translated as a subjective genitive.
[2:13] 87 tn The words “the speakers” are not in the Greek text, but have been supplied for clarity. Direct objects were frequently omitted in Greek when clear from the context.
[2:13] 88 tn Grk “They are full of new wine!”
[2:13] sn New wine refers to a new, sweet wine in the process of fermentation.
[2:14] 89 tn Grk “standing up.” The participle σταθείς (staqei") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[2:14] 90 tn Or “You Jewish men.” “Judea” is preferred here because it is paired with “Jerusalem,” a location. This suggests locality rather than ethnic background is the primary emphasis in the context. As for “men,” the Greek term here is ἀνήρ (anhr), which only exceptionally is used in a generic sense of both males and females. In this context, where “all” who live in Jerusalem are addressed, it is conceivable that this is a generic usage, although it can also be argued that Peter’s remarks were addressed primarily to the men present, even if women were there.
[2:14] 91 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[2:14] 92 tn Grk “let this be known to you.” The passive construction has been translated as an active for stylistic reasons.
[2:15] 93 tn Grk “These men are not drunk, as you suppose.”
[2:15] 94 tn Grk “only the third hour.”
[2:16] 95 sn Note how in the quotation that follows all genders, ages, and classes are included. The event is like a hope Moses expressed in Num 11:29.
[2:17] 96 sn The phrase in the last days is not quoted from Joel, but represents Peter’s interpretive explanation of the current events as falling “in the last days.”
[2:17] 97 tn Grk “on all flesh.”
[2:18] 98 tn Grk “slaves.” Although this translation frequently renders δοῦλος (doulos) as “slave,” the connotation is often of one who has sold himself into slavery; in a spiritual sense, the idea is that of becoming a slave of God or of Jesus Christ voluntarily. The voluntary notion is not conspicuous here; hence, the translation “servants.” In any case, the word does not bear the connotation of a free individual serving another. BDAG notes that “‘servant’ for ‘slave’ is largely confined to Biblical transl. and early American times…in normal usage at the present time the two words are carefully distinguished” (BDAG 260 s.v.). The most accurate translation is “bondservant” (sometimes found in the ASV for δοῦλος), in that it often indicates one who sells himself into slavery to another. But as this is archaic, few today understand its force.
[2:18] 99 sn The words and they will prophesy in Acts 2:18 are not quoted from Joel 2:29 at this point but are repeated from earlier in the quotation (Acts 2:17) for emphasis. Tongues speaking is described as prophecy, just like intelligible tongues are described in 1 Cor 14:26-33.
[2:19] 100 tn Or “in the heaven.” The Greek word οὐρανός (ouranos) may be translated “sky” or “heaven” depending on the context. Here, in contrast to “the earth below,” a reference to the sky is more likely.
[2:19] 101 tn Here the context indicates the miraculous nature of the signs mentioned; this is made explicit in the translation.
[2:20] 102 tn Or “and wonderful.”
[2:21] 103 tn Grk “And it will be that.”
[2:21] 104 sn A quotation from Joel 2:28-32.
[2:22] 105 tn Or “Israelite men,” although this is less natural English. The Greek term here is ἀνήρ (anhr), which only exceptionally is used in a generic sense of both males and females. In this context, it is conceivable that this is a generic usage, although it can also be argued that Peter’s remarks were addressed primarily to the men present, even if women were there.
[2:22] 106 tn Or “miraculous deeds.”
[2:22] 107 tn Again, the context indicates the miraculous nature of these signs, and this is specified in the translation.
[2:23] 108 tn Or “you killed.”
[2:23] 109 tn Grk “at the hands of lawless men.” At this point the term ἄνομος (anomo") refers to non-Jews who live outside the Jewish (Mosaic) law, rather than people who broke any or all laws including secular laws. Specifically it is a reference to the Roman soldiers who carried out Jesus’ crucifixion.
[2:24] 110 tn Grk “Whom God raised up.”
[2:24] 111 tn Or “having freed.”
[2:24] 112 sn The term translated pains is frequently used to describe pains associated with giving birth (see Rev 12:2). So there is irony here in the mixed metaphor.
[2:24] 113 tn Or “for him to be held by it” (in either case, “it” refers to death’s power).
[2:25] 114 tn Or “always before me.”
[2:27] 116 tn Or “will not abandon my soul to Hades.” Often “Hades” is the equivalent of the Hebrew term Sheol, the place of the dead.
[2:27] 117 tn Grk “to see,” but the literal translation of the phrase “to see decay” could be misunderstood to mean simply “to look at decay,” while here “see decay” is really figurative for “experience decay.”
[2:28] 118 sn A quotation from Ps 16:8-11.
[2:29] 119 tn Since this represents a continuation of the address beginning in v.14 and continued in v. 22, “brothers” has been used here rather than a generic expression like “brothers and sisters.”
[2:29] 120 sn Peter’s certainty is based on well-known facts.
[2:29] 121 tn Or “about our noted ancestor,” “about the patriarch.”
[2:30] 122 tn The participles ὑπάρχων (Juparcwn) and εἰδώς (eidw") are translated as causal adverbial participles.
[2:30] 123 tn Grk “one from the fruit of his loins.” “Loins” is the traditional translation of ὀσφῦς (osfu"), referring to the male genital organs. A literal rendering like “one who came from his genital organs” would be regarded as too specific and perhaps even vulgar by many contemporary readers. Most modern translations thus render the phrase “one of his descendants.”
[2:30] 124 sn An allusion to Ps 132:11 and 2 Sam 7:12-13, the promise in the Davidic covenant.
[2:31] 125 tn Grk “David foreseeing spoke.” The participle προϊδών (proidwn) is taken as indicating means. It could also be translated as a participle of attendant circumstance: “David foresaw [this] and spoke.” The word “this” is supplied in either case as an understood direct object (direct objects in Greek were often omitted, but must be supplied for the modern English reader).
[2:31] 126 tn Or “the Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[2:31] sn The term χριστός (cristos) was originally an adjective (“anointed”), developing in LXX into a substantive (“an anointed one”), then developing still further into a technical generic term (“the anointed one”). In the intertestamental period it developed further into a technical term referring to the hoped-for anointed one, that is, a specific individual. In the NT the development starts there (technical-specific), is so used in the gospels, and then develops in Paul’s letters to mean virtually Jesus’ last name.
[2:31] 127 tn Or “abandoned in the world of the dead.” The translation “world of the dead” for Hades is suggested by L&N 1.19. The phrase is an allusion to Ps 16:10.
[2:31] 128 tn Grk “flesh.” See vv. 26b-27. The reference to “body” in this verse picks up the reference to “body” in v. 26. The Greek term σάρξ (sarx) in both verses literally means “flesh”; however, the translation “body” stresses the lack of decay of his physical body. The point of the verse is not merely the lack of decay of his flesh alone, but the resurrection of his entire person, as indicated by the previous parallel line “he was not abandoned to Hades.”
[2:31] 129 tn Grk “see,” but the literal translation of the phrase “see decay” could be misunderstood to mean simply “look at decay,” while here “see decay” is really figurative for “experience decay.”
[2:31] 130 sn An allusion to Ps 16:10.
[2:32] 131 tn Or “of him”; Grk “of which [or whom] we are all witnesses” (Acts 1:8).
[2:33] 132 tn The aorist participle ὑψωθείς (Juywqei") could be taken temporally: “So then, after he was exalted…” In the translation the more neutral “exalted” (a shorter form of “having been exalted”) was used to preserve the ambiguity of the original Greek.
[2:33] 133 sn The expression the right hand of God represents supreme power and authority. Its use here sets up the quotation of Ps 110:1 in v. 34.
[2:33] 134 tn The aorist participle λαβών (labwn) could be taken temporally: “So then, after he was exalted…and received from the Father the promised Holy Spirit.” In the translation the more neutral “having received” was used to preserve the ambiguity of the original Greek.
[2:33] 135 tn Here the genitive τοῦ πνεύματος (tou pneumato") is a genitive of apposition; the promise consists of the Holy Spirit.
[2:33] 136 sn The use of the verb poured out looks back to 2:17-18, where the same verb occurs twice.
[2:34] 137 sn Sit at my right hand. The word “sit” alludes back to the promise of “seating one on his throne” in v. 30.
[2:35] 138 sn The metaphor make your enemies a footstool portrays the complete subjugation of the enemies.
[2:35] 139 sn A quotation from Ps 110:1, one of the most often-cited OT passages in the NT, pointing to the exaltation of Jesus.
[2:36] 140 tn Or “know for certain.” This term is in an emphatic position in the clause.
[2:36] 141 tn Grk “has made him both Lord and Christ, this Jesus whom you crucified.” The clause has been simplified in the translation by replacing the pronoun “him” with the explanatory clause “this Jesus whom you crucified” which comes at the end of the sentence.
[2:36] 142 sn Lord. This looks back to the quotation of Ps 110:1 and the mention of “calling on the Lord” in 2:21. Peter’s point is that the Lord on whom one calls for salvation is Jesus, because he is the one mediating God’s blessing of the Spirit as a sign of the presence of salvation and the last days.
[2:36] 143 tn Or “and Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[2:36] sn See the note on Christ in 2:31.
[2:37] 144 tn The word “this” is not in the Greek text. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[2:37] 145 tn Grk “they were pierced to the heart” (an idiom for acute emotional distress).
[2:38] 146 tn The verb is a third person imperative, but the common translation “let each of you be baptized” obscures the imperative force in English, since it sounds more like a permissive (“each of you may be baptized”) to the average English reader.
[2:38] 147 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[2:38] sn In the name of Jesus Christ. Baptism in Messiah Jesus’ name shows how much authority he possesses.
[2:38] 148 tn There is debate over the meaning of εἰς in the prepositional phrase εἰς ἄφεσιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ὑμῶν (eis afesin twn Jamartiwn Jumwn, “for/because of/with reference to the forgiveness of your sins”). Although a causal sense has been argued, it is difficult to maintain here. ExSyn 369-71 discusses at least four other ways of dealing with the passage: (1) The baptism referred to here is physical only, and εἰς has the meaning of “for” or “unto.” Such a view suggests that salvation is based on works – an idea that runs counter to the theology of Acts, namely: (a) repentance often precedes baptism (cf. Acts 3:19; 26:20), and (b) salvation is entirely a gift of God, not procured via water baptism (Acts 10:43 [cf. v. 47]; 13:38-39, 48; 15:11; 16:30-31; 20:21; 26:18); (2) The baptism referred to here is spiritual only. Although such a view fits well with the theology of Acts, it does not fit well with the obvious meaning of “baptism” in Acts – especially in this text (cf. 2:41); (3) The text should be repunctuated in light of the shift from second person plural to third person singular back to second person plural again. The idea then would be, “Repent for/with reference to your sins, and let each one of you be baptized…” Such a view is an acceptable way of handling εἰς, but its subtlety and awkwardness count against it; (4) Finally, it is possible that to a first-century Jewish audience (as well as to Peter), the idea of baptism might incorporate both the spiritual reality and the physical symbol. That Peter connects both closely in his thinking is clear from other passages such as Acts 10:47 and 11:15-16. If this interpretation is correct, then Acts 2:38 is saying very little about the specific theological relationship between the symbol and the reality, only that historically they were viewed together. One must look in other places for a theological analysis. For further discussion see R. N. Longenecker, “Acts,” EBC 9:283-85; B. Witherington, Acts, 154-55; F. F. Bruce, The Acts of the Apostles: The Greek Text with Introduction and Commentary, 129-30; BDAG 290 s.v. εἰς 4.f.
[2:38] 149 tn Here the genitive τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος (tou Jagiou pneumato") is a genitive of apposition; the gift consists of the Holy Spirit.
[2:39] 150 sn The promise refers to the promise of the Holy Spirit that Jesus received from the Father in 2:33 and which he now pours out on others. The promise consists of the Holy Spirit (see note in 2:33). Jesus is the active mediator of God’s blessing.
[2:40] 152 tn Or “crooked” (in a moral or ethical sense). See Luke 3:5.
[2:41] 153 tn Or “who acknowledged the truth of.”
[2:41] 155 tn Grk “souls” (here an idiom for the whole person).
[2:41] 156 tn Or “were won over.”
[2:42] 157 sn Fellowship refers here to close association involving mutual involvement and relationships.
[2:42] 158 tn Grk “prayers.” This word was translated as a collective singular in keeping with English style.
[2:43] 160 tn Grk “on every soul” (here “soul” is an idiom for the whole person).
[2:43] 161 tn In this context the miraculous nature of these signs is implied. Cf. BDAG 920 s.v. σημεῖον 2.a.
[2:45] 163 tn The imperfect verb has been translated as an ingressive (“began…”). Since in context this is a description of the beginning of the community of believers, it is more likely that these statements refer to the start of various activities and practices that the early church continued for some time.
[2:45] 164 tn It is possible that the first term for property (κτήματα, kthmata) refers to real estate (as later usage seems to indicate) while the second term (ὑπάρξεις, Juparxeis) refers to possessions in general, but it may also be that the two terms are used together for emphasis, simply indicating that all kinds of possessions were being sold. However, if the first term is more specifically a reference to real estate, it foreshadows the incident with Ananias and Sapphira in Acts 5:1-11.
[2:45] 165 tn Grk “distributing them” (αὐτά, auta). The referent (the proceeds of the sales) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[2:46] 166 tn BDAG 437 s.v. ἡμέρα 2.c has “every day” for this phrase.
[2:46] 167 tn Grk “in the temple.” This is actually a reference to the courts surrounding the temple proper, and has been translated accordingly.
[2:46] 168 tn Here κατά (kata) is used as a distributive (BDAG 512 s.v. B.1.d).
[2:46] 169 sn The term glad (Grk “gladness”) often refers to joy brought about by God’s saving acts (Luke 1:14, 44; also the related verb in 1:47; 10:21).
[2:46] 170 tn Grk “with gladness and humbleness of hearts.” It is best to understand καρδίας (kardias) as an attributed genitive, with the two nouns it modifies actually listing attributes of the genitive noun which is related to them.
[2:47] 172 tn BDAG 437 s.v. ἡμέρα 2.c has “every day” for this phrase.
[3:1] 174 sn Going up to the temple at the time for prayer. The earliest Christians, being of Jewish roots, were still participating in the institutions of Judaism at this point. Their faith in Christ did not make them non-Jewish in their practices.
[3:1] 175 tn Grk “at the ninth hour.” This is calculated from sunrise (Josephus, Ant. 14.4.3 [14.65]; Dan 9:21).
[3:2] 177 tn Grk “from his mother’s womb.”
[3:2] 178 tn BDAG 437 s.v. ἡμέρα 2.c has “every day” for this phrase.
[3:2] 179 tn Grk “alms.” The term “alms” is not in common use today, so what the man expected, “money,” is used in the translation instead. The idea is that of money given as a gift to someone who was poor. Giving alms was viewed as honorable in Judaism (Tob 1:3, 16; 12:8-9; m. Pe’ah 1:1). See also Luke 11:41; 12:33; Acts 9:36; 10:2, 4, 31; 24:17.
[3:2] 180 tn Grk “the temple.” This is actually a reference to the courts surrounding the temple proper, and has been translated accordingly.
[3:2] sn Into the temple courts. The exact location of this incident is debated. The ‘Beautiful Gate’ referred either to the Nicanor Gate (which led from the Court of the Gentiles into the Court of Women) or the Shushan Gate at the eastern wall.
[3:3] 181 tn Grk “the temple.” This is actually a reference to the courts surrounding the temple proper, and has been translated accordingly.
[3:3] sn See the note on the phrase the temple courts in the previous verse.
[3:3] 182 tn Grk “alms.” See the note on the word “money” in the previous verse.
[3:4] 183 tn Grk “Peter, looking directly at him, as did John, said.” The participle ἀτενίσας (atenisas) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[3:5] 184 tn Grk “So he”; the referent (the lame man) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[3:6] 185 tn Or “I have no money.” L&N 6.69 classifies the expression ἀργύριον καὶ χρυσίον (argurion kai crusion) as an idiom that is a generic expression for currency, thus “money.”
[3:6] 186 sn In the name. Note the authority in the name of Jesus the Messiah. His presence and power are at work for the man. The reference to “the name” is not like a magical incantation, but is designed to indicate the agent who performs the healing. The theme is quite frequent in Acts (2:38 plus 21 other times).
[3:6] 187 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[3:6] 188 tc The words “stand up and” (ἔγειρε καί, egeire kai) are not in a few
[3:7] 189 tn Here καί (kai) has been translated as “Then” to reflect the sequence of events.
[3:7] 190 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Peter) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[3:7] 191 tn Grk “Peter taking hold of him…raised him up.” The participle πιάσας (piasas) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[3:7] 192 tn Grk “his”; the referent (the man) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[3:7] 193 sn At once the man’s feet and ankles were made strong. Note that despite the past lameness, the man is immediately able to walk. The restoration of his ability to walk pictures the presence of a renewed walk, a fresh start at life; this was far more than money would have given him.
[3:8] 194 tn Grk “And he.” Because of the length and complexity of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun.
[3:8] 195 tn Grk “Jumping up, he stood.” The participle ἐξαλλόμενος (exallomeno") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. It is possible that the paralyzed man actually jumped off the ground, but more probably this term simply refers to the speed with which he stood up. See L&N 15.240.
[3:8] 196 tn Grk “the temple.” This is actually a reference to the courts surrounding the temple proper, and has been translated accordingly.
[3:9] 197 tn Grk “And all.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[3:10] 198 tn Grk “alms,” but this term is not in common use today, so the closest modern equivalent, “donations,” is used instead. The idea is that of a donation to charity.
[3:10] 199 sn Amazement is a frequent response to miracles of Jesus or the apostles. These took the ancients by as much surprise as they would people today. But in terms of response to what God is doing, amazement does not equal faith (Luke 4:36; 5:9, 26; 7:16).
[3:11] 200 tn Grk “he”; the referent (the man) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[3:11] 201 tn Or “portico,” “colonnade”; Grk “stoa.” The translation “covered walkway” (a descriptive translation) was used here because the architectural term “portico” or “colonnade” is less familiar. However, the more technical term “portico” was retained in the actual name that follows.
[3:11] 202 sn Solomon’s Portico was a covered walkway formed by rows of columns supporting a roof and open on the inner side facing the center of the temple complex. It was located on the east side of the temple (Josephus, Ant. 15.11.3-5 [15.391-420], 20.9.7 [20.221]) and was a place of commerce and conversation.
[3:12] 203 tn Or perhaps “People of Israel,” since this was taking place in Solomon’s Portico and women may have been present. The Greek ἄνδρες ᾿Ισραηλῖται (andre" Israhlitai) used in the plural would normally mean “men, gentlemen” (BDAG 79 s.v. ἀνήρ 1.a).
[3:12] 205 tn Grk “him”; the referent (the man) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[3:13] 206 tc ‡ The repetition of ὁ θεός (Jo qeos, “God”) before the names of Isaac and Jacob is found in Ì74 א C (A D without article) 36 104 1175 pc lat. The omission of the second and third ὁ θεός is supported by B E Ψ 33 1739 Ï pc. The other time that Exod 3:6 is quoted in Acts (7:32) the best witnesses also lack the repeated ὁ θεός, but the three other times this OT passage is quoted in the NT the full form, with the thrice-mentioned θεός, is used (Matt 22:32; Mark 12:26; Luke 20:37). Scribes would be prone to conform the wording here to the LXX; the longer reading is thus most likely not authentic. NA27 has the words in brackets, indicating doubts as to their authenticity.
[3:13] 207 tn Or “ancestors”; Grk “fathers.”
[3:13] sn The reference to the God of the patriarchs is a reminder that God is the God of the nation and of promises. The phrase God of our forefathers is from the Hebrew scriptures (Exod 3:6, 15-16; 4:5; see also the Jewish prayer known as “The Eighteen Benedictions”). Once again, event has led to explanation, or what is called the “sign and speech” pattern.
[3:13] 208 sn Has glorified. Jesus is alive, raised and active, as the healing illustrates so dramatically how God honors him.
[3:13] 209 sn His servant. The term servant has messianic connotations given the context of the promise, the note of suffering, and the titles and functions noted in vv. 14-15.
[3:13] 210 tn Or “denied,” “disowned.”
[3:13] 211 tn This genitive absolute construction could be understood as temporal (“when he had decided”) or concessive (“although he had decided”).
[3:14] 212 tn Or “denied,” “disowned.”
[3:15] 213 tn Or “You put to death.”
[3:15] 214 tn Or “Founder,” “founding Leader.”
[3:15] 215 sn Whom God raised. God is the main actor here, as he testifies to Jesus and vindicates him.
[3:15] 216 tn Grk “whom God raised from the dead, of which we are witnesses.” The two consecutive relative clauses make for awkward English style, so the second was begun as a new sentence with the words “to this fact” supplied in place of the Greek relative pronoun to make a complete sentence in English.
[3:15] sn We are witnesses. Note the two witnesses here, Peter and John (Acts 5:32; Heb 2:3-4).
[3:16] 217 tn Grk “in his name”; the referent (Jesus) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[3:16] 218 sn Here is another example of appeal to the person by mentioning the name. See the note on the word name in 3:6.
[3:16] 219 tn Grk “see and know, and the faith.” Because of the length and complexity of the Greek sentence, a new sentence was started here in the translation and καί (kai, “and”) has not been translated.
[3:16] 220 tn Grk “him”; the referent (Jesus) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[3:16] sn The faith that is through Jesus. Note how this verse explains how the claim to “faith in Jesus’ name” works and what it means. To appeal to the name is to point to the person. It is not clear that the man expressed faith before the miracle. This could well be a “grace-faith miracle” where God grants power through the apostles to picture how much a gift life is (Luke 17:11-19). Christology and grace are emphasized here.
[3:16] 221 tn Or “in full view.”
[3:17] 222 sn The ignorance Peter mentions here does not excuse them from culpability. It was simply a way to say “you did not realize the great mistake you made.”
[3:18] 223 sn God foretold. Peter’s topic is the working out of God’s plan and promise through events the scriptures also note.
[3:18] 224 tn Grk “by the mouth of” (an idiom).
[3:18] 225 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[3:18] sn See the note on Christ in 2:31.
[3:20] sn Times of refreshing. The phrase implies relief from difficult, distressful or burdensome circumstances. It is generally regarded as a reference to the messianic age being ushered in.
[3:20] 227 tn The words “so that…Lord” are traditionally placed in v. 19 by most English translations, but in the present translation the verse division follows the standard critical editions of the Greek text (NA27, UBS4).
[3:20] 228 tn Or “the Christ”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[3:20] sn He may send the Messiah appointed for you – that is, Jesus. The language points to the expectation of Jesus’ return to gather his people. It is a development of the question raised in Acts 1:6.
[3:20] 229 tn Or “designated in advance.”
[3:21] 230 tn Grk “whom,” continuing the sentence from v. 20.
[3:21] 231 sn The term must used here (δεῖ, dei, “it is necessary”) is a key Lukan term to point to the plan of God and what must occur.
[3:21] 232 tn Grk “until the times of the restoration of all things.” Because of the awkward English style of the extended genitive construction, and because the following relative clause has as its referent the “time of restoration” rather than “all things,” the phrase was translated “until the time all things are restored.”
[3:21] sn The time all things are restored. What that restoration involves is already recorded in the scriptures of the nation of Israel.
[3:21] 234 tn Or “from all ages past.”
[3:21] sn From times long ago. Once again, God’s plan is emphasized.
[3:22] 235 tn Grk “hear,” but the idea of “hear and obey” or simply “obey” is frequently contained in the Greek verb ἀκούω (akouw; see L&N 36.14) and the following context (v. 23) makes it clear that failure to “obey” the words of this “prophet like Moses” will result in complete destruction.
[3:22] 236 sn A quotation from Deut 18:15. By quoting Deut 18:15 Peter declared that Jesus was the eschatological “prophet like [Moses]” mentioned in that passage, who reveals the plan of God and the way of God.
[3:23] 237 tn Grk “every soul” (here “soul” is an idiom for the whole person).
[3:23] 238 tn Or “will be completely destroyed.” In Acts 3:23 the verb ἐξολεθρεύω (exoleqreuw) is translated “destroy and remove” by L&N 20.35.
[3:23] 239 sn A quotation from Deut 18:19, also Lev 23:29. The OT context of Lev 23:29 discusses what happened when one failed to honor atonement. One ignored the required sacrifice of God at one’s peril.
[3:24] 240 tn Or “proclaimed.”
[3:24] sn All the prophets…have spoken about and announced. What Peter preaches is rooted in basic biblical and Jewish hope as expressed in the OT scriptures.
[3:25] 241 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[3:25] 242 tn Or “in your offspring”; Grk “in your seed.”
[3:25] sn In your descendants (Grk “in your seed”). Seed has an important ambiguity in this verse. The blessing comes from the servant (v. 26), who in turn blesses the responsive children of the covenant as the scripture promised. Jesus is the seed who blesses the seed.
[3:25] 243 tn Or “families.” The Greek word πατριά (patria) can indicate persons of succeeding generations who are related by birth (“lineage,” “family”) but it can also indicate a relatively large unit of people who make up a sociopolitical group and who share a presumed biological descent. In many contexts πατριά is very similar to ἔθνος (eqnos) and λαός (laos). In light of the context of the OT quotation, it is better to translate πατριά as “nations” here.
[3:25] 244 sn A quotation from Gen 22:18.
[3:26] 245 tn Grk “God raising up his servant, sent him.” The participle ἀναστήσας (anasthsa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. Some translations (e.g., NIV, NRSV) render this participle as temporal (“when God raised up his servant”).
[3:26] 246 sn The picture of turning is again seen as the appropriate response to the message. See v. 19 above. In v. 19 it was “turning to,” here it is “turning away from.” The direction of the two metaphors is important.
[3:26] 247 tn For the translation of plural πονηρία (ponhria) as “iniquities,” see G. Harder, TDNT 6:565. The plural is important, since for Luke turning to Jesus means turning away from sins, not just the sin of rejecting Jesus.
[4:1] 248 tn Grk “While they”; the referents (Peter and John) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[4:1] 250 tn Grk “the official of the temple,” a title for the commander of the Jewish soldiers guarding the temple (thus the translation, “the commander of the temple guard”). See L&N 37.91.
[4:1] sn The commander of the temple guard was the title of the officer commanding the Jewish soldiers responsible for guarding and keeping order in the temple courts in Jerusalem.
[4:1] 251 sn The Sadducees controlled the official political structures of Judaism at this time, being the majority members of the Sanhedrin. They were known as extremely strict on law and order issues (Josephus, J. W. 2.8.2 [2.119], 2.8.14 [2.164-166]; Ant. 13.5.9 [13.171-173], 13.10.6 [13.293-298], 18.1.2 [18.11], 18.1.4 [18.16-17], 20.9.1 [20.199]; Life 2 [10-11]). See also Matt 3:7; 16:1-12; 22:23-34; Mark 12:18-27; Luke 20:27-38; Acts 5:17; 23:6-8.
[4:1] 252 tn Or “approached.” This verb often denotes a sudden appearing (BDAG 418 s.v. ἐφίστημι 1).
[4:2] 253 tn Or “greatly annoyed,” “provoked.”
[4:2] 254 tn Or “proclaiming.”
[4:3] 255 tn Grk “And” Here καί (kai) has been translated as “so” to indicate the logical sequence of events.
[4:3] 256 tn Or “they arrested”; Grk “they laid hands on.”
[4:3] 257 tn Or “prison,” “custody.”
[4:4] 260 tn In the historical setting it is likely that only men are referred to here. The Greek term ἀνήρ (anhr) usually refers to males or husbands rather than people in general. Thus to translate “of the people” would give a false impression of the number, since any women and children were apparently not included in the count.
[4:5] 261 tn Grk “It happened that on the next day.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[4:5] 262 tn Or “and scribes.” The traditional rendering of γραμματεύς (grammateu") as “scribe” does not communicate much to the modern English reader, for whom the term might mean “professional copyist,” if it means anything at all. The people referred to here were recognized experts in the law of Moses and in traditional laws and regulations. Thus “expert in the law” comes closer to the meaning for the modern reader.
[4:5] sn Experts in the law would have been mostly like the Pharisees in approach. Thus various sects of Judaism were coming together against Jesus.
[4:5] 263 tn Or “law assembled,” “law met together.”
[4:5] 264 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[4:6] 265 sn The high priest’s family. This family controlled the high priesthood as far back as
[4:7] 266 tn Grk “And after.” Because of the length and complexity of the Greek sentence, καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new sentence is begun in the translation at the beginning of v. 7.
[4:7] 267 tn Grk “making them”; the referents (Peter and John) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[4:7] 268 sn By what name. The issue of the “name” comes up again here. This question, meaning “by whose authority,” surfaces an old dispute (see Luke 20:1-8). Who speaks for God about the ancient faith?
[4:8] 269 sn Filled with the Holy Spirit. The narrator’s remark about the Holy Spirit indicates that Peter speaks as directed by God and for God. This fulfills Luke 12:11-12 (1 Pet 3:15).
[4:8] 270 tn Grk “Spirit, said to them.”
[4:8] 271 tc The Western and Byzantine texts, as well as one or two Alexandrian witnesses, read τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ (tou Israhl, “of Israel”) after πρεσβύτεροι (presbuteroi, “elders”; so D E Ψ 33 1739 Ï it), while most of the better witnesses, chiefly Alexandrian (Ì74 א A B 0165 1175 vg sa bo), lack this modifier. The longer reading was most likely added by scribes to give literary balance to the addressees in that “Rulers” already had an adjunct while “elders” was left absolute.
[4:9] 272 tn This clause is a first class condition. It assumes for the sake of argument that this is what they were being questioned about.
[4:9] 273 tn Or “questioned.” The Greek term ἀνακρίνω (anakrinw) points to an examination similar to a legal one.
[4:9] 274 tn Or “for an act of kindness.”
[4:9] 275 tn Or “delivered” (σέσωται [seswtai], from σώζω [swzw]). See 4:12.
[4:10] 276 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[4:11] 277 tn Grk “This one”; the referent (Jesus) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[4:11] 278 tn The word “you” is inserted into the quotation because Peter is making a direct application of Ps 118:22 to his hearers. Because it is not in the OT, it has been left as normal type (rather than bold italic). The remarks are like Acts 2:22-24 and 3:12-15.
[4:11] 279 sn A quotation from Ps 118:22 which combines the theme of rejection with the theme of God’s vindication/exaltation.
[4:12] 280 tn Here ἀνθρώποις (anqrwpoi") has been translated as a generic noun (“people”).
[4:12] 281 sn Must be saved. The term used here (δεῖ, dei, “it is necessary”) reflects the necessity set up by God’s directive plan.
[4:13] 283 tn Or “and found out.”
[4:13] 284 sn Uneducated does not mean “illiterate,” that is, unable to read or write. Among Jews in NT times there was almost universal literacy, especially as the result of widespread synagogue schools. The term refers to the fact that Peter and John had no formal rabbinic training and thus, in the view of their accusers, were not qualified to expound the law or teach publicly. The objection is like Acts 2:7.
[4:13] 285 tn For the translation of ἰδιῶται (idiwtai) as “ordinary men” see L&N 27.26.
[4:14] 286 tn Or “nothing to say in opposition.”
[4:15] 287 tn Or “the Sanhedrin” (the highest legal, legislative, and judicial body among the Jews).
[4:16] 289 tn Here σημεῖον (shmeion) has been translated as “miraculous sign” rather than simply “sign” or “miracle” since both components appear to be present in the context. It is clear that the healing of the lame man was a miracle, but for the Sanhedrin it was the value of the miraculous healing as a sign that concerned them because it gave attestation to the message of Peter and John. The sign “speaks” as Peter claimed in 3:11-16.
[4:16] 290 tn Or “has been done by them.”
[4:17] 291 tn Or “speak no longer.”
[4:18] 293 sn In the name of Jesus. Once again, the “name” reflects the person. The person of Jesus and his authority is the “troubling” topic that, as far as the Jewish leadership is concerned, needs controlling.
[4:19] 294 tn Grk “answered and said to them.”
[4:19] 295 tn Grk “hear,” but the idea of “hear and obey” or simply “obey” is frequently contained in the Greek verb ἀκούω (akouw; see L&N 36.14).
[4:20] 296 tn Grk “for we are not able not to speak about what we have seen and heard,” but the double negative, which cancels out in English, is emphatic in Greek. The force is captured somewhat by the English translation “it is impossible for us not to speak…” although this is slightly awkward.
[4:21] 297 tn Or “glorifying.”
[4:22] 298 tn Here σημεῖον (shmeion) has been translated as “miraculous sign” rather than simply “sign” or “miracle” since both components appear to be present in the context. See also the note on this word in v. 16.
[4:22] 299 tn Or “had been done.”
[4:23] 300 tn Grk “they”; the referents (Peter and John) have been specified in the translation for clarity, since a new topic begins in v. 23 and the last specific reference to Peter and John in the Greek text is in 4:19.
[4:23] 301 tn Grk “to their own [people].” In context this phrase is most likely a reference to other believers rather than simply their own families and/or homes, since the group appears to act with one accord in the prayer that follows in v. 24. At the literary level, this phrase suggests how Jews were now splitting into two camps, pro-Jesus and anti-Jesus.
[4:24] 302 sn With one mind. Compare Acts 1:14.
[4:24] 303 tn Or “Lord of all.”
[4:24] sn The use of the title Master of all (δεσπότης, despoths) emphasizes that there is a sovereign God who is directing what is taking place.
[4:24] 304 tn Grk “and the earth, and the sea,” but καί (kai) has not been translated before “the earth” and “the sea” since contemporary English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[4:25] 305 tn Grk “by the mouth of” (an idiom).
[4:25] 306 tn Or “ancestor”; Grk “father.”
[4:25] 308 sn The Greek word translated rage includes not only anger but opposition, both verbal and nonverbal. See L&N 88.185.
[4:25] 309 tn Or “futile”; traditionally, “vain.”
[4:26] 310 tn Traditionally, “The kings of the earth took their stand.”
[4:26] 311 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[4:26] sn See the note on Christ in 2:31.
[4:26] 312 sn A quotation from Ps 2:1-2.
[4:27] 313 sn The application of Ps 2:1-2 is that Jews and Gentiles are opposing Jesus. The surprise of the application is that Jews are now found among the enemies of God’s plan.
[4:27] 314 sn A wordplay on “Christ,” v. 26, which means “one who has been anointed.”
[4:28] 315 tn Grk “hand,” here a metaphor for God’s strength or power or authority.
[4:28] 316 tn Or “purpose,” “will.”
[4:28] 317 tn Or “had predestined.” Since the term “predestine” is something of a technical theological term, not in wide usage in contemporary English, the translation “decide beforehand” was used instead (see L&N 30.84). God’s direction remains as the major theme.
[4:29] 318 tn Or “Lord, take notice of.”
[4:29] 319 sn Grant to your servants to speak your message with great courage. The request is not for a stop to persecution or revenge on the opponents, but for boldness (great courage) to carry out the mission of proclaiming the message of what God is doing through Jesus.
[4:29] 320 tn Grk “slaves.” See the note on the word “servants” in 2:18.
[4:29] 322 tn Or “with all boldness.”
[4:30] 323 tn The miraculous nature of these signs is implied in the context.
[4:31] 324 tn Grk “And when.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[4:31] 325 sn The place where they were assembled…was shaken. This signifies that God is in their midst. See Acts 16:26; Exod 19:18; Ps 114:7; Isa 6:4.
[4:31] 326 tn The imperfect verb has been translated as an ingressive imperfect (“began to speak”). Logical sequencing suggests that their speaking began after they were filled with the Spirit. The prayer was answered immediately.
[4:31] 327 tn Or “speak God’s message.”
[4:31] 328 tn Or “with boldness.”
[4:32] 330 tn Grk “but all things were to them in common.”
[4:32] sn Everything was held in common. The remark is not a reflection of political philosophy, but of the extent of their spontaneous commitment to one another. Such a response does not have the function of a command, but is reflective of an attitude that Luke commends as evidence of their identification with one another.
[4:33] 331 tn Grk “And with.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[4:33] 332 tn Or “were witnessing.”
[4:34] 334 tn Grk “houses, selling them were bringing.” The participle πωλοῦντες (pwlounte") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[4:34] 335 tn The word “them” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[4:35] 336 tn Grk “It” (or “They,” plural). The referent of the understood pronoun subject, the proceeds from the sales, of the verb διεδίδετο (diedideto) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[4:36] 337 sn This is a parenthetical note by the author. Note how the actions of Barnabas are in keeping with the meaning of his nickname. He stands in contrast to Ananias and Sapphira in 5:1-11.
[4:37] 338 tn Grk “selling a field that belonged to him, brought” The participle πωλήσας (pwlhsa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[4:37] 340 tn Normally a reference to actual coins (“currency”). See L&N 6.68.
[5:2] 341 tn Grk “And he.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence and the tendency of contemporary English style to use shorter sentences, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[5:2] 342 tn The participle ἐνέγκας (enenka") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[5:3] 343 sn This is a good example of the Greek verb fill (πληρόω, plhrow) meaning “to exercise control over someone’s thought and action” (cf. Eph 5:18).
[5:3] 344 tn The words “from the sale of” are not in the Greek text, but are supplied to clarify the meaning, since the phrase “proceeds from the land” could possibly be understood as crops rather than money from the sale.
[5:4] 345 tn Grk “Remaining to you.”
[5:4] 346 tn The negative interrogative particle οὐχί (ouci) expects a positive reply to this question and the following one (“And when it was sold, was it not at your disposal?”).
[5:4] 347 tn Grk “it”; the referent of the pronoun (the money generated from the sale of the land) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[5:4] 348 tn Grk “How is it that you have [or Why have you] placed this deed in your heart?” Both of these literal translations differ from the normal way of expressing the thought in English.
[5:4] 349 tn Grk “to men.” If Peter’s remark refers only to the apostles, the translation “to men” would be appropriate. But if (as is likely) the action was taken to impress the entire congregation (who would presumably have witnessed the donation or been aware of it) then the more general “to people” is more appropriate, since the audience would have included both men and women.
[5:5] 350 tn Or “fear came on,” “fear seized”; Grk “fear happened to.”
[5:6] 352 tn The translation “wrapped up” for συνέστειλαν (sunesteilan) is suggested by L&N 79.119, but another interpretation is possible. The same verb could also be translated “removed” (see L&N 15.200), although that sense appears somewhat redundant and out of sequence with the following verb and participle (“carried him out and buried him”).
[5:6] 353 sn Buried. Same day burial was a custom in the Jewish world of the first century (cf. also Deut 21:23).
[5:7] 354 tn Grk “It happened that after an interval of about three hours.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[5:7] 355 tn Grk “came in, not knowing.” The participle has been translated with concessive or adversative force: “although she did not know.” In English, the adversative conjunction (“but”) conveys this nuance more smoothly.
[5:8] 356 tn The words “the two of” are not in the Greek text, but have been supplied to indicate that the verb (ἀπέδοσθε, apedosqe) is plural and thus refers to both Ananias and Sapphira.
[5:8] 357 tn Grk “so much,” “as much as this.”
[5:8] 358 tn Grk “She”; the referent (Sapphira) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[5:10] 359 tn Grk “And at once.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[5:11] 360 tn Grk “And great.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[5:11] 361 tn Or “fear came on,” “fear seized”; Grk “fear happened to.”
[5:11] 362 sn This is the first occurrence of the term church (ἐκκλησία, ekklhsia) in Acts. It refers to an assembly of people.
[5:12] 363 tn The miraculous nature of these signs is implied in the context.
[5:12] 364 tn Grk “And by.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[5:12] 365 tn Or “With one mind.”
[5:12] 366 tn Or “colonnade”; Grk “stoa.”
[5:12] sn Solomon’s Portico was a covered walkway formed by rows of columns supporting a roof and open on the inner side facing the center of the temple complex. Located beside the Court of the Gentiles, it was a very public area.
[5:13] 367 tn Or “to associate with them.” The group was beginning to have a controversial separate identity. People were cautious about joining them. The next verse suggests that the phrase “none of the rest” in this verse is rhetorical hyperbole.
[5:13] 368 tn Or “the people thought very highly of them.”
[5:14] 369 tn Or “More and more believers were added to the Lord.”
[5:15] 370 tn This is a continuation of the preceding sentence in Greek, but because this would produce an awkward sentence in English, a new sentence was begun here in the translation.
[5:16] 371 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[5:16] 372 sn Unclean spirits refers to evil spirits.
[5:16] 373 tn Literally a relative pronoun, “who.” In English, however, a relative clause (“bringing the sick and those troubled by unclean spirits, who were all being healed”) could be understood to refer only to the second group (meaning only those troubled by unclean spirits were being healed) or even that the unclean spirits were being healed. To avoid this ambiguity the pronoun “they” was used to begin a new English sentence.
[5:16] 374 sn They were all being healed. Note how the healings that the apostles provided were comprehensive in their consistency.
[5:17] 375 sn See the note on Sadducees in 4:1.
[5:17] 376 sn This is a parenthetical note by the author.
[5:17] 377 sn Filled with jealousy. In Acts, the term “jealousy” (ζήλος, zhlos) occurs only here and in Acts 13:45. It is a key term in Judaism for religiously motivated rage (1 Macc 2:24; 1QH 14:13-15; m. Sanhedrin 9:5). It was a zeal motivated by a desire to maintain the purity of the faith.
[5:18] 378 tn Grk “jealousy, and they.” In the Greek text this is a continuation of the previous sentence, but a new sentence has been started here in the translation for stylistic reasons.
[5:18] 379 tn Or “they arrested.”
[5:19] 380 tn Or “the angel of the Lord.” Linguistically, “angel of the Lord” is the same in both testaments (and thus, he is either “an angel of the Lord” or “the angel of the Lord” in both testaments). For arguments and implications, see ExSyn 252; M. J. Davidson, “Angels,” DJG, 9; W. G. MacDonald argues for “an angel” in both testaments: “Christology and ‘The Angel of the Lord’,” Current Issues in Biblical and Patristic Interpretation, 324-35.
[5:19] 381 tn Grk “opening the doors of the prison.” The participle ἀνοίξας (anoixa") has been translated as a finite verb due to the requirements of contemporary English style.
[5:19] 382 tn Greek φυλακῆς (fulakh"), a different word from the one in v. 18 (τήρησις, thrhsi", “jail”).
[5:19] 383 tn Or “brought them out.” Grk “and leading them out, said.” The participle ἐξαγαγών (exagagwn) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[5:19] sn Led them out. The action by God served to vindicate the apostles. It showed that whatever court the Jewish leaders represented, they did not represent God.
[5:20] 384 tn Grk “the temple.” This is actually a reference to the courts surrounding the temple proper, and has been translated accordingly.
[5:21] 386 tn Grk “the temple.” See the note on the same phrase in the preceding verse.
[5:21] 387 tn The imperfect verb ἐδίδασκον (edidaskon) has been translated as an ingressive imperfect.
[5:21] 388 tn Or “the council” (the highest legal, legislative, and judicial body among the Jews).
[5:21] 389 tn A hendiadys (two different terms referring to a single thing) is likely here (a reference to a single legislative body rather than two separate ones) because the term γερουσίαν (gerousian) is used in both 1 Macc 12:6 and Josephus, Ant. 13.5.8 (13.166) to refer to the Sanhedrin.
[5:21] 390 tn Grk “sons of Israel.”
[5:21] 391 tn Grk “have them”; the referent (the apostles) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[5:21] 392 tn The words “before them” are not in the Greek text but are implied.
[5:22] 393 tn The Greek term ὑπηρέτης (Juphreth") generally means “servant,” but in the NT is used for many different types of servants, like attendants to a king, the officers of the Sanhedrin (as here), assistants to magistrates, and (especially in the Gospel of John) Jewish guards in the Jerusalem temple (see L&N 35.20).
[5:22] 394 tn The words “for them” are not in the Greek text but are implied.
[5:22] 395 tn Grk “reported, saying.” The participle λέγοντες (legontes) is redundant in English and has not been translated.
[5:23] 396 tn The word “them” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects in Greek were often omitted when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[5:24] 398 tn Grk “the official of the temple,” a title for the commander of the Jewish soldiers guarding the temple (thus the translation, “the commander of the temple guard”). See L&N 37.91.
[5:24] 399 tn Grk “heard these words.”
[5:24] 400 tn Grk “concerning them,” agreeing with the plural antecedent “these words.” Since the phrase “these words” was translated as the singular “this report,” the singular “concerning it” is used here.
[5:24] 401 tn The optative verb here expresses confused uncertainty.
[5:25] 402 tn Grk “the temple.” This is actually a reference to the courts surrounding the temple proper, and has been translated accordingly.
[5:25] 403 sn Obeying God (see v. 29), the apostles were teaching again (4:18-20; 5:20). They did so despite the risk.
[5:26] 405 tn Grk “the official [of the temple],” a title for the commander of the Jewish soldiers guarding the temple (thus the translation, “the commander of the temple guard”). See L&N 37.91.
[5:26] 406 tn The Greek term ὑπηρέτης (Juphreth") generally means “servant,” but in the NT is used for many different types of servants. See the note on the word “officers” in v. 22.
[5:26] 407 tn Grk “brought them”; the referent (the apostles) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[5:26] 408 tn Or “without violence.” It is clear, as well, that the apostles did not resist arrest.
[5:26] 409 tn Grk “for they feared lest they be stoned by the people.” The translation uses a less awkward English equivalent. This is an explanatory note by the author.
[5:27] 410 tn Or “the Sanhedrin” (the highest legal, legislative, and judicial body among the Jews).
[5:27] 411 tn Or “interrogated,” “asked.”
[5:28] 412 tc ‡ The majority of
[5:28] 413 tn Grk “We commanded you with a commandment” (a Semitic idiom that is emphatic).
[5:28] 414 sn The name (i.e., person) of Jesus is the constant issue of debate.
[5:28] 415 tn Grk “And behold.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence and the tendency of contemporary English style to use shorter sentences, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[5:28] 416 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[5:28] 417 sn To bring this man’s blood on us is an idiom meaning “you intend to make us guilty of this man’s death.”
[5:29] 418 tn Grk “apostles answered and said.”
[5:29] 419 sn Obey. See 4:19. This response has Jewish roots (Dan 3:16-18; 2 Macc 7:2; Josephus, Ant. 17.6.3 [17.159].
[5:29] 420 tn Here ἀνθρώποις (anqrwpoi") has been translated as a generic noun (“people”).
[5:30] 421 tn Or “ancestors”; Grk “fathers.”
[5:30] 422 tn Or “by crucifying him” (“hang on a tree” is by the time of the first century an idiom for crucifixion). The allusion is to the judgment against Jesus as a rebellious figure, appealing to the language of Deut 21:23. The Jewish leadership has badly “misjudged” Jesus.
[5:31] 423 tn Grk “This one God exalted” (emphatic).
[5:31] 424 tn Or “Founder” (of a movement).
[5:31] 425 tn Or “to give repentance and forgiveness of sins to Israel.”
[5:32] 426 tn Or “things.” They are preaching these things even to the hostile leadership.
[5:32] 427 sn Those who obey. The implication, of course, is that the leadership is disobeying God.
[5:33] 428 sn The only other use of this verb for anger (furious) is Acts 7:54 after Stephen’s speech.
[5:33] 429 sn Wanted to execute them. The charge would surely be capital insubordination (Exod 22:28).
[5:34] 430 sn A Pharisee was a member of one of the most important and influential religious and political parties of Judaism in the time of Jesus. There were more Pharisees than Sadducees (according to Josephus, Ant. 17.2.4 [17.42] there were more than 6,000 Pharisees at about this time). Pharisees differed with Sadducees on certain doctrines and patterns of behavior. The Pharisees were strict and zealous adherents to the laws of the OT and to numerous additional traditions such as angels and bodily resurrection.
[5:34] 431 sn Gamaliel was a famous Jewish scholar and teacher mentioned here in v. 34 and in Acts 22:3. He had a grandson of the same name and is referred to as “Gamaliel the Elder” to avoid confusion. He is quoted a number of times in the Mishnah, was given the highest possible title for Jewish teachers, Rabba (cf. John 20:16), and was highly regarded in later rabbinic tradition.
[5:34] 432 tn Grk “standing up in the council, ordered.” The participle ἀναστάς (anasta") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[5:34] 433 tn Or “the Sanhedrin” (the highest legal, legislative, and judicial body among the Jews).
[5:35] 434 tn Grk “said to them”; the referent (the council) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[5:35] 435 tn Or “Israelite men,” although this is less natural English. The Greek term here is ἀνήρ (anhr), which only exceptionally is used in a generic sense of both males and females. In this context, it is highly unlikely that this is a generic usage, since Gamaliel was addressing the Sanhedrin, the Jewish high council, which would have been exclusively male.
[5:35] 436 tn Or “men, be careful.”
[5:36] 437 tn Grk “For before these days.”
[5:36] 438 tn Grk “who.” The relative pronoun was replaced by the pronoun “he,” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point.
[5:36] 439 tn Grk “and they came to nothing.” Gamaliel’s argument is that these two insurrectionists were taken care of by natural events.
[5:37] 440 tn Or “registration.”
[5:37] 441 tn The verb ἀφίστημι (afisthmi) as a transitive means “cause to revolt” as used in Josephus, Ant. 8.7.5 (8.198), 20.5.2 (20.102); see BDAG 157 s.v. 1.
[5:38] 442 tn Here ἀνθρώπων (anqrwpwn) has been translated as a generic noun (“people”).
[5:38] 443 tn Or “it will be put to an end.”
[5:39] 444 tn This is expressed in a first class condition, in contrast to the condition in v. 38b, which is third class. As such, v. 39 is rhetorically presented as the more likely option.
[5:39] 445 tn According to L&N 39.32, the verb εὑρεθῆτε (Jeureqhte, an aorist passive subjunctive) may also be translated “find yourselves” – “lest you find yourselves fighting against God.” The Jewish leader Gamaliel is shown contemplating the other possible alternative about what is occurring.
[5:39] 446 tn Grk “They were convinced by him.” This passive construction was converted to an active one (“He convinced them”) in keeping with contemporary English style. The phrase “He convinced them” is traditionally placed in Acts 5:40 by most English translations; the standard Greek critical text (represented by NA27 and UBS4) places it at the end of v. 39.
[5:40] 447 sn Had them beaten. The punishment was the “forty lashes minus one,” see also Acts 22:19; 2 Cor 11:24; Mark 13:9. The apostles had disobeyed the religious authorities and took their punishment for their “disobedience” (Deut 25:2-3; m. Makkot 3:10-14). In Acts 4:18 they were warned. Now they are beaten. The hostility is rising as the narrative unfolds.
[5:40] 448 tn The word “Then” is supplied as the beginning of a new sentence in the translation. The construction in Greek has so many clauses (most of them made up of participles) that a continuous English sentence would be very awkward.
[5:41] 449 sn That is, considered worthy by God. They “gloried in their shame” of honoring Jesus with their testimony (Luke 6:22-23; 2 Macc 6:30).
[5:41] 450 sn The name refers to the name of Jesus (cf. 3 John 7).
[5:42] 451 tn Grk “temple.” This is actually a reference to the courts surrounding the temple proper and has been translated accordingly.
[5:42] 452 tn Grk “teaching and evangelizing.” They were still obeying God, not men (see 4:18-20; 5:29).
[5:42] 453 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[5:42] sn See the note on Christ in 2:31.
[6:1] 454 tn Grk “these.” The translation uses “those” for stylistic reasons.
[6:1] 455 tn Grk “were multiplying.”
[6:1] 456 tn Grk “the Hellenists,” but this descriptive term is largely unknown to the modern English reader. The translation “Greek-speaking Jews” attempts to convey something of who these were, but it was more than a matter of language spoken; it involved a degree of adoption of Greek culture as well.
[6:1] sn The Greek-speaking Jews were the Hellenists, Jews who to a greater or lesser extent had adopted Greek thought, customs, and lifestyle, as well as the Greek language. The city of Alexandria in Egypt was a focal point for them, but they were scattered throughout the Roman Empire.
[6:1] 457 tn Grk “against the Hebrews,” but as with “Hellenists” this needs further explanation for the modern reader.
[6:1] 458 sn The care of widows is a major biblical theme: Deut 10:18; 16:11, 14; 24:17, 19-21; 26:12-13; 27:19; Isa 1:17-23; Jer 7:6; Mal 3:5.
[6:1] 460 tn Grk “in the daily serving.”
[6:1] sn The daily distribution of food. The early church saw it as a responsibility to meet the basic needs of people in their group.
[6:2] 461 sn The twelve refers to the twelve apostles.
[6:2] 462 tn Grk “calling the whole group…together, said.” The participle προσκαλεσάμενοι (proskalesamenoi) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[6:2] 463 tn Or “the multitude.”
[6:2] 464 tn Grk “to serve tables.”
[6:3] 465 tn It is not clear from a historical standpoint (but it is unlikely) that women would have been involved in the selection process too. For this reason the translation “brothers” has been retained, rather than “brothers and sisters” (used in contexts where both male and female believers are clearly addressed).
[6:3] 466 sn Seven. Jewish town councils often had seven members (Josephus, Ant. 4.18.14 [4.214]).
[6:3] 467 tn Or “are of good reputation” (BDAG 618 s.v. μαρτυρέω 2.b).
[6:3] 468 tn The translation “put in charge” is given by BDAG 492 s.v. καθίστημι 2.
[6:3] 469 tn Grk “of this need”; translated “necessary work” or “needed task” by L&N 42.22.
[6:5] 470 tn Grk “And the.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[6:5] 471 tn The translation “so” has been used to indicate the logical sequence in English.
[6:5] 472 tn “With” is smoother English style for an addition like this. Because of differences between Greek and English style, καί (kai), which occurs between each name in the list, has not been translated except preceding the last element.
[6:5] 473 sn Philip. Note how many of the names in this list are Greek. This suggests that Hellenists were chosen to solve the problem they had been so sensitive about fixing (cf. 6:1).
[6:5] 474 tn Or “a proselyte.”
[6:5] 475 map For location see JP1 F2; JP2 F2; JP3 F2; JP4 F2.
[6:6] 476 tn Literally this is a participle in the Greek text (προσευξάμενοι, proseuxamenoi). It could be translated as a finite verb (“and they prayed and placed their hands on them”) but much smoother English results if the entire coordinate clause is converted to a relative clause that refers back to the apostles.
[6:6] sn Who prayed. The prayer indicates their acceptance and commissioning for ministry (cf. Deut 34:9).
[6:7] 478 tn Grk “kept on spreading”; the verb has been translated as a progressive imperfect.
[6:7] 479 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[6:7] 480 tn Grk “a great multitude.”
[6:7] sn A large group. Many Jews, even some religious leaders, were responding.
[6:8] 481 tn The miraculous nature of these signs is implied in the context. Here the work of miracles extends beyond the Twelve for the first time.
[6:9] 482 sn A synagogue was a place for Jewish prayer and worship, with recognized leadership (cf. Luke 8:41). Though the origin of the synagogue is not entirely clear, it seems to have arisen in the postexilic community during the intertestamental period. A town could establish a synagogue if there were at least ten men. In normative Judaism of the NT period, the OT scripture was read and discussed in the synagogue by the men who were present (see the Mishnah, m. Megillah 3-4; m. Berakhot 2).
[6:9] 483 tn Grk “the so-called Synagogue of the Freedmen.” The translation of the participle λεγομένης (legomenh") by the phrase “as it was called” is given by L&N 87.86. “Freedmen” would be slaves who had gained their freedom, or the descendants of such people (BDAG 594-95 s.v. Λιβερτῖνος).
[6:9] 484 tn Grk “Asia”; in the NT this always refers to the Roman province of Asia, made up of about one-third of the west and southwest end of modern Asia Minor. Asia lay to the west of the region of Phrygia and Galatia. The words “the province of” are supplied to indicate to the modern reader that this does not refer to the continent of Asia.
[6:10] 485 tn Grk “and.” The context, however, indicates that the conjunction carries an adversative force.
[6:10] 486 sn They were not able to resist. This represents another fulfillment of Luke 12:11-12; 21:15.
[6:11] 487 tn Another translation would be “they suborned” (but this term is not in common usage). “Instigate (secretly), suborn” is given by BDAG 1036 s.v. ὑποβάλλω.
[6:11] 488 tn Grk “heard him”; but since this is direct discourse, it is more natural (and clearer) to specify the referent (Stephen) as “this man.”
[6:12] 489 tn Grk “and the,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[6:12] 490 tn Or “and the scribes.” See the note on the phrase “experts in the law” in 4:5.
[6:12] 491 tn Grk “approaching, they seized him”; the referent (Stephen) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[6:12] 492 tn Or “the Sanhedrin” (the highest legal, legislative, and judicial body among the Jews). Stephen suffers just as Peter and John did.
[6:13] 493 sn This holy place is a reference to the temple.
[6:13] 494 sn The law refers to the law of Moses. It elaborates the nature of the blasphemy in v. 11. To speak against God’s law in Torah was to blaspheme God (Deut 28:15-19). On the Jewish view of false witnesses, see Exod 19:16-18; 20:16; m. Sanhedrin 3.6; 5.1-5. Stephen’s speech in Acts 7 may indicate why the temple was mentioned.
[6:14] sn Will destroy this place and change the customs. Stephen appears to view the temple as a less central place in light of Christ’s work, an important challenge to Jewish religion, since it was at this time a temple-centered state and religion. Unlike Acts 3-4, the issue here is more than Jesus and his resurrection. Now the impact of his resurrection and the temple’s centrality has also become an issue. The “falseness” of the charge may not be that the witnesses were lying, but that they falsely read the truth of Stephen’s remarks.
[6:15] 496 tn Grk “And all.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[6:15] 497 tn Or “Sanhedrin” (the highest legal, legislative, and judicial body among the Jews).
[6:15] 498 tn Grk “at him”; the referent (Stephen) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[6:15] 499 sn His face was like the face of an angel. This narrative description of Stephen’s face adds to the mood of the passage. He had the appearance of a supernatural, heavenly messenger.
[7:1] 500 tn Grk “If it is so concerning these things” (see BDAG 422 s.v. ἔχω 10.a for this use).
[7:2] 502 tn Or “ancestor”; Grk “father.”
[7:3] 503 sn A quotation from Gen 12:1.
[7:4] 504 tn Grk “he”; the referent (God) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:4] 505 tn The translation “made him move” for the verb μετοικίζω (metoikizw) is given by L&N 85.83. The verb has the idea of “resettling” someone (BDAG 643 s.v.); see v. 43, where it reappears.
[7:5] 506 tn Grk “And he.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[7:5] 507 tn Grk “He did not give him an inheritance in it.” This could be understood to mean that God did not give something else to Abraham as an inheritance while he was living there. The point of the text is that God did not give any of the land to him as an inheritance, and the translation makes this clear.
[7:5] 508 tn Grk “a step of a foot” (cf. Deut 2:5).
[7:5] 509 tn Grk “he”; the referent (God) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:5] 510 sn An allusion to Gen 12:7; 13:15; 15:2, 18; 17:8; 24:7; 48:4. On the theological importance of the promise and to his descendants after him, see Rom 4 and Gal 3.
[7:5] 511 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Abraham) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:6] 512 tn Grk “that his”; the discourse switches from indirect to direct with the following verbs. For consistency the entire quotation is treated as second person direct discourse in the translation.
[7:6] 513 tn Or “will be strangers,” that is, one who lives as a noncitizen of a foreign country.
[7:6] 514 sn A quotation from Gen 15:13. Exod 12:40 specifies the sojourn as 430 years.
[7:7] 515 tn BDAG 568 s.v. κρίνω 5.b.α states, “Oft. the emphasis is unmistakably laid upon that which follows the Divine Judge’s verdict, upon the condemnation or punishment: condemn, punish …Ac 7:7 (Gen 15:14).”
[7:7] 516 tn The words “of there” are not in the Greek text, but are implied.
[7:7] sn A quotation from Gen 15:14.
[7:7] 517 tn Or “and serve,” but with religious/cultic overtones (BDAG 587 s.v. λατρεύω).
[7:7] 518 sn An allusion to Exod 3:12.
[7:8] 519 tn Grk “he”; the referent (God) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:8] 520 tn Grk “him”; the referent (Abraham) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:8] 521 sn God gave…the covenant. Note how the covenant of promise came before Abraham’s entry into the land and before the building of the temple.
[7:8] 522 tn Grk “circumcised him on the eighth day,” but many modern readers will not understand that this procedure was done on the eighth day after birth. The temporal clause “when he was eight days old” conveys this idea more clearly. See Gen 17:11-12.
[7:8] 523 tn The words “became the father of” are not in the Greek text due to an ellipsis, but must be supplied for the English translation. The ellipsis picks up the verb from the previous clause describing how Abraham fathered Isaac.
[7:8] 524 sn The twelve patriarchs refers to the twelve sons of Jacob, the famous ancestors of the Jewish race (see Gen 35:23-26).
[7:9] 525 tn Grk “And the.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[7:9] 526 tn The meaning “sell” for the middle voice of ἀποδίδωμι (apodidwmi) is given by BDAG 110 s.v. 5.a. See Gen 37:12-36, esp. v. 28.
[7:9] 527 tn Though the Greek term here is καί (kai), in context this remark is clearly contrastive: Despite the malicious act, God was present and protected Joseph.
[7:10] 528 tn Or “appointed.” See Gen 41:41-43.
[7:11] 529 tn Grk “came upon all Egypt.”
[7:11] 530 tn Grk “and,” but logically causal.
[7:11] 531 sn Our. Stephen spoke of “our” ancestors (Grk “fathers”) in an inclusive sense throughout the speech until his rebuke in v. 51, where the nation does what “your” ancestors did, at which point an exclusive pronoun is used. This serves to emphasize the rebuke.
[7:11] 532 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:12] 533 tn Or possibly “food,” since in a number of extrabiblical contexts the phrase σιτία καὶ ποτά (sitia kai pota) means “food and drink,” where solid food is contrasted with liquid nourishment (L&N 3.42).
[7:12] 534 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:12] 535 tn The word “there” is not in the Greek text. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[7:13] 536 tn BDAG 194 s.v. γένος 2. gives “family, relatives” here; another alternative is “race” (see v. 19).
[7:14] 537 tn The words “a message” are not in the Greek text, but are implied.
[7:14] 538 tn Or “Joseph had his father summoned” (BDAG 121 s.v. ἀποστέλλω 2.b).
[7:14] 539 tn Grk “souls” (here an idiom for the whole person).
[7:15] 540 tn The word “there” is not in the Greek text. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[7:15] 541 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:16] 543 sn See Gen 49:29-32.
[7:17] 544 tn Grk “But as the time for the fulfillment of the promise drew near that God had declared to Abraham.” The order of the clauses has been rearranged to improve English style. See vv. 6-7 above.
[7:17] 545 tn Grk “the people increased and multiplied.”
[7:18] 546 tn Or simply “did not know.” However, in this context the point is that the new king knew nothing about Joseph, not whether he had known him personally (which is the way “did not know Joseph” could be understood).
[7:18] 547 tn Grk “arose,” but in this context it clearly refers to a king assuming power.
[7:18] 548 sn A quotation from Exod 1:8.
[7:19] 549 tn According to L&N 88.147 it is also possible to translate κατασοφισάμενος (katasofisameno") as “took advantage by clever words” or “persuaded by sweet talk.”
[7:19] 551 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:19] 552 tn Or “expose” (BDAG 303 s.v. ἔκθετος).
[7:19] 553 tn Grk “so that they could not be kept alive,” but in this context the phrase may be translated either “so that they would not continue to live,” or “so that they would die” (L&N 23.89).
[7:20] 554 tn Or “was well-formed before God,” or “was well-pleasing to God” (BDAG 145 s.v. ἀστεῖος suggests the meaning is more like “well-bred” as far as God was concerned; see Exod 2:2).
[7:20] 555 tn Grk “who was brought up for three months.” The continuation of the sentence as a relative clause is awkward in English, so a new sentence was started in the translation by changing the relative pronoun to a regular pronoun (“he”).
[7:21] 556 tn Or “exposed” (see v. 19).
[7:21] 557 tn Grk “Pharaoh’s daughter took him up for herself.” According to BDAG 64 s.v. ἀναιρέω, “The pap. exx. involve exposed children taken up and reared as slaves…The rendering ‘adopt’ lacks philological precision and can be used only in a loose sense (as NRSV), esp. when Gr-Rom. terminology relating to adoption procedures is taken into account.” In this instance both the immediate context and the OT account (Exod 2:3-10) do support the normal sense of the English word “adopt,” although it should not be understood to refer to a technical, legal event.
[7:21] 558 tn Or “and reared him” (BDAG 74 s.v. ἀνατρέφω b).
[7:22] 559 tn Or “instructed.”
[7:22] 560 tn Or “was able” (BDAG 264 s.v. δυνατός 1.b.α).
[7:23] 562 tn Grk “brothers.” The translation “compatriot” is given by BDAG 18-19 s.v. ἀδελφός 2.b.
[7:23] 563 tn Grk “the sons of Israel.”
[7:24] 564 tn Grk “And when.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[7:24] 565 tn “Hurt unfairly” conveys a better sense of the seriousness of the offense against the Israelite than “treated unfairly,” which can sometimes refer to slight offenses, or “wronged,” which can refer to offenses that do not involve personal violence, as this one probably did.
[7:24] 566 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Moses) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:24] 567 tn Or “he defended,” “he retaliated” (BDAG 55 s.v. ἀμύνομαι).
[7:25] 568 tn Grk “his brothers.”
[7:25] 569 tn Grk “was granting them deliverance.” The narrator explains that this act pictured what Moses could do for his people.
[7:25] 570 tn Grk “by his hand,” where the hand is a metaphor for the entire person.
[7:25] 571 sn They did not understand. Here is the theme of the speech. The people did not understand what God was doing through those he chose. They made the same mistake with Joseph at first. See Acts 3:17; 13:27. There is good precedent for this kind of challenging review of history in the ancient scriptures: Ps 106:6-46; Ezek 20; and Neh 9:6-38.
[7:26] 572 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Moses) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:26] 573 tn Grk “saw them”; the context makes clear that two individuals were involved (v. 27).
[7:26] 574 tn Or “tried to reconcile” (BDAG 964-65 s.v. συναλλάσσω).
[7:27] 575 tn Or “repudiated Moses,” “rejected Moses” (BDAG 126-27 s.v. ἀπωθέω 2).
[7:27] 576 tn Grk “him”; the referent (Moses) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:28] 578 tn The Greek construction anticipates a negative reply which is indicated in the translation by the ‘tag’ at the end, “do you?”
[7:28] sn A quotation from Exod 2:14. Even though a negative reply was expected, the question still frightened Moses enough to flee, because he knew his deed had become known. This understanding is based on the Greek text, not the Hebrew of the original setting. Yet the negative here expresses the fact that Moses did not want to kill the other man. Once again the people have badly misunderstood the situation.
[7:29] 579 tn Grk “At this word,” which could be translated either “when the man said this” or “when Moses heard this.” Since λόγος (logos) refers to the remark made by the Israelite, this translation has followed the first option.
[7:29] 580 tn Or “resident alien.” Traditionally πάροικος (paroiko") has been translated “stranger” or “alien,” but the level of specificity employed with “foreigner” or “resident alien” is now necessary in contemporary English because a “stranger” is a person not acquainted with someone, while an “alien” can suggest science fiction imagery.
[7:30] 581 tn Grk “And after.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and contemporary English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[7:30] 582 tn Or “wilderness.”
[7:30] 583 sn An allusion to Exod 3:2.
[7:32] 584 tn Or “ancestors”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:32] 585 tn Grk “and Isaac,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[7:32] 586 sn A quotation from Exod 3:6. The phrase suggests the God of promise, the God of the nation.
[7:32] 587 tn Or “to investigate,” “to contemplate” (BDAG 522 s.v. κατανοέω 2).
[7:33] 588 sn A quotation from Exod 3:5. The phrase holy ground points to the fact that God is not limited to a particular locale. The place where he is active in revealing himself is a holy place.
[7:34] 589 tn Or “mistreatment.”
[7:34] 590 tn Or “to set them free.”
[7:34] 591 tn Grk “And now.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[7:34] 592 sn A quotation from Exod 3:7-8, 10.
[7:35] 593 sn This same. The reference to “this one” occurs five times in this speech. It is the way the other speeches in Acts refer to Jesus (e.g., Acts 2:23).
[7:35] 594 sn A quotation from Exod 2:14 (see Acts 7:27). God saw Moses very differently than the people of the nation did. The reference to a ruler and a judge suggests that Stephen set up a comparison between Moses and Jesus, but he never finished his speech to make the point. The reader of Acts, however, knowing the other sermons in the book, recognizes that the rejection of Jesus is the counterpoint.
[7:35] 595 tn Or “liberator.” The meaning “liberator” for λυτρωτήν (lutrwthn) is given in L&N 37.129: “a person who liberates or releases others.”
[7:35] 596 tn Or simply “through the angel.” Here the “hand” could be understood as a figure for the person or the power of the angel himself. The remark about the angel appearing fits the first century Jewish view that God appears to no one (John 1:14-18; Gal 3:19; Deut 33:2 LXX).
[7:36] 597 tn Here the context indicates the miraculous nature of the signs mentioned.
[7:36] sn Performing wonders and miraculous signs. Again Moses acted like Jesus. The phrase appears 9 times in Acts (2:19, 22, 43; 4:30; 5:12; 6:8; 7:36; 14:3; 15:12).
[7:36] 598 tn Or simply “in Egypt.” The phrase “the land of” could be omitted as unnecessary or redundant.
[7:36] 599 tn Grk “and at,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[7:37] 601 tn Grk “to the sons of Israel.”
[7:37] 602 sn A quotation from Deut 18:15. This quotation sets up Jesus as the “leader-prophet” like Moses (Acts 3:22; Luke 9:35).
[7:38] 603 tn This term, ἐκκλησία (ekklhsia), is a secular use of the term that came to mean “church” in the epistles. Here a reference to an assembly is all that is intended.
[7:38] 605 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:38] 606 tn Grk “fathers, who.” The relative pronoun was replaced by the pronoun “he” and a new clause introduced by “and” was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style.
[7:38] 607 tn Or “messages.” This is an allusion to the law given to Moses.
[7:38] 608 tc ‡ The first person pronoun ἡμῖν (Jhmin, “to us”) is read by A C D E Ψ 33 1739 Ï lat sy, while the second person pronoun ὑμῖν (Jumin, “to you”) is read by Ì74 א B 36 453 al co. The second person pronoun thus has significantly better external support. As well, ὑμῖν is a harder reading in this context, both because it is surrounded by first person pronouns and because Stephen perhaps “does not wish to disassociate himself from those who received God’s revelation in the past, but only from those who misinterpreted and disobeyed that revelation” (TCGNT 307). At the same time, Stephen does associate himself to some degree with his disobedient ancestors in v. 39, suggesting that the decisive break does not really come until v. 51 (where both his present audience and their ancestors are viewed as rebellious). Thus, both externally and internally ὑμῖν is the preferred reading.
[7:39] 609 tn Grk “whom our.” The continuation of the sentence as a relative clause is awkward in English, so a new sentence was started in the translation at this point.
[7:39] 610 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:39] 611 sn To obey. Again the theme of the speech is noted. The nation disobeyed the way of God and opted for Egypt over the promised land.
[7:39] 612 sn Pushed him aside. This is the second time Moses is “pushed aside” in Stephen’s account (see v. 27).
[7:40] 613 tn Or simply “of Egypt.” The phrase “the land of” could be omitted as unnecessary or redundant.
[7:40] 614 sn A quotation from Exod 32:1, 23. Doubt (we do not know what has happened to him) expresses itself in unfaithful action. The act is in contrast to God’s promise in Exod 23:20.
[7:41] 615 tn Grk “And.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[7:41] 616 tn Grk “In those days.”
[7:41] 617 tn Or “a bull calf” (see Exod 32:4-6). The term μοσχοποιέω (moscopoiew) occurs only in Christian writings according to BDAG 660 s.v.
[7:41] 618 tn Grk “and brought,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[7:41] 619 tn The imperfect verb εὐφραίνοντο (eufrainonto) has been translated ingressively. See BDAG 414-15 s.v. εὐφραίνω 2.
[7:41] 620 tn Or “in what they had done.”
[7:42] 621 sn The expression and gave them over suggests similarities to the judgment on the nations described by Paul in Rom 1:18-32.
[7:42] sn To worship the hosts of heaven. Their action violated Deut 4:19; 17:2-5. See Ps 106:36-43.
[7:42] 623 tn The two terms for sacrifices “semantically reinforce one another and are here combined essentially for emphasis” (L&N 53.20).
[7:42] 624 tn The Greek construction anticipates a negative reply which is indicated in the translation by the ‘tag’ question, “was it?”
[7:43] sn A tabernacle was a tent used to house religious objects or a shrine (i.e., a portable sanctuary).
[7:43] 626 sn Moloch was a Canaanite deity who was believed to be the god of the sky and the sun.
[7:43] 627 tc ‡ Most
[7:43] 628 sn Rephan (῾Ραιφάν, RJaifan) was a pagan deity. The term was a name for Saturn. It was variously spelled in the
[7:43] 629 tn Or “I will make you move.”
[7:43] 630 sn A quotation from Amos 5:25-27. This constituted a prediction of the exile.
[7:44] 631 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:44] sn The tabernacle was the tent used to house the ark of the covenant before the construction of Solomon’s temple. This is where God was believed to reside, yet the people were still unfaithful.
[7:44] 634 tn Grk “the one”; the referent (God) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:44] 635 tn The word “him” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[7:45] 636 tn Grk “And.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[7:45] 637 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:45] 638 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:45] sn Before our ancestors. Stephen has backtracked here to point out how faithful God had been before the constant move to idolatry just noted.
[7:45] 639 tn Grk “In those days.”
[7:46] 640 tn Grk “David, who” The relative pronoun was replaced by the pronoun “he” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style.
[7:46] 642 tn Grk “before,” “in the presence of.”
[7:46] 643 tn The words “that he could” are not in the Greek text, but are implied as the (understood) subject of the infinitive εὑρεῖν (Jeurein). This understands David’s request as asking that he might find the dwelling place. The other possibility would be to supply “that God” as the subject of the infinitive: “and asked that God find a dwelling place.” Unfortunately this problem is complicated by the extremely difficult problem with the Greek text in the following phrase (“house of Jacob” vs. “God of Jacob”).
[7:46] 644 tn On this term see BDAG 929 s.v. σκήνωμα a (Ps 132:5).
[7:46] 645 tc Some
[7:47] 646 sn See 1 Kgs 8:1-21.
[7:48] 647 sn The title the Most High points to God’s majesty (Heb 7:1; Luke 1:32, 35; Acts 16:7).
[7:48] 648 sn The phrase made by human hands is negative in the NT: Mark 14:58; Acts 17:24; Eph 2:11; Heb 9:11, 24. It suggests “man-made” or “impermanent.” The rebuke is like parts of the Hebrew scripture where the rebuke is not of the temple, but for making too much of it (1 Kgs 8:27; Isa 57:15; 1 Chr 6:8; Jer 7:1-34).
[7:49] 649 sn What kind…resting place? The rhetorical questions suggest mere human beings cannot build a house to contain God.
[7:50] 650 tn Or “Did I.” The phrase “my hand” is ultimately a metaphor for God himself.
[7:50] 651 tn The question in Greek introduced with οὐχί (ouci) expects a positive reply.
[7:50] sn A quotation from Isa 66:1-2. If God made the heavens, how can a human building contain him?
[7:51] 652 sn Traditionally, “stiff-necked people.” Now the critique begins in earnest.
[7:51] 653 tn The term ἀπερίτμητοι (aperitmhtoi, “uncircumcised”) is a NT hapax legomenon (occurs only once). See BDAG 101-2 s.v. ἀπερίτμητος and Isa 52:1.
[7:51] 654 tn Or “You stubborn and obstinate people!” (The phrase “uncircumcised hearts and ears” is another figure for stubbornness.)
[7:51] 655 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:52] 656 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[7:52] 657 sn Which…persecute. The rhetorical question suggests they persecuted them all.
[7:52] 658 tn Grk “And they.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[7:52] 659 sn The Righteous One is a reference to Jesus Christ.
[7:52] 660 sn Whose betrayers and murderers you have now become. The harsh critique has OT precedent (1 Kgs 19:10-14; Neh 9:26; 2 Chr 36:16).
[7:53] 661 tn Grk “whose betrayers and murderers you have now become, who received the law” The two consecutive relative clauses make for awkward English style, so the second was begun as a new sentence with the pronoun “You” supplied in place of the Greek relative pronoun to make a complete sentence in English.
[7:53] 662 tn Traditionally, “as ordained by angels,” but εἰς (eis) with the accusative here should be understood as instrumental (a substitute for ἐν [en]); so BDAG 291 s.v. εἰς 9, BDF §206. Thus the phrase literally means “received the law by the decrees [orders] of angels” with the genitive understood as a subjective genitive, that is, the angels gave the decrees.
[7:53] sn Decrees given by angels. According to Jewish traditions in the first century, the law of Moses was mediated through angels. See also the note on “angel” in 7:35.
[7:53] 663 tn The Greek word φυλάσσω (fulassw, traditionally translated “keep”) in this context connotes preservation of and devotion to an object as well as obedience.
[7:53] 664 tn Or “did not obey it.”
[7:54] 665 tn This verb, which also occurs in Acts 5:33, means “cut to the quick” or “deeply infuriated” (BDAG 235 s.v. διαπρίω).
[7:54] 666 tn Or “they gnashed their teeth.” This idiom is a picture of violent rage (BDAG 184 s.v. βρύχω). See also Ps 35:16.
[7:55] 667 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Stephen) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[7:55] 668 tn Grk “being full,” but the participle ὑπάρχων (Juparcwn) has not been translated since it would be redundant in English.
[7:55] 669 tn Grk “looking intently toward heaven, saw.” The participle ἀτενίσας (atenisa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[7:55] 670 sn The picture of Jesus standing (rather than seated) probably indicates his rising to receive his child. By announcing his vision, Stephen thoroughly offended his audience, who believed no one could share God’s place in heaven. The phrase is a variation on Ps 110:1.
[7:56] 671 tn Grk “And he said, ‘Look!’” Because of the length of the Greek sentence and the tendency of contemporary English style to use shorter sentences, καί (kai) has not been translated here; a new sentence is begun instead.
[7:57] 672 sn They covered their ears to avoid hearing what they considered to be blasphemy.
[7:58] 673 tn Grk “And when.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence and the tendency of contemporary English style to use shorter sentences, καί (kai) has not been translated here; a new sentence is begun instead.
[7:58] 674 sn They began to stone him. The irony of the scene is that the people do exactly what the speech complains about in v. 52.
[7:58] 675 tn Or “outer garments.”
[7:58] sn Laid their cloaks. The outer garment, or cloak, was taken off and laid aside to leave the arms free (in this case for throwing stones).
[7:59] 676 tn Grk “And they.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence and the tendency of contemporary English style to use shorter sentences, καί (kai) has not been translated here; a new sentence is begun instead.
[7:60] 677 tn Grk “Then falling to his knees he cried out.” The participle θείς (qeis) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[7:60] 678 sn The remarks Lord Jesus, receive my spirit and Lord, do not hold this sin against them recall statements Jesus made on the cross (Luke 23:34, 46).
[7:60] 679 tn Grk “And when.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence and the tendency of contemporary English style to use shorter sentences, καί (kai) has not been translated here; a new sentence is begun instead.
[7:60] 680 tn The verb κοιμάω (koimaw) literally means “sleep,” but it is often used in the Bible as a euphemism for the death of a believer.
[8:1] 681 tn The term ἀναίρεσις (anairesi") can refer to murder (BDAG 64 s.v.; 2 Macc 5:13; Josephus, Ant. 5.2.12 [5.165]).
[8:1] 683 tn Grk “Now there happened on that day a great persecution.” It is less awkward to say in English “Now on that day a great persecution began.”
[8:1] 684 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[8:1] 685 sn All. Given that the Jerusalem church is still active after this and that the Hellenists are the focus of Acts 6-8, it is possible to argue that only the Hellenistic Christians were forced to scatter.
[8:1] 686 tn Or “countryside.”
[8:2] 687 tn “Some” is not in the Greek text, but is implied.
[8:2] 688 sn Made loud lamentation. For someone who was stoned to death, lamentation was normally not allowed (m. Sanhedrin 6:6). The remark points to an unjust death.
[8:2] 689 tn Or “mourned greatly for him.”
[8:3] 690 tn Or “began to harm [the church] severely.” If the nuance of this verb is “destroy,” then the imperfect verb ἐλυμαίνετο (elumaineto) is best translated as a conative imperfect as in the translation above. If instead the verb is taken to mean “injure severely” (as L&N 20.24), it should be translated in context as an ingressive imperfect (“began to harm the church severely”). Either option does not significantly alter the overall meaning, since it is clear from the stated actions of Saul in the second half of the verse that he intended to destroy or ravage the church.
[8:3] 691 tn The participle σύρων (surwn) has been translated as an finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[8:3] 692 tn BDAG 762 s.v. παραδίδωμι 1.b has “εἰς φυλακήν put in prison Ac 8:3.”
[8:5] 693 tn The word “main” is supplied in the translation to clarify that “Samaria” is not the name of the city (at least in NT times). See both BDAG 912 s.v. Σαμάρεια, and L&N 93.568.
[8:5] sn The main city of Samaria most likely refers to the principal city of Samaria, rebuilt by Herod the Great as Sebaste in honor of Augustus (J. Boehmer, “Studien zur Geographie Palästinas bes. im Neuen Testament,” ZNW 9 [1908]: 216-18; D. Gill and C. Gempf, eds., The Book of Acts in its Graeco-Roman Setting, 272). This is the best option if the article before “city” is taken as original. If the reading without the article is taken as original, then another city may be in view: Gitta, the hometown of Simon Magus according to Justin Martyr (cf. C. K. Barrett, Acts [ICC], 1:402-3; F. F. Bruce, Acts [NICNT], 165).
[8:5] 694 tn The imperfect ἐκήρυσσεν (ekhrussen) has been translated as an ingressive, since this is probably the first time such preaching took place.
[8:5] 695 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[8:5] sn See the note on Christ in 2:31.
[8:6] 696 tn Grk “to what was being said by Philip,” a passive construction that has been changed to active voice in the translation.
[8:6] 697 tn Here the following context indicates the miraculous nature of the signs mentioned. This term appears 13 times in Acts, but only twice more after Acts 8:13 (i.e., 14:3; 15:12).
[8:7] 698 sn The expression unclean spirits refers to evil supernatural spirits which were ceremonially unclean, and which caused the persons possessed by them to be ceremonially unclean.
[8:7] 699 tn Grk “For [in the case of] many who had unclean spirits, they were coming out, crying in a loud voice.”
[8:8] 700 tn Grk “and there came about,” but this is somewhat awkward in English.
[8:8] 701 sn Great joy. The reason for eschatological joy was that such events pointed to God’s decisive deliverance (Luke 7:22-23). Note how the acts of healing extend beyond the Twelve here.
[8:9] 702 tn On the idiom προϋπῆρχεν μαγεύων (prouphrcen mageuwn) meaning “had been practicing magic” see BDAG 889 s.v. προϋπάρχω.
[8:10] 703 tn Grk “all of them”; the referent (the people) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[8:10] 704 tn Or “This man is what is called the Great Power of God.” The translation “what is called the Great Power of God” is given by BDAG 263 s.v. δύναμις 5, but the repetition of the article before καλουμένη μεγάλη (kaloumenh megalh) suggests the translation “the power of God that is called ‘Great.’”
[8:12] 705 sn The kingdom of God is also what Jesus preached: Acts 1:3. The term reappears in 14:22; 19:8; 28:23, 31.
[8:12] 706 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[8:12] 707 tn The imperfect verb ἐβαπτίζοντο (ebaptizonto) has been translated as an ingressive imperfect.
[8:13] 708 tn Or “he kept close company with.”
[8:13] 709 sn He was amazed. Now Simon, the one who amazed others, is himself amazed, showing the superiority of Philip’s connection to God. Christ is better than anything the culture has to offer.
[8:14] 710 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[8:14] 712 sn They sent. The Jerusalem church with the apostles was overseeing the expansion of the church, as the distribution of the Spirit indicates in vv. 15-17.
[8:15] 713 tn Grk “who.” The relative pronoun was replaced by the phrase “these two” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style.
[8:16] 714 tn Grk “For he”; the referent (the Spirit) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[8:16] 716 sn This is a parenthetical note by the author.
[8:17] 717 tn Grk “on them”; the referent (the Samaritans) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[8:17] 718 sn They received the Holy Spirit. It is likely this special distribution of the Spirit took place because a key ethnic boundary was being crossed. Here are some of “those far off” of Acts 2:38-40.
[8:18] 719 tc Most witnesses (Ì45,74 A* C D E Ψ 33 1739 Ï latt sy bo) here read “the Holy Spirit” (τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, to pneuma to {agion), while a few key
[8:19] 720 tn Or “ability”; Grk “authority.”
[8:20] 721 tn Grk “May your silver together with you be sent into destruction.” This is a strong curse. The gifts of God are sovereignly bestowed and cannot be purchased.
[8:21] 723 tn The translation “share or part” is given by L&N 63.13.
[8:21] 724 tn Since the semantic range for λόγος (logos) is so broad, a number of different translations could be given for the prepositional phrase here. Something along the lines of “in this thing” would work well, but is too colloquial for the present translation.
[8:22] 725 tn Or “and implore the Lord.”
[8:22] 726 tn Grk “that if possible the intent of your heart may be forgiven you.” The passive construction is somewhat awkward in contemporary English and has thus been converted to an active construction in the translation.
[8:23] 727 tn Grk “in the gall of bitterness,” an idiom meaning to be particularly envious or resentful of someone. In this case Simon was jealous of the apostles’ power to bestow the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands, and wanted that power for himself. The literal phrase does not convey this to the modern reader, and in fact some modern translations have simply rendered the phrase as involving bitterness, which misses the point of the envy on Simon’s part. See L&N 88.166. The OT images come from Deut 29:17-18 and Isa 58:6.
[8:24] 728 tn Grk “Simon answered and said.”
[8:24] sn Given that Simon does not follow Peter’s call for repentance, many interpreters read this reply as flippant rather than sincere. But the exact nature of Simon’s reply is not entirely clear.
[8:24] 729 tn Grk “may come upon.”
[8:25] 730 tn Grk “after they”; the referents (Peter and John) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[8:25] 731 tn The verb διαμαρτύρομαι (diamarturomai) can mean “warn,” and could be taken to refer specifically to the warning given to Simon in the preceding verses. However, a more general reference is more likely, referring to parting exhortations from Peter and John to the entire group of believers.
[8:25] 732 sn The word of the Lord is a technical expression in OT literature, often referring to a divine prophetic utterance (e.g., Gen 15:1, Isa 1:10, Jonah 1:1). In the NT it occurs 15 times: 3 times as ῥῆμα τοῦ κυρίου (rJhma tou kuriou; Luke 22:61, Acts 11:16, 1 Pet 1:25) and 12 times as λόγος τοῦ κυρίου (logo" tou kuriou; here and in Acts 13:44, 48, 49; 15:35, 36; 16:32; 19:10, 20; 1 Thess 1:8, 4:15; 2 Thess 3:1). As in the OT, this phrase focuses on the prophetic nature and divine origin of what has been said.
[8:25] 733 tn Grk “they were returning to Jerusalem and were proclaiming.” The first imperfect is taken ingressively and the second is viewed iteratively (“proclaiming…as they went”).
[8:25] 734 sn By proclaiming the good news to many Samaritan villages, the apostles now actively share in the broader ministry the Hellenists had started.
[8:25] 735 tn “As they went” is not in the Greek text, but is implied by the imperfect tense (see tn above).
[8:26] 736 tn Or “the angel of the Lord.” See the note on the word “Lord” in 5:19.
[8:26] 737 tn Grk “Lord spoke to Philip, saying.” The redundant participle λέγων (legwn) has not been translated.
[8:26] 738 tn Or “Get up and go about noon.” The phrase κατὰ μεσημβρίαν (kata meshmbrian) can be translated either “about noon” (L&N 67.74) or “toward the south” (L&N 82.4). Since the angel’s command appears to call for immediate action (“Get up”) and would not therefore need a time indicator, a directional reference (“toward the south”) is more likely here.
[8:26] 739 map For the location of Jerusalem see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[8:26] 740 tn Or “wilderness.”
[8:26] 741 tn The words “This is a desert road” are probably best understood as a comment by the author of Acts, but it is possible they form part of the angel’s speech to Philip, in which case the verse would read: “Get up and go south on the road that goes down from Jerusalem to Gaza – the desert road.”
[8:26] sn The concluding note about the road appears to be a parenthetical note by the author.
[8:27] 742 tn Grk “And,” but καί (kai) carries something of a resultative force in this context because what follows describes Philip’s response to the angel’s command.
[8:27] 743 tn Grk “So getting up he went.” The aorist participle ἀναστάς (anastas) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[8:27] 744 tn Grk “And there.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[8:27] 745 tn Grk “and behold.” This expression is used to portray Philip’s encounter with the Ethiopian in a vivid way. In the English translation this vividness is difficult to convey; it is necessary to supply the words “he met.”
[8:27] 746 sn The term eunuch normally referred to a man who had been castrated, but this was not always the case (see Gen 39:1 LXX, where Potiphar is called a eunuch). Such castrated individuals were preferred as court officials in the East, although Judaism opposed the practice. The Mosaic law excluded eunuchs from Israel (Deut 23:1), although God certainly accepted them (Isa 56:3-5; Wis 3:14). This individual was a high official, since he was said to be in charge of all her treasury. He may or may not have been a eunuch physically. He appears to be the first fully Gentile convert to Christianity, since the Samaritans mentioned previously (Acts 8:4-25) were regarded as half-breeds.
[8:27] 747 tn Or “the Candace” (the title of the queen of the Ethiopians). The term Κανδάκης (Kandakh") is much more likely a title rather than a proper name (like Pharaoh, which is a title); see L&N 37.77. A few, however, still take the word to be the name of the queen (L&N 93.209). BDAG 507 s.v. Κανδάκη, treats the term as a title and lists classical usage by Strabo (Geography 17.1.54) and others.
[8:27] sn Candace was the title of the queen of the Ethiopians. Ethiopia refers to the kingdom of Nubia in the northern Sudan, whose capital was Meroe (not to be confused with Abyssinia, which was later called Ethiopia and converted to Christianity in the 4th century
[8:27] 748 tn Grk “who was over all her treasury, who.” The two consecutive relative clauses make for awkward English style, so the second was begun as a new sentence with the pronoun “he” supplied in place of the Greek relative pronoun to make a complete sentence in English.
[8:27] 749 sn Since this man had come to Jerusalem to worship, he may have been a proselyte to Judaism. This event is a precursor to Acts 10.
[8:28] 750 tn Grk “and was sitting.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[8:28] 751 tn Grk “and was reading.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[8:28] sn The fact that this man was reading from a scroll (an expensive item in the first century) indicates his connection to a wealthy house.
[8:30] 752 tn The participle προσδραμών (prosdramwn) is regarded as attendant circumstance.
[8:30] 753 tn The words “to it” are not in the Greek text but are implied.
[8:30] 754 tn Grk “heard him”; the referent (the man) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[8:30] 755 tn Grk “and he.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun.
[8:30] 756 tn Grk “he said”; but since what follows is a question, it is better English style to translate the introduction to the question “he asked him.”
[8:31] 757 tn Grk “He”; the referent (the man) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[8:31] 758 tn Grk “How am I able, unless…” The translation is based on the force of the conjunction γάρ (gar) in this context. The translation “How in the world can I?” is given in BDAG 189 s.v. γάρ 1.f.
[8:32] 759 tn Grk “he”; the referent (the man) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[8:32] 760 tn Grk “does.” The present tense here was translated as a past tense to maintain consistency with the first line of the quotation (“he was led like a sheep to slaughter”), which has an aorist passive verb normally translated as a past tense in English.
[8:33] 761 tc ‡ Most later
[8:33] 762 tn Or “justice was denied him”; Grk “his justice was taken away.”
[8:33] 763 tn Or “family; or “origin.” The meaning of γενεά (genea) in the quotation is uncertain; BDAG 192 s.v. γενεά 4 suggests “family history.”
[8:33] sn The rhetorical question suggests the insensitivity of this generation for its act against God’s servant, who was slain unjustly as he was silent.
[8:33] 764 tn Grk “is taken away.” The present tense here was translated as a past tense to maintain consistency with the rest of the quotation.
[8:33] 765 sn A quotation from Isa 53:7-8.
[8:34] 766 tn Grk “answered and said.” The redundant participle ἀποκριθείς (apokriqei") has not been translated.
[8:34] 767 tn Grk “I beg you,” “I ask you.”
[8:34] 768 sn About himself, or about someone else? It is likely in 1st century Judaism this would have been understood as either Israel or Isaiah.
[8:35] 769 tn Grk “opening his mouth” (a Semitic idiom for beginning to speak in a somewhat formal manner). The participle ἀνοίξας (anoixa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[8:35] 770 sn Beginning with this scripture. The discussion likely included many of the scriptures Acts has already noted for the reader in earlier speeches. At the least, readers of Acts would know what other scriptures might be meant.
[8:36] 771 tn Or “What prevents me.” The rhetorical question means, “I should get baptized, right?”
[8:37] 772 tc A few later
[8:38] 773 tn Grk “and they both went down into the water, both Philip and the eunuch.” Since this is somewhat redundant in English, it was simplified to “and both Philip and the eunuch went down into the water.”
[8:38] 774 sn Philip baptized. Again, someone beyond the Twelve has ministered an ordinance of faith.
[8:39] 775 tn BDAG 189 s.v. γάρ 2 indicates that under certain circumstances γάρ (gar) has the same meaning as δέ (de).
[8:39] 776 sn Note that the response to the gospel is rejoicing (joy, cf. Acts 11:23; 13:48).
[8:40] 778 sn Azotus was a city on the coast of southern Palestine, known as Ashdod in OT times.
[8:40] 779 tn The words “the area” are not in the Greek text but are implied.
[8:40] 780 tn Or “he preached the gospel.”
[8:40] 782 sn Caesarea was a city on the coast of Palestine south of Mount Carmel (not Caesarea Philippi). See the note on Caesarea in Acts 10:1.
[8:40] map For location see Map2 C1; Map4 B3; Map5 F2; Map7 A1; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[9:1] 783 tn Or “Saul, making dire threats.”
[9:1] 784 tn The expression “breathing out threats and murder” is an idiomatic expression for “making threats to murder” (see L&N 33.293). Although the two terms “threats” and “murder” are syntactically coordinate, the second is semantically subordinate to the first. In other words, the content of the threats is to murder the disciples.
[9:2] 785 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[9:2] 786 sn The expression “the way” in ancient religious literature refers at times to “the whole way of life fr. a moral and spiritual viewpoint” (BDAG 692 s.v. ὁδός 3.c), and it has been so used of Christianity and its teachings in the book of Acts (see also 19:9, 23; 22:4; 24:14, 22). It is a variation of Judaism’s idea of two ways, the true and the false, where “the Way” is the true one (1 En. 91:18; 2 En. 30:15).
[9:2] 787 tn Grk “bring them bound”; the translation “bring someone as prisoner” for δεδεμένον ἄγειν τινά (dedemenon agein tina) is given by BDAG 221 s.v. δέω 1.b.
[9:2] 788 sn From Damascus to Jerusalem was a six-day journey. Christianity had now expanded into Syria.
[9:2] map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[9:3] 789 tn Grk “As he was going along, it happened that when he was approaching.” The phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[9:3] 790 tn Or “shone” (BDAG 799 s.v. περιαστράπτω). The light was more brilliant than the sun according to Acts 26:13.
[9:4] 791 tn Grk “and he.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun.
[9:4] 792 tn The double vocative suggests emotion.
[9:4] 793 sn Persecuting me. To persecute the church is to persecute Jesus.
[9:6] 795 tn Literally a passive construction, “it will be told to you.” This has been converted to another form of passive construction in the translation.
[9:7] 796 tn The Greek term here is ἀνήρ (anhr), which is used only rarely in a generic sense of both men and women. In the historical setting here, Paul’s traveling companions were almost certainly all males.
[9:7] 797 tn That is, unable to speak because of fear or amazement. See BDAG 335 s.v. ἐνεός.
[9:7] 798 sn This is a parenthetical note by the author. Acts 22:9 appears to indicate that they saw the light but did not hear a voice. They were “witnesses” that something happened.
[9:8] 799 tn Grk “his eyes being open,” a genitive absolute construction that has been translated as a concessive adverbial participle.
[9:8] 800 sn He could see nothing. This sign of blindness, which was temporary until v. 18, is like the sign of deafness experienced by Zechariah in Luke 1. It allowed some time for Saul (Paul) to reflect on what had happened without distractions.
[9:8] 801 tn Grk “they”; the referents (Saul’s companions) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[9:9] 802 tn Grk “And for.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[9:9] 803 tn The word “anything” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader. The fasting might indicate an initial realization of Luke 5:33-39. Fasting was usually accompanied by reflective thought.
[9:10] 804 tn Grk “And the.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[9:10] 805 sn The Lord is directing all the events leading to the expansion of the gospel as he works on both sides of the meeting between Paul and Ananias. “The Lord” here refers to Jesus (see v. 17).
[9:10] 806 tn Grk “behold, I,” but this construction often means “here is/there is” (cf. BDAG 468 s.v. ἰδού 2).
[9:11] 807 sn The noting of the detail of the locale, ironically called ‘Straight’ Street, shows how directive and specific the Lord was.
[9:12] 808 tc ‡ The words ἐν ὀράματι (en oramati, “in a vision”) are not found in some of the earliest and best
[9:12] sn Apparently while in Damascus Paul had a subsequent vision in the midst of his blindness, fulfilling the prediction in 9:6.
[9:13] 809 sn Ananias replied. Past events might have suggested to Ananias that this was not good counsel, but like Peter in Acts 10, Ananias’ intuitions were wrong.
[9:13] 810 tn The word “people” is not in the Greek text, but is implied.
[9:14] 812 sn The expression “those who call on your name” is a frequent description of believers (Acts 2:21; 1 Cor 1:2; Rom 10:13).
[9:15] 814 tn Grk “the sons of Israel.” In Acts, Paul is a minister to all nations, including Israel (Rom 1:16-17).
[9:16] 815 tn Or “because of my name.” BDAG 1031 s.v. ὑπέρ 2 lists Acts 9:16 as an example of ὑπέρ (Juper) used to indicate “the moving cause or reason, because of, for the sake of, for.”
[9:17] 816 tn Grk “and placing his hands on Saul, he said.” The participle ἐπιθείς (epiqei") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. For the same reason καί (kai) has not been translated before the participle.
[9:17] 817 tn Grk “on him”; the referent (Saul) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[9:17] 818 tn Grk “on the road in which you came,” but the relative clause makes for awkward English style, so it was translated as a temporal clause (“as you came here”).
[9:17] 819 sn Be filled with the Holy Spirit. Here someone who is not an apostle (Ananias) commissions another person with the Spirit.
[9:18] 820 tn Grk “And immediately.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[9:18] 821 tn The comparison to “scales” suggests a crusty covering which peeled away (cf. BDAG 592 s.v. λεπίς 2).
[9:18] 822 tn Grk “and he.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence was started, with “and” placed before the final element of the previous clause as required by English style.
[9:19] 823 tn Grk “It happened that for several days.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[9:20] 824 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[9:20] 825 tn The ὅτι (Joti) is understood to introduce direct (“This man is the Son of God”) rather than indirect discourse (“that this man is the Son of God”) because the pronoun οὗτος (Jouto") combined with the present tense verb ἐστιν (estin) suggests the contents of what was proclaimed are a direct (albeit summarized) quotation.
[9:20] sn This is the only use of the title Son of God in Acts. The book prefers to allow a variety of descriptions to present Jesus.
[9:21] 826 tn Grk “And all.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[9:21] 827 tn The Greek interrogative particle used in this verse (οὐχ, ouc) expects a positive reply. They all knew about Saul’s persecutions.
[9:21] 828 tn Normally, “destroying,” but compare 4 Macc 4:23; 11:4 and MM 529 s.v. πορθέω for examples from Koine papyri. See also BDAG 853 s.v. πορθέω.
[9:21] 829 tn Grk “bring them bound”; the translation “bring someone as prisoner” for δεδεμένον ἄγειν τινά (dedemenon agein tina) is given by BDAG 221 s.v. δέω 1.b.
[9:22] 830 tn Grk “was becoming stronger,” but this could be understood in a physical sense, while the text refers to Saul’s growing ability to demonstrate to fellow Jews that Jesus was the Messiah. The translation “to become capable” for ἐνδυναμόω (endunamow) is given in L&N 74.7, with this specific verse as an example.
[9:22] 831 tn Or “was confounding.” For the translation “to cause consternation” for συγχέω (suncew) see L&N 25.221.
[9:22] 832 tn Or “by showing for certain.”
[9:22] 833 tn Grk “that this one”; the referent (Jesus) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[9:22] 834 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.” Note again the variation in the titles used.
[9:22] sn See the note on Christ in 2:31.
[9:23] 835 sn Fitting the pattern emphasized earlier with Stephen and his speech in Acts 7, some Jews plotted to kill God’s messenger (cf. Luke 11:53-54).
[9:24] 836 tn The words “against him” are implied, as suggested by L&N 30.71.
[9:24] 837 tn Or “guarding.” This is a negative term in Luke-Acts (Luke 6:7; 14:1; 20:20).
[9:24] 838 tn The word πύλη (pulh) may refer to a house door or gate, or to the large gates used in a palace, temple, or city wall. Here the context clearly indicates a reference to the latter, so the translation “city gates” is used.
[9:25] 839 tn The opening in the wall is not specifically mentioned here, but the parallel account in 2 Cor 11:33 mentions a “window” or “opening” (θυρίς, quris) in the city wall through which Paul was lowered. One alternative to introducing mention of the opening is to translate Acts 9:25 “they let him down over the wall,” as suggested in L&N 7.61. This option is not employed by many translations, however, because for the English reader it creates an (apparent) contradiction between Acts 9:25 and 2 Cor 11:33. In reality the account here is simply more general, omitting the detail about the window.
[9:25] 840 tn On the term for “basket” used here, see BDAG 940 s.v. σπυρίς.
[9:26] 841 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[9:26] 843 tn The participle πιστεύοντες (pisteuonte") has been translated as a causal adverbial participle.
[9:27] 844 tn Grk “taking Saul, brought him.” The participle ἐπιλαβόμενος (epilabomeno") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[9:27] 845 tn Grk “him”; the referent (Saul) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[9:27] 846 tn Grk “and brought,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[9:27] 847 tn Grk “and that,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[9:27] 848 tn On this verb which is used 7 times in Acts, see BDAG 782 s.v. παρρησιάζομαι 1. See also v. 28.
[9:28] 849 tn Grk “he was with them going in and going out in Jerusalem.” The expression “going in and going out” is probably best taken as an idiom for association without hindrance. Some modern translations (NASB, NIV) translate the phrase “moving about freely in Jerusalem,” although the NRSV retains the literal “he went in and out among them in Jerusalem.”
[9:29] 850 tn Or “arguing.” BDAG 954 s.v. συζητέω 2 gives “dispute, debate, argue…τινί ‘w. someone’” for συνεζήτει (sunezhtei).
[9:29] 851 tn Grk “the Hellenists,” but this descriptive term is largely unknown to the modern English reader. The translation “Greek-speaking Jews” attempts to convey something of who these were, but it was more than a matter of language spoken; it involved a degree of adoption of Greek culture as well.
[9:30] 852 sn Caesarea was a city on the coast of Palestine, south of Mount Carmel (not Caesarea Philippi). See the note on Caesarea in Acts 10:1.
[9:30] map For location see Map2 C1; Map4 B3; Map5 F2; Map7 A1; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[9:31] 853 tn Or “Therefore.” This verse is another summary text in Acts (cf. 2:41-47; 4:32-37; 5:12-16; 6:7).
[9:31] 854 tn Grk “and Galilee,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[9:31] 856 tn Or “Built up.” The participle οἰκοδομουμένη (oikodomoumenh) has been translated as a participle of result related to εἶχεν (eicen). It could also be understood as adverbial to ἐπληθύνετο (eplhquneto): “Then the church throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria experienced peace. Strengthened and living in the fear of the Lord and in the encouragement of the Holy Spirit, it increased in numbers.” Although some scholars do not regard the participle of result as a legitimate category, it is actually fairly common (see ExSyn 637-39).
[9:31] 857 tn Grk “And living.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[9:31] 858 tn Grk “it”; the referent (the church) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[9:32] 859 tn Grk “Now it happened that.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[9:32] 860 tn Grk “As Peter was going through all [the places],” which is somewhat awkward in English. The meaning is best expressed by a phrase like “going around from place to place” or “traveling around from place to place.”
[9:32] 861 sn Lydda was a city northwest of Jerusalem on the way to Joppa. It was about 10.5 miles (17 km) southeast of Joppa.
[9:33] 862 tn Since the participle κατακείμενον (katakeimenon), an adjectival participle modifying Αἰνέαν (Ainean), has been translated into English as a relative clause (“who had been confined to a mattress”), it would be awkward to follow with a second relative clause (Grk “who was paralyzed”). Furthermore, the relative pronoun here has virtually a causal force, giving the reason for confinement to the mattress, so it is best translated “because.”
[9:34] 863 tn Grk “And Peter.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[9:34] 864 tc ‡ Several variants occur at this juncture. Some of the earliest and best witnesses (Ì74 א B* C Ψ 33vid Didpt) read “Jesus Christ” (᾿Ιησοῦς Χριστός, Ihsou" Cristo"); others ([A] 36 1175 it) have “the Lord Jesus Christ” (ὁ κύριος ᾿Ιησοῦς Χριστός, Jo kurio" Ihsou" Cristo"); a few read simply ὁ Χριστός (614 1241 1505); the majority of
[9:34] tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[9:34] 865 tn The translation “make your own bed” for στρῶσον σεαυτῷ (strwson seautw) is given by BDAG 949 s.v. στρωννύω 1. Naturally this involves some adaptation, since a pallet or mat would not be ‘made up’ in the sense that a modern bed would be. The idea may be closer to “straighten” or “rearrange,” and the NIV’s “take care of your mat” attempts to reflect this, although this too probably conveys a slightly different idea to the modern English reader.
[9:35] 866 tn Grk “And all.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[9:35] 867 sn Lydda was a city northwest of Jerusalem on the way to Joppa.
[9:35] 868 sn Sharon refers to the plain of Sharon, a region along the coast of Palestine.
[9:35] 869 tn Repetition of the pronoun “they” as subject of ἐπέστρεψαν (epestreyan) is not strictly necessary in English, but emphasizes slightly the resultative nature of the final clause: They turned to the Lord as a result of seeing Aeneas after he was healed.
[9:35] 870 sn They turned. To “turn” is a good summary term for the response to the gospel.
[9:36] 871 sn Joppa was a seaport on the Philistine coast, in the same location as modern Jaffa. “Though Joppa never became a major seaport, it was of some importance as a logistical base and an outlet to the Mediterranean” (A. F. Rainey, ISBE 2:1118-19).
[9:36] 872 tn Grk “which being translated is called.” In English this would normally be expressed “which is translated as” or “which in translation means.” The second option is given by L&N 33.145.
[9:36] 873 sn This is a parenthetical note by the author. Dorcas is the Greek translation of the Aramaic name Tabitha. Dorcas in Greek means “gazelle” or “deer.”
[9:36] 874 tn Or “and helping the poor.” Grk “She was full of good deeds and acts of charity which she was continually doing.” Since it is somewhat redundant in English to say “she was full of good deeds…which she was continually doing,” the translation has been simplified to “she was continually doing good deeds and acts of charity.” The imperfect verb ἐποίει (epoiei) has been translated as a progressive imperfect (“was continually doing”).
[9:37] 875 tn Grk “It happened that in those days.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[9:37] 876 tn Grk “becoming sick, she died.” The participle ἀσθενήσασαν (asqenhsasan) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[9:37] 877 tn The participle λούσαντες (lousante") is taken temporally.
[9:37] 878 tn Grk “washed her,” but the reference is to her corpse.
[9:38] 879 sn Lydda was a city northwest of Jerusalem on the way to Joppa.
[9:38] 880 tn Grk “Do not delay to come to us.” It is somewhat smoother to say in English, “Come to us without delay.”
[9:39] 881 tn Grk “who.” The relative clause makes for awkward English style here, so the following clause was made coordinate with the conjunction “and” supplied in place of the Greek relative pronoun.
[9:39] 882 tn The participle παραγενόμενον (paragenomenon) is taken temporally.
[9:39] 883 tn Grk “and all.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun.
[9:39] 884 tn The word “him” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[9:39] 885 tn Or “shirts” (a long garment worn under the cloak next to the skin). The name for this garment (χιτών, citwn) presents some difficulty in translation. Most modern readers would not understand what a ‘tunic’ was any more than they would be familiar with a ‘chiton.’ On the other hand attempts to find a modern equivalent are also a problem: “shirt” conveys the idea of a much shorter garment that covers only the upper body, and “undergarment” (given the styles of modern underwear) is more misleading still. “Tunic” was therefore employed, but with a note to explain its nature.
[9:39] 886 tn Grk “and garments,” referring here to other types of clothing besides the tunics just mentioned.
[9:39] 887 tn The verb ἐποίει (epoiei) has been translated as a customary imperfect.
[9:40] 888 tn Grk “Peter, sending them all outside, knelt down.” The participle ἐκβαλών (ekbalwn) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[9:40] 889 tn Grk “and kneeling down,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more. Instead the “and” is placed before the verb προσηύξατο (proshuxato, “and prayed”). The participle θείς (qeis) is taken as a participle of attendant circumstance.
[9:40] 890 tn Grk “and turning.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun.
[9:40] 891 sn She sat up. This event is told much like Luke 8:49-56 and Mark 5:35-43. Peter’s ministry mirrored that of Jesus.
[9:41] 892 tn Grk “Giving her his hand, he helped her.” The participle δούς (dous) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[9:41] 893 tn Grk “Then calling the saints…he presented her.” The participle φωνήσας (fwnhsa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style; it could also be taken temporally (“After he called”).
[9:42] 894 tn Or “known all over.” BDAG 511 s.v. κατά A.1.c. has “became known throughout all Joppa” for γνωστὸν γενέσθαι καθ᾿ ὅλης ᾿Ιόππης (gnwston genesqai kaq’ {olh" Iopph").
[9:42] 895 sn This became known…many believed in the Lord. This is a “sign” miracle that pictures how the Lord can give life.
[9:43] 896 tn Grk “So it happened that.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[9:43] 897 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Peter) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[9:43] 898 tn Grk “with a certain Simon.”
[9:43] 899 tn Or “with a certain Simon Berseus.” Although most modern English translations treat βυρσεῖ (bursei) as Simon’s profession (“Simon the tanner”), it is possible that the word is actually Simon’s surname (“Simon Berseus” or “Simon Tanner”). BDAG 185 s.v. βυρσεύς regards it as a surname. See also MM 118.
[10:1] 900 sn Caesarea was a city on the coast of Palestine south of Mount Carmel (not Caesarea Philippi). It was known as “Caesarea by the sea” (BDAG 499 s.v. Καισάρεια 2). Largely Gentile, it was a center of Roman administration and the location of many of Herod the Great’s building projects (Josephus, Ant. 15.9.6 [15.331-341]).
[10:1] map For location see Map2 C1; Map4 B3; Map5 F2; Map7 A1; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[10:1] 901 sn A centurion was a noncommissioned officer in the Roman army or one of the auxiliary territorial armies, commanding a centuria of (nominally) 100 men. The responsibilities of centurions were broadly similar to modern junior officers, but there was a wide gap in social status between them and officers, and relatively few were promoted beyond the rank of senior centurion. The Roman troops stationed in Judea were auxiliaries, who would normally be rewarded with Roman citizenship after 25 years of service. Some of the centurions may have served originally in the Roman legions (regular army) and thus gained their citizenship at enlistment. Others may have inherited it, like Paul.
[10:1] 902 sn A cohort was a Roman military unit of about 600 soldiers, one-tenth of a legion (BDAG 936 s.v. σπεῖρα). The Italian Cohort has been identified as cohors II Italica which is known to have been stationed in Syria in
[10:2] 903 tn In the Greek text this represents a continuation of the previous sentence. Because of the tendency of contemporary English to use shorter sentences, a new sentence was begun here in the translation.
[10:2] 904 sn The description of Cornelius as a devout, God-fearing man probably means that he belonged to the category called “God-fearers,” Gentiles who worshiped the God of Israel and in many cases kept the Mosaic law, but did not take the final step of circumcision necessary to become a proselyte to Judaism. See further K. G. Kuhn, TDNT 6:732-34, 43-44, and Sir 11:17; 27:11; 39:27.
[10:2] 905 tn Or “gave many gifts to the poor.” This was known as “giving alms,” or acts of mercy (Sir 7:10; BDAG 315-16 s.v. ἐλεημοσύνη).
[10:3] 906 tn Grk “at about the ninth hour of the day.” This would be the time for afternoon prayer.
[10:3] 907 tn Or “the angel of God.” Linguistically, “angel of God” is the same in both testaments (and thus, he is either “an angel of God” or “the angel of God” in both testaments). For arguments and implications, see ExSyn 252; M. J. Davidson, “Angels,” DJG, 9; W. G. MacDonald argues for “an angel” in both testaments: “Christology and ‘The Angel of the Lord’,” Current Issues in Biblical and Patristic Interpretation, 324-35.
[10:3] 908 tn The participles εἰσελθόντα (eiselqonta) and εἰπόντα (eiponta) are accusative, and thus best taken as adjectival participles modifying ἄγγελον (angelon): “an angel who came in and said.”
[10:4] 909 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Cornelius) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[10:4] 910 tn Grk “said,” but in response to the angel’s address, “replied” is better English style.
[10:4] 911 tn Grk “he”; the referent (the angel) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[10:4] 912 tn Or “your gifts to the needy.”
[10:4] 913 sn The language used in the expression gone up as a memorial before God parallels what one would say of acceptable sacrifices (Ps 141:2; Sir 35:6; 50:16).
[10:5] 914 tn Grk “And now.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[10:5] 915 sn Joppa was a seaport on the Philistine coast, in the same location as modern Jaffa.
[10:5] 916 tn Grk “a certain Simon.”
[10:6] 917 tn Or “with a certain Simon Berseus.” Although most modern English translations treat βυρσεῖ (bursei) as Simon’s profession (“Simon the tanner”), it is possible that the word is actually Simon’s surname (“Simon Berseus” or “Simon Tanner”). BDAG 185 s.v. βυρσεύς regards it as a surname. See also MM 118.
[10:7] 918 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Cornelius) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[10:7] 919 tn Or “domestic servants.” The Greek word here is οἰκέτης (oiketh"), which technically refers to a member of the household, but usually means a household servant (slave) or personal servant rather than a field laborer.
[10:7] 920 tn The meaning of the genitive participle προσκαρτερούντων (proskarterountwn) could either be “a soldier from the ranks of those who served him” (referring to his entire command) or “a soldier from among his personal staff” (referring to a group of soldiers who were his personal attendants). The translation “from among those who served him” is general enough to cover either possibility.
[10:9] 921 tn Grk “about the sixth hour.”
[10:9] 922 tn The participles ὁδοιπορούντων (Jodoiporountwn, “while they were on their way”) and ἐγγιζόντων (engizontwn, “approaching”) have been translated as temporal participles.
[10:9] 923 sn Went up on the roof. Most of the roofs in the NT were flat roofs made of pounded dirt, sometimes mixed with lime or stones, supported by heavy wooden beams. They generally had an easy means of access, either a sturdy wooden ladder or stone stairway, sometimes on the outside of the house.
[10:10] 924 tn The traditional translation, “he fell into a trance,” is somewhat idiomatic; it is based on the textual variant ἐπέπεσεν (epepesen, “he fell”) found in the Byzantine text but almost certainly not original.
[10:11] 925 tn Grk “And he.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun.
[10:11] 926 tn Or “the sky” (the same Greek word means both “heaven” and “sky”).
[10:11] 927 tn On the heavens “opening,” see Matt 3:16; Luke 3:21; Rev 19:11 (cf. BDAG 84 s.v. ἀνοίγω 2). This is the language of a vision or a revelatory act of God.
[10:11] 928 tn Or “a large linen cloth” (the term was used for the sail of a ship; BDAG 693 s.v. ὀθόνη).
[10:11] 929 tn Or “coming down.”
[10:11] 930 tn Or “to the ground.”
[10:12] 931 tn Grk “in which.” The relative pronoun was replaced by the pronoun “it,” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style.
[10:12] 932 tn Or “snakes.” Grk “creeping things.” According to L&N 4.51, in most biblical contexts the term (due to the influence of Hebrew classifications such as Gen 1:25-26, 30) included small four-footed animals like rats, mice, frogs, toads, salamanders, and lizards. In this context, however, where “creeping things” are contrasted with “four-footed animals,” the English word “reptiles,” which primarily but not exclusively designates snakes, is probably more appropriate. See also Gen 6:20, as well as the law making such creatures unclean food in Lev 11:2-47.
[10:12] 933 tn Grk “the birds of the sky” or “the birds of the heaven”; the Greek word οὐρανός (ouranos) may be translated either “sky” or “heaven,” depending on the context. The idiomatic expression “birds of the sky” refers to wild birds as opposed to domesticated fowl (cf. BDAG 809 s.v. πετεινόν).
[10:13] 934 tn Grk “And there came.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[10:13] 935 tn Grk “a voice to him”; the word “said” is not in the Greek text but is implied.
[10:13] 936 tn Or “kill.” Traditionally θῦσον (quson) is translated “kill,” but in the case of animals intended for food, “slaughter” is more appropriate.
[10:14] 937 tn Possibly there is a subtle distinction in meaning between κοινός (koinos) and ἀκάθαρτος (akaqarto") here, but according to L&N 53.39 it is difficult to determine precise differences in meaning based on existing contexts.
[10:14] sn Peter insisted he would not violate the law by eating anything defiled and ritually unclean. These food laws were one of the practices that distinguished Jews from their Gentile neighbors. The practice made table fellowship with Gentiles awkward. For an example of Jewish attitudes to this, see Dan 1:8-16; 1 Macc 1:41-64; Letter of Aristeas 142; Tacitus, History 5.5.
[10:15] 938 tn Grk “And the voice.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[10:15] 940 sn For the significance of this vision see Mark 7:14-23; Rom 14:14; Eph 2:11-22. God directed this change in practice.
[10:16] 941 tn Or “into the sky” (the same Greek word means both “heaven” and “sky”).
[10:17] 942 tn Or “was greatly confused over.” The term means to be perplexed or at a loss (BDAG 235 s.v. διαπορέω).
[10:17] 943 tn Grk “having learned.” The participle διερωτήσαντες (dierwthsante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[10:17] 944 tn BDAG 418 s.v. ἐφίστημι 1 has “ἐπί τι approach or stand by someth. (Sir 41:24) Ac 10:17.”
[10:17] sn As Peter puzzled over the meaning of the vision, the messengers from Cornelius approached the gate. God’s direction here had a sense of explanatory timing.
[10:18] 945 tn Grk “and.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun by supplying the pronoun “they” as the subject of the following verb.
[10:18] 946 tn Grk “Simon, the one called Peter.” This qualification was necessary because the owner of the house was also named Simon (Acts 9:43).
[10:19] 947 tn The translation “think seriously about” for διενθυμέομαι (dienqumeomai) is given in L&N 30.2. Peter was “pondering” the vision (BDAG 244 s.v.).
[10:20] 948 tn Grk “But getting up, go down.” The participle ἀναστάς (anastas) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[10:20] 949 tn The term means “without doubting” or “without deliberation.” It is a term of conscience and discernment. In effect, Peter is to listen to them rather than hesitate (BDAG 231 s.v. διακρίνω 6).
[10:21] 950 tn Grk “Peter going down to the men, said.” The participle καταβάς (katabas) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[10:21] 951 tn Grk “Behold, it is I whom you seek,” or “Behold, I am the one you seek.” “Here I am” is used to translate ἰδοὺ ἐγώ εἰμι (idou egw eimi).
[10:22] 952 sn See the note on the word centurion in 10:1.
[10:22] 954 tn The phrase τοῦ ἔθνους τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων (tou eqnou" twn Ioudaiwn) is virtually a technical term for the Jewish nation (1 Macc 10:25; 11:30, 33; Josephus, Ant. 14.10.22 [14.248]). “All the Jewish people,” while another possible translation of the Greek phrase, does not convey the technical sense of a reference to the nation in English.
[10:22] sn The long introduction of Cornelius by his messengers is an attempt to commend this Gentile to his Jewish counterpart, which would normally be important to do in the culture of the time.
[10:22] 955 tn Grk “hear words.”
[10:23] 956 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Peter) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[10:23] sn When Peter entertained them as guests, he performed a culturally significant act denoting acceptance.
[10:23] 957 tn Or “went forth.”
[10:23] 958 sn Some of the brothers from Joppa. As v. 45 makes clear, there were Jewish Christians in this group of witnesses.
[10:24] 959 tn Grk “On the next day,” but since this phrase has already occurred in v. 23, it would be redundant in English to use it again here.
[10:24] 960 sn Caesarea was a city on the coast of Palestine south of Mount Carmel (not Caesarea Philippi).
[10:24] map For location see Map2 C1; Map4 B3; Map5 F2; Map7 A1; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[10:24] 961 tn Normally προσδοκάω (prosdokaw) means “to wait with apprehension or anxiety for something,” often with the implication of impending danger or trouble (L&N 25.228), but in this context the anxiety Cornelius would have felt came from the importance of the forthcoming message as announced by the angel.
[10:25] 962 tn Grk “So it happened that when.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[10:25] 963 tn Grk “meeting him.” The participle συναντήσας (sunanthsa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[10:25] 964 tn Grk “falling at his feet, worshiped.” The participle πεσών (peswn) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[10:25] 965 sn When Cornelius worshiped Peter, it showed his piety and his respect for Peter, but it was an act based on ignorance, as Peter’s remark in v. 26 indicates.
[10:26] 966 tn BDAG 271 s.v. ἐγείρω 3 has “raise, help to rise….Stretched out Ac 10:26.”
[10:26] 967 tn Although it is certainly true that Peter was a “man,” here ἄνθρωπος (anqrwpo") has been translated as “mere mortal” because the emphasis in context is not on Peter’s maleness, but his humanity. Contrary to what Cornelius thought, Peter was not a god or an angelic being, but a mere mortal.
[10:27] 968 tn Grk “And he”; the referent (Peter) has been specified in the translation for clarity. Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[10:27] 969 tn Or “many people assembled.”
[10:28] 970 tn Here ὡς (Jws) is used like ὅτι (Joti) to introduce indirect discourse (cf. BDAG 1105 s.v. ὡς 5).
[10:28] 971 tn This term is used of wanton or callously lawless acts (BDAG 24 s.v. ἀθέμιτος).
[10:28] 972 tn Grk “a Jewish man” (ἀνδρὶ ᾿Ιουδαίῳ, andri Ioudaiw).
[10:28] 973 tn Grk “a foreigner,” but in this context, “a non-Jew,” that is, a Gentile. This term speaks of intimate association (BDAG 556 s.v. κολλάω 2.b.α). On this Jewish view, see John 18:28, where a visit to a Gentile residence makes a Jewish person unclean.
[10:28] 974 tn This is a generic use of ἄνθρωπος (anqrwpo").
[10:28] 975 tn Possibly there is a subtle distinction in meaning between κοινός (koinos) and ἀκάθαρτος (akaqartos) here, but according to L&N 53.39 it is difficult to determine precise differences in meaning based on existing contexts.
[10:28] sn God has shown me…unclean. Peter sees the significance of his vision as not about food, but about open fellowship between Jewish Christians and Gentiles.
[10:29] 976 tn Grk “Therefore when I was sent for.” The passive participle μεταπεμφθείς (metapemfqei") has been taken temporally and converted to an active construction which is less awkward in English.
[10:29] 977 tn Grk “ask for what reason.”
[10:30] 978 tn Grk “And Cornelius.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[10:30] 980 tn Grk “at the ninth hour.” Again, this is the hour of afternoon prayer.
[10:30] 981 tn Grk “and behold.” The interjection ἰδού (idou) is difficult at times to translate into English. Here it has been translated as “suddenly” to convey the force of Cornelius’ account of the angel’s appearance.
[10:31] 982 tn Or “your gifts to the needy.”
[10:31] 983 sn This statement is a paraphrase rather than an exact quotation of Acts 10:4.
[10:32] 984 tn Or “with a certain Simon Berseus.” Although most modern English translations treat βυρσεῖ (bursei) as Simon’s profession (“Simon the tanner”), it is possible that the word is actually Simon’s surname (“Simon Berseus” or “Simon Tanner”). BDAG 185 s.v. βυρσεύς regards it as a surname.
[10:33] 985 tn Grk “you have done well by coming.” The idiom καλῶς ποιεῖν (kalw" poiein) is translated “be kind enough to do someth.” by BDAG 505-6 s.v. καλῶς 4.a. The participle παραγενόμενος (paragenomeno") has been translated as an English infinitive due to the nature of the English idiom (“kind enough to” + infinitive).
[10:33] 986 tn The translation “we are here in the presence of God” for ἐνώπιον τοῦ θεοῦ πάρεσμεν (enwpion tou qeou paresmen) is given by BDAG 773 s.v. πάρειμι 1.a.
[10:33] 987 tn Or “to hear everything.”
[10:33] 988 tn The words “to say to us” are not in the Greek text, but are implied. Cornelius knows Peter is God’s representative, bringing God’s message.
[10:34] 989 tn Grk “Opening his mouth Peter said” (a Semitic idiom for beginning to speak in a somewhat formal manner). The participle ἀνοίξας (anoixa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[10:34] 990 tn Grk “God is not one who is a respecter of persons,” that is, “God is not one to show partiality” (cf. BDAG 887 s.v. προσωπολήμπτης). L&N 88.239 translates this verse “I realize that God does not show favoritism (in dealing with people).” The underlying Hebrew idiom includes the personal element (“respecter of persons”) so the phrase “in dealing with people” is included in the present translation. It fits very well with the following context and serves to emphasize the relational component of God’s lack of partiality. The latter is a major theme in the NT: Rom 2:11; Eph 2:11-22; Col 3:25; Jas 2:1; 1 Pet 1:17. This was the lesson of Peter’s vision.
[10:35] 991 sn See Luke 24:47.
[10:35] 992 tn Or “shows reverence for him.”
[10:35] 993 tn Grk “works righteousness”; the translation “does what is right” for this phrase in this verse is given by L&N 25.85.
[10:35] sn Note how faith and response are linked here by the phrase and does what is right.
[10:36] 994 tn The subject and verb (“you know”) do not actually occur until the following verse, but have been repeated here because of the requirements of English word order.
[10:36] 995 tn Grk “the word.”
[10:36] 996 tn Grk “to the sons.”
[10:36] 997 sn Peace is a key OT concept: Isa 52:7; Nah 1:15; also for Luke: Luke 1:79; 2:14; Acts 9:31. See also the similar phrase in Eph 2:17.
[10:36] 999 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[10:36] 1000 sn He is Lord of all. Though a parenthetical remark, this is the theological key to the speech. Jesus is Lord of all, so the gospel can go to all. The rest of the speech proclaims Jesus’ authority.
[10:37] 1001 tn Or “proclaimed.”
[10:38] 1002 sn The somewhat awkward naming of Jesus as from Nazareth here is actually emphatic. He is the key subject of these key events.
[10:38] 1003 tn Or “how.” The use of ὡς (Jws) as an equivalent to ὅτι (Joti) to introduce indirect or even direct discourse is well documented. BDAG 1105 s.v. ὡς 5 lists Acts 10:28 in this category.
[10:38] 1004 tn Grk “power, who.” The relative pronoun was replaced by the pronoun “he,” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style, due to the length of the sentence in Greek.
[10:38] 1005 tn The translation “healing all who were oppressed by the devil” is given in L&N 22.22.
[10:38] sn All who were oppressed by the devil. Note how healing is tied to the cosmic battle present in creation. Christ’s power overcomes the devil and his forces, which seek to destroy humanity.
[10:39] 1007 tn Grk “And we.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[10:39] 1008 tn Grk “the land of the Jews,” but this is similar to the phrase used as the name of the province of Judea in 1 Macc 8:3 (see BDAG 1093-94 s.v. χώρα 2.b).
[10:39] 1009 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[10:39] 1010 tn Grk “in Jerusalem, whom they killed.” The relative pronoun was replaced by the pronoun “him” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style, due to the length of the sentence in Greek.
[10:39] 1011 tn Or “by crucifying him” (“hang on a tree” is by the time of the 1st century an idiom for crucifixion). The allusion is to the judgment against Jesus as a rebellious figure, appealing to the language of Deut 21:23. The Jewish leadership has badly “misjudged” Jesus.
[10:40] 1012 tn The conjunction “but” is not in the Greek text, but the contrast is clearly implied in the context. This is technically asyndeton, or lack of a connective, in Greek.
[10:40] 1013 tn Grk “and granted that he should become visible.” The literal Greek idiom is somewhat awkward in English. L&N 24.22 offers the translation “caused him to be seen” for this verse.
[10:41] 1014 tn Or “the witnesses God had previously chosen.” See Acts 1:8.
[10:41] 1015 sn Ate and drank. See Luke 24:35-49.
[10:42] 1016 tn Grk “and he.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[10:42] 1017 tn The verb διαμαρτύρομαι (diamarturomai) can mean “warn,” and such a meaning is highly probable in this context where a reference to the judgment of both the living and the dead is present. The more general meaning “to testify solemnly” does not capture this nuance.
[10:42] 1018 tn The word “them” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[10:42] 1019 tn Grk “that this one is the one,” but this is awkward in English and has been simplified to “that he is the one.”
[10:42] 1020 tn Or “designated.” BDAG 723 s.v. ὁρίζω 2.b has “the one appointed by God as judge” for this phrase.
[10:42] 1021 sn Jesus has divine authority as judge over the living and the dead: Acts 17:26-31; Rom 14:9; 1 Thess 5:9-10; 1 Tim 4:1; 1 Pet 4:5.
[10:43] 1022 tn Or “All the prophets testify about him.” Although modern English translations tend to place “about him” after “testify” (so NIV, NRSV) the phrase “about him” has been left at the beginning of v. 43 for emphatic reasons.
[10:43] 1023 sn Forgiveness of sins. See Luke 24:47; also Acts 14:23; 19:4; 9:42; 11:17; 16:31. The gospel is present in the prophetic promise, Rom 1:1-7. The message is in continuity with the ancient hope.
[10:44] 1024 tn Or “came down on.” God now acted to confirm the point of Peter’s speech.
[10:45] 1026 tn Grk “And the.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[10:45] 1027 tn Or “The Jewish Christians”; Grk “The believers from the circumcision.”
[10:45] 1028 sn The Jewish Christians who were with Peter were greatly astonished because they thought the promise of the Spirit would be limited only to those of Israel. God’s plan was taking on fresh dimensions even as it was a reflection of what the prophets had promised.
[10:45] 1030 tn That is, the gift consisting of the Holy Spirit. Here τοῦ πνεύματος (tou pneumato") is a genitive of apposition; the gift consists of the Spirit.
[10:45] 1031 sn The gift of the Holy Spirit had been poured out. Compare the account in Acts 2, especially 2:33. Note also Joel 2:17-21 and Acts 11:15-18.
[10:46] 1032 tn Or “extolling,” “magnifying.”
[10:47] 1033 tn Grk “just as also we.” The auxiliary verb in English must be supplied. This could be either “have” (NIV, NRSV) or “did” (NASB). “Did” is preferred here because the comparison Peter is making concerns not just the fact of the present possession of the Spirit (“they received the Spirit we now possess”), but the manner in which the Gentiles in Cornelius’ house received the Spirit (“they received the Spirit in the same manner we did [on the day of Pentecost]”).
[10:47] 1034 tn The Greek construction anticipates a negative reply which is indicated in the translation by the ‘tag’ question, “can he?” The question is rhetorical. Peter was saying these Gentiles should be baptized since God had confirmed they were his.
[10:48] 1035 tn The Greek construction (passive infinitive with accusative subject) could be translated either “he ordered them to be baptized” or “he ordered that they be baptized,” but the implication in English in either case is that Peter was giving orders to the Gentiles in Cornelius’ house, telling them to get baptized. It is much more likely in the context that Peter was ordering those Jewish Christians who accompanied him to baptize the new Gentile converts. They would doubtless have still had misgivings even after witnessing the outpouring of the Spirit and hearing the tongues. It took Peter’s apostolic authority (“ordered”) to convince them to perform the baptisms.
[10:48] 1036 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.” Jesus’ right to judge as the provider of forgiveness is highlighted here.
[11:1] 1037 tn See BDAG 221 s.v. δέχομαι 5 for this translation of ἐδέξαντο (edexanto) here.
[11:1] 1038 tn Here the phrase “word of God” is another way to describe the gospel (note the preceding verb ἐδέξαντο, edexanto, “accepted”). The phrase could also be translated “the word [message] from God.”
[11:2] 1039 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[11:2] 1040 tn Or “the Jewish Christians”; Grk “those of the circumcision.” Within the larger group of Christians were some whose loyalties ran along ethnic-religious lines.
[11:2] 1041 tn Or “believers disputed with,” “believers criticized” (BDAG 231 s.v. διακρίνω 5.b).
[11:3] 1042 tn Or “You were a guest in the home of” (according to L&N 23.12).
[11:3] 1043 tn Or “and ate with.” It was table fellowship and the possibility of eating unclean food that disturbed them.
[11:4] 1044 tn Or “to them in logical sequence,” “to them in order.” BDAG 490 s.v. καθεξῆς has “explain to someone point by point” for this phrase. This is the same term used in Luke 1:3.
[11:5] 1045 tn This term describes a supernatural vision and reflects a clear distinction from something imagined (BDAG 718 s.v. ὅραμα 1). Peter repeated the story virtually word for word through v. 13. The repetition with this degree of detail shows the event’s importance.
[11:5] 1046 tn Or “coming down.”
[11:5] 1047 tn Or “the sky” (the same Greek word means both “heaven” and “sky”).
[11:6] 1048 tn Grk “Staring I looked into it.” The participle ἀτενίσας (atenisa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[11:6] 1049 tn Or “snakes.” Grk “creeping things.” According to L&N 4.51, in most biblical contexts the term (due to the influence of Hebrew classifications such as Gen 1:25-26, 30) included small four-footed animals like rats, mice, frogs, toads, salamanders, and lizards. In this context, however, where “creeping things” are contrasted with “four-footed animals,” the English word “reptiles,” which primarily but not exclusively designates snakes, is probably more appropriate.
[11:6] 1050 tn Grk “the birds of the sky” or “the birds of the heaven”; the Greek word οὐρανός (ouranos) may be translated either “sky” or “heaven,” depending on the context. The idiomatic expression “birds of the sky” refers to wild birds as opposed to domesticated fowl (cf. BDAG 809 s.v. πετεινόν).
[11:7] 1051 tn Or “kill.” Traditionally θῦσον (quson) is translated “kill,” but in the case of animals intended for food, “slaughter” is more appropriate.
[11:8] 1052 tn Possibly there is a subtle distinction in meaning between κοινός (koinos) and ἀκάθαρτος (akaqartos) here, but according to L&N 53.39 it is difficult to determine precise differences in meaning based on existing contexts. The sentiment Peter expressed is like Ezek 4:14.
[11:9] 1053 tn Or “declare.” The wording matches Acts 10:15.
[11:11] 1054 tn Grk “And behold.”
[11:11] 1055 sn Caesarea was a city on the coast of Palestine south of Mount Carmel (not Caesarea Philippi). See the note on Caesarea in Acts 10:1.
[11:11] map For location see Map2 C1; Map4 B3; Map5 F2; Map7 A1; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[11:11] 1056 tn See BDAG 418 s.v. ἐφίστημι 1 for this meaning for ἐπέστησαν (epesthsan) here.
[11:11] 1057 tn The word “staying” is not in the Greek text but is implied.
[11:12] 1058 sn Six witnesses is three times more than what would normally be required. They could confirm the events were not misrepresented by Peter.
[11:14] 1059 tn Grk “words” (ῥήματα, rJhmata), but in this context the overall message is meant rather than the individual words.
[11:15] 1060 tn Or “came down on.”
[11:15] 1061 tn The words “he did” are not in the Greek text but are implied. They form an ellipsis which must be supplied for the modern English reader. Some modern translations supply “it” rather than “he” because the gender of πνεῦμα (pneuma) in Greek is neuter, but there are sufficient NT contexts that use masculine pronouns to refer to the Spirit to justify the use of a masculine pronoun here in the translation.
[11:15] 1062 sn At the beginning is an allusion to Acts 2 and Pentecost. The beginning is a way to refer to the start of the period of the realization of Jesus’ promise in Luke 24:49 and Acts 1:8. Peter was arguing that God gave Gentiles the same benefits he gave the Jews at the start of their mission.
[11:16] 1063 sn The word of the Lord is a technical expression in OT literature, often referring to a divine prophetic utterance (e.g., Gen 15:1, Isa 1:10, Jonah 1:1). In the NT it occurs 15 times: 3 times as ῥῆμα τοῦ κυρίου (rJhma tou kuriou; here and in Luke 22:61, 1 Pet 1:25) and 12 times as λόγος τοῦ κυρίου (logo" tou kuriou; Acts 8:25; 13:44, 48, 49; 15:35, 36; 16:32; 19:10, 20; 1 Thess 1:8, 4:15; 2 Thess 3:1). As in the OT, this phrase focuses on the prophetic nature and divine origin of what has been said.
[11:16] 1064 tn The imperfect verb ἔλεγεν (elegen) is taken as a customary imperfect.
[11:16] 1065 sn John…Spirit. This remark repeats Acts 1:5.
[11:17] 1066 tc Codex Bezae (D) and {a few other Western witnesses} here lack ὁ θεός (Jo qeo", “God”), perhaps because these scribes considered the Holy Spirit to be the gift of Christ rather than the gift of God; thus leaving the subject implicit would naturally draw the reader back to v. 16 to see the Lord Jesus as the bestower of the Spirit.
[11:17] 1067 sn That is, the same gift of the Holy Spirit.
[11:17] 1068 tn Or “gave us when we believed”; or “gave us after we believed”; or “gave us who believed”; or “gave them when they believed the same gift as he also gave us.” The aorist dative plural participle πιστεύσασιν (pisteusasin) can be understood in several different ways: (1) It could modify ἡμῖν (Jhmin, “us”) or αὐτοῖς (autois, “them”). Proximity (it immediately follows ἡμῖν) would suggest that it belongs with ἡμῖν, so the last option (“gave them when they believed the same gift he also gave us”) is less likely. (2) The participle could be either adverbial or adjectival, modifying ἡμῖν. This decision is primarily a contextual one. The point Peter made is not whether or not the Gentiles believed, since both groups (“us” and “they”) had believed in the Lord Jesus Christ. The point was whether or not the Gentiles received the Spirit when they believed, just as Jewish Christians had received the Spirit on the day of Pentecost when they believed. Translated as an adjectival participle, πιστεύσασιν only affirms the fact of belief, however, and raises somewhat of a theological problem if one realizes, “Would God have given the Gentiles the Spirit if they had not believed?” (In other words, belief in itself is a theological prerequisite for receiving the Spirit. As such, in the case of the Gentiles, it is assumed.) Thus in context it makes more sense to understand the participle πιστεύσασιν as adverbial, related to the time of belief in connection with the giving of the Spirit. (3) The participle πιστεύσασιν as a temporal participle can refer to action antecedent to the action of the main verb ἔδωκεν (edwken) or contemporaneous with it. Logically, at least, the gift of the Spirit followed belief in the case of the original Christians, who had believed before the day of Pentecost. In the case of Cornelius and his household, belief and the reception of the Spirit were virtually simultaneous. One can argue that Peter is “summarizing” the experience of Jewish Christians, and therefore the actions of belief and reception of the Spirit, while historically separate, have been “telescoped” into one (“gave them the same gift as he gave us when we believed”), but to be technically accurate the participle πιστεύσασιν should be translated “gave them the same gift as he also gave us after we believed.” A number of these problems can be avoided, however, by using a translation in English that maintains some of the ambiguity of the Greek original. Thus “if God gave them the same gift as he also gave us after believing” is used, where the phrase “after believing” can refer either to “them” or to “us,” or both.
[11:17] 1069 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[11:17] 1070 tn Or “prevent,” “forbid” (BDAG 580 s.v. κωλύω 1.a). Peter’s point is that he will not stand in the way of God.
[11:18] 1071 tn Grk “these things.”
[11:18] 1072 tn Or “became silent,” but this would create an apparent contradiction with the subsequent action of praising God. The point, in context, is that they ceased objecting to what Peter had done.
[11:18] 1073 tn Or “glorified.”
[11:18] 1074 sn Here the summary phrase for responding to the gospel is the repentance that leads to life. Note how the presence of life is tied to the presence of the Spirit (cf. John 4:7-42; 7:37-39).
[11:18] 1075 sn In the Greek text the phrase even to the Gentiles is in an emphatic position.
[11:19] 1076 sn The phrase over Stephen means in connection with Stephen’s death. See Acts 8:1b-3.
[11:19] 1077 tn Or “finally reached.” The translations “went as far as” and “finally reached” for διῆλθον (dihlqon) in this verse are given in L&N 15.17.
[11:19] 1078 sn Phoenicia was an area along the Mediterranean coast north of Palestine.
[11:19] 1079 tn Grk “and Cyprus,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[11:19] sn Cyprus was a large island in the Mediterranean off the south coast of Asia Minor.
[11:19] 1080 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia). This was probably the third largest city in the Greco-Roman world (Alexandria in Egypt was the second largest, and Rome the largest) and was the seat of government in Syria. Five miles away was a major temple to Artemis, Apollo, and Astarte, major pagan deities.
[11:19] map For location see JP1 F2; JP2 F2; JP3 F2; JP4 F2.
[11:20] 1082 sn Cyprus was a large island in the Mediterranean off the south coast of Asia Minor.
[11:20] 1083 sn Cyrene was a city on the northern African coast west of Egypt.
[11:20] 1084 tn Grk “among them, coming to Antioch began to speak.” The participle ἐλθόντες (elqonte") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[11:20] 1085 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia). See the note in 11:19.
[11:20] 1086 sn The statement that some men from Cyprus and Cyrene…began to speak to the Greeks shows that Peter’s experience of reaching out to the Gentiles was not unique.
[11:21] 1087 tn Grk “And the.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[11:21] 1088 tn The participle πιστεύσας (pisteusa") is articular and thus cannot be adverbial. It is adjectival, modifying ἀριθμός (ariqmo"), but has been translated into English as a relative clause (“who believed”).
[11:21] 1089 sn Again, the expression turned is a summary term for responding to the gospel.
[11:22] 1091 tn Grk “was heard in the ears,” an idiom. L&N 24.67 states that the idiom means “to hear in secret” (which it certainly does in Matt 10:27), but secrecy does not seem to be part of the context here, and there is no particular reason to suggest the report was made in secret.
[11:22] 1092 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[11:22] 1093 tc ‡ Most
[11:22] 1094 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia). See the note in 11:19. Again the Jerusalem church exercised an oversight role.
[11:23] 1095 tn Grk “Antioch, who when.” The relative pronoun was omitted and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style, due to the length of the sentence in Greek.
[11:23] 1096 tn BDAG 883 s.v. προσμένω 1.a.β has “remain true to the Lord” for προσμένειν (prosmenein) in this verse.
[11:23] sn He…encouraged them all to remain true to the Lord. The call to faithfulness is frequent in Acts (2:40; 14:22; 15:32; 16:39; 20:1-2).
[11:23] 1097 tn Grk “with purpose of heart”; BDAG 869 s.v. πρόθεσις 2.a translates this phrase “purpose of heart, i.e. devotion” here.
[11:24] 1098 tn Grk “a significant crowd.”
[11:26] 1099 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia). See the note in 11:19.
[11:26] 1100 tn Grk “So it happened that” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[11:26] 1101 tn Grk “year they”; the referents (Barnabas and Saul) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[11:26] 1102 tn Grk “a significant crowd.”
[11:26] 1103 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia). See the note in 11:19.
[11:26] 1104 sn The term Christians appears only here, in Acts 26:28, and 1 Pet 4:16 in the NT.
[11:27] 1105 tn Grk “In these days,” but the dative generally indicates a specific time.
[11:27] 1106 tn The word “some” is not in the Greek text, but is usually used in English when an unspecified number is mentioned.
[11:27] 1107 sn Prophets are mentioned only here and in 13:1 and 21:10 in Acts.
[11:27] 1108 sn Came down from Jerusalem. Antioch in Syria lies due north of Jerusalem. In Western languages it is common to speak of north as “up” and south as “down,” but the NT maintains the Hebrew idiom which speaks of any direction away from Jerusalem as down (since Mount Zion was thought of in terms of altitude).
[11:27] 1109 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[11:27] 1110 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia). See the note in 11:19.
[11:27] map For location see JP1 F2; JP2 F2; JP3 F2; JP4 F2
[11:28] 1111 tn Grk “getting up, predicted.” The participle ἀναστάς (anasta") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[11:28] 1112 tn Or “made clear”; Grk “indicated beforehand” (BDAG 920 s.v. σημαίνω 2).
[11:28] 1114 sn This famine is one of the firmly fixed dates in Acts. It took place from
[11:28] 1115 tn Or “whole Roman Empire.” While the word οἰκουμένη (oikoumenh) does occasionally refer specifically to the Roman Empire, BDAG 699 s.v. οἰκουνένη 2 does not list this passage (only Acts 24:5 and 17:6).
[11:28] 1116 tn Grk “world, which.” The relative pronoun (“which”) was replaced by the demonstrative pronoun “this” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style, due to the length of the sentence in Greek.
[11:28] 1117 sn This is best taken as a parenthetical note by the author. Claudius was the Roman emperor Tiberius Claudius Nero Germanicus, known as Claudius, who ruled from
[11:29] 1118 tn So BDAG 410 s.v. εὐπορέω.
[11:29] 1119 tn Or “determined,” “resolved.”
[11:29] 1120 tn Grk “to send [something] for a ministry,” but today it is common to speak of sending relief for victims of natural disasters.
[11:29] sn The financial relief reflects the oneness of the church, meeting the needs of another (even racially distinct) community. Jerusalem, having ministered to them, now received ministry back. A later collection from Greece is noted in Rom 15:25-27, but it reflects the same spirit as this gift.
[11:30] 1121 tn Grk “Judea, which they did.” The relative pronoun was omitted and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style, due to the length of the sentence in Greek.
[11:30] 1122 tn The words “their financial aid” are not in the Greek text, but are implied. Direct objects in Greek were often omitted when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[12:1] 1123 sn King Herod was Herod Agrippa I, the grandson of Herod I (Herod the Great). His mediocre career is summarized in Josephus, Ant. 18-19. This event took place in
[12:1] 1124 tn Or “King Herod had some from the church arrested.”
[12:1] 1125 tn Or “to cause them injury.”
[12:2] 1126 sn The expression executed with a sword probably refers to a beheading. James was the first known apostolic martyr (Eusebius, Eccl. Hist. 2.9.1-3). On James, not the Lord’s brother, see Luke 5:10; 6:14. This death ended a short period of peace noted in Acts 9:31 after the persecution mentioned in 8:1-3.
[12:3] 1127 tn This could be a reference to the Jewish people (so CEV) or to the Jewish leaders (so NLT). The statement in v. 4 that Herod intended to bring Peter “out to the people” (i.e., for a public trial) may suggest the former is somewhat more likely.
[12:3] 1128 sn This is a parenthetical note by the author.
[12:4] 1129 sn Four squads of soldiers. Each squad was a detachment of four soldiers.
[12:4] 1130 tn Grk “guard him, planning to bring him out.” The Greek construction continues with a participle (βουλόμενος, boulomeno") and an infinitive (ἀναγαγεῖν, anagagein), but this creates an awkward and lengthy sentence in English. Thus a reference to Herod was introduced as subject and the participle translated as a finite verb (“Herod planned”).
[12:4] 1131 tn Or “intended”; Grk “wanted.”
[12:4] 1132 tn Grk “to bring him out to the people,” but in this context a public trial (with certain condemnation as the result) is doubtless what Herod planned. L&N 15.176 translates this phrase “planning to bring him up for a public trial after the Passover.”
[12:5] 1133 tn Or “constantly.” This term also appears in Luke 22:14 and Acts 26:7.
[12:5] 1134 tn Grk “but earnest prayer was being made by the church to God for him.” The order of the clauses has been rearranged to follow English style, and the somewhat awkward passive “prayer was being made” has been changed to the simpler active verb “were praying.” Luke portrays what follows as an answer to prayer.
[12:6] 1135 tn Grk “was going to bring him out,” but the upcoming trial is implied. See Acts 12:4.
[12:6] 1136 tn Grk “two chains, and.” Logically it makes better sense to translate this as a temporal clause, although technically it is a coordinate clause in Greek.
[12:6] 1137 tn Or “were guarding.”
[12:7] 1138 tn Grk “And behold.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here. The interjection ἰδού (idou), often difficult to translate into English, expresses the suddenness of the angel’s appearance.
[12:7] 1139 tn Or “the angel of the Lord.” See the note on the word “Lord” in 5:19.
[12:7] 1140 tn Grk “striking the side of Peter, he awoke him saying.” The term refers to a push or a light tap (BDAG 786 s.v. πατάσσω 1.a). The participle πατάξας (pataxa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[12:7] 1141 tn Grk “his”; the referent (Peter) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[12:7] 1142 tn Grk “the hands,” but the wrist was considered a part of the hand.
[12:8] 1143 tn While ζώννυμι (zwnnumi) sometimes means “to dress,” referring to the fastening of the belt or sash as the final act of getting dressed, in this context it probably does mean “put on your belt” since in the conditions of a prison Peter had probably not changed into a different set of clothes to sleep. More likely he had merely removed his belt or sash, which the angel now told him to replace. The translation “put on your belt” is given by L&N 49.14 for this verse. The archaic English “girdle” for the sash or belt has an entirely different meaning today.
[12:8] 1144 tn Grk “He”; the referent (Peter) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[12:8] 1145 tn Grk “he”; the referent (the angel) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[12:8] 1146 tn Or “outer garment.”
[12:9] 1147 tn Grk “And going out he followed.”
[12:9] 1148 tn Grk “Peter going out followed him.” The participle ἐξελθών (exelqwn) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[12:9] 1149 tn The word “him” is not in the Greek text. Direct objects in Greek were often omitted when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[12:9] 1150 tn Grk “what was done through the angel was a reality” (see BDAG 43 s.v. ἀληθής 3).
[12:10] 1151 tn Or perhaps, “guard posts.”
[12:10] 1152 sn The iron gate shows how important security was here. This door was more secure than one made of wood (which would be usual).
[12:10] 1153 tn Grk “which.” The relative pronoun (“which”) was replaced by the pronoun “it,” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style, due to the length of the sentence in Greek.
[12:10] 1154 tn The Greek term here, αὐτομάτη (automath), indicates something that happens without visible cause (BDAG 152 s.v. αὐτόματος).
[12:10] 1155 tn Or “lane,” “alley” (BDAG 907 s.v. ῥύμη).
[12:11] 1156 tn Grk “And when.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[12:11] 1157 tn Or “delivered.”
[12:11] 1158 sn Here the hand of Herod is a metaphor for Herod’s power or control.
[12:11] 1159 sn King Herod was Herod Agrippa I, the grandson of Herod I (Herod the Great).
[12:11] 1160 sn Luke characterizes the opposition here as the Jewish people, including their leadership (see 12:3).
[12:12] 1161 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Peter) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[12:12] 1162 tn Grk “John who was also called Mark.”
[12:12] sn John Mark becomes a key figure in Acts 12:25; 13:5, 13; 15:37-39.
[12:13] 1163 tn Or “responded.”
[12:14] 1164 tn Or “informed.”
[12:14] 1165 tn The word “them” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects in Greek were often omitted when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[12:15] 1166 sn “You’ve lost your mind!” Such a response to the miraculous is not unusual in Luke-Acts. See Luke 24:11; Acts 26:25. The term μαίνομαι (mainomai) can have the idea of being “raving mad” or “totally irrational” (BDAG 610 s.v.). It is a strong expression.
[12:15] 1167 tn Grk “she kept insisting that the situation was thus” (cf. BDAG 422 s.v. ἔχω 10.a). Most translations supply a less awkward English phrase like “it was so”; the force of her insistence, however, is that “it was Peter,” which was the point under dispute.
[12:15] 1168 tn The two imperfect tense verbs, διϊσχυρίζετο (diiscurizeto) and ἔλεγον (elegon), are both taken iteratively. The picture is thus virtually a shouting match between Rhoda and the rest of the believers.
[12:15] 1169 sn The assumption made by those inside, “It is his angel,” seems to allude to the idea of an attending angel (cf. Gen 48:16 LXX; Matt 18:10; Test. Jacob 1:10).
[12:16] 1170 tn The words “the door” are not in the Greek text, but are implied (see Acts 12:13).
[12:16] 1171 sn That they were greatly astonished is a common response in Luke-Acts to God’s work (Luke 8:56; Acts 2:7, 12; 8:13; 9:21; 10:45).
[12:17] 1172 tn Or “He gave them a signal.” Grk “Giving them a signal…he related to them.” The participle κατασείσας (kataseisa") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[12:17] 1173 tc ‡ Most
[12:17] 1175 sn He…went to another place. This is Peter’s last appearance in Acts with the exception of the Jerusalem council in Acts 15.
[12:18] 1176 tn BDAG 436 s.v. ἡμέρα 1.a has “day is breaking” for ἡμέρα γίνεται (Jhmera ginetai) in this verse.
[12:18] 1177 tn Grk “no little consternation.” The translation given for τάραχος (taraco") in this verse by BDAG 991 s.v. τάραχος 1 is “mental agitation.” The situation indicated by the Greek word is described in L&N 25.243 as “a state of acute distress and great anxiety, with the additional possible implications of dismay and confusion – ‘great distress, extreme anxiety.’” The English word “consternation” is preferred here because it conveys precisely such a situation of anxiety mixed with fear. The reason for this anxiety is explained in the following verse.
[12:19] 1178 sn King Herod was Herod Agrippa I, the grandson of Herod I (Herod the Great).
[12:19] 1179 tn Or “had instigated a search” (Herod would have ordered the search rather than conducting it himself).
[12:19] 1180 tn “Questioned” is used to translate ἀνακρίνας (anakrina") here because a possible translation offered by BDAG 66 s.v. ἀνακρίνω for this verse is “examined,” which could be understood to mean Herod inspected the guards rather than questioned them. The translation used by the NIV, “cross-examined,” also avoids this possible misunderstanding.
[12:19] 1181 tn The meaning “led away to execution” for ἀπαχθῆναι (apacqhnai) in this verse is given by BDAG 95 s.v. ἀπάγω 2.c. Although an explicit reference to execution is lacking here, it is what would usually occur in such a case (Acts 16:27; 27:42; Code of Justinian 9.4.4). “Led away to torture” is a less likely option (Pliny the Younger, Letters 10, 96, 8).
[12:19] 1182 tn Grk “and,” but the sequence of events is better expressed in English by “then.” A new sentence is begun in the translation because of the length of the sentence in Greek, which exceeds normal English sentence length.
[12:19] 1183 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Herod) has been specified in the translation for clarity. Since Herod has been the subject of the preceding material, and the circumstances of his death are the subject of the following verses (20-23), it is best to understand Herod as the subject here. This is especially true since according to Josephus, Ant. 19.8.2 [19.343-352], Herod Agrippa I died at Caesarea in
[12:19] sn King Herod was Herod Agrippa I, the grandson of Herod I (Herod the Great), who died at Caesarea in
[12:19] 1184 sn Caesarea was a city on the coast of Palestine south of Mount Carmel (not Caesarea Philippi). See the note on Caesarea in Acts 10:1.
[12:19] map For location see Map2 C1; Map4 B3; Map5 F2; Map7 A1; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[12:20] 1185 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Herod) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[12:20] sn Herod was Herod Agrippa I, the grandson of Herod I (Herod the Great).
[12:20] 1186 tn Or “was extremely angry.” L&N 33.453 gives the meaning “be angry and quarrel, quarrel angrily” here. However, in L&N 88.180 the alternative “to be violently angry, to be furious” is given. The term is used only once in the NT (BDAG 461 s.v. θυμομαχέω).
[12:20] 1187 sn Tyre was a city and seaport on the coast of Phoenicia.
[12:20] map For location see Map1 A2; Map2 G2; Map4 A1; JP3 F3; JP4 F3.
[12:20] 1188 sn Sidon was an ancient Phoenician royal city on the coast between Berytus (Beirut) and Tyre (BDAG 923 s.v. Σιδών).
[12:20] map For location see Map1 A1; JP3 F3; JP4 F3.
[12:20] 1189 tn Or “with one accord.”
[12:20] 1190 tn Or “persuading.”
[12:20] 1191 tn On the term translated “personal assistant” BDAG 554 s.v. κοιτῶν states, “used as part of a title: ὁ ἐπὶ τοῦ κοιτῶνος the one in charge of the bed-chamber, the chamberlain.” This individual was not just a domestic servant or butler, but a highly respected person who had considerable responsibility for the king’s living quarters and personal affairs. The English word “chamberlain” corresponds very closely to this meaning but is not in common use today. The term “personal assistant,” while it might convey more business associations than management of personal affairs, nevertheless communicates the concept well in contemporary English.
[12:20] 1192 tn The words “to help them” are not in the Greek text, but are implied.
[12:20] 1193 tn Or “for a reconciliation.” There were grave political risks in having Herod angry at them. The detail shows the ruler’s power.
[12:21] 1194 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Herod) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[12:21] sn Herod was Herod Agrippa I, the grandson of Herod I (Herod the Great).
[12:21] 1195 tn Or “apparel.” On Herod’s robes see Josephus, Ant. 19.8.2 (19.344), summarized in the note at the end of v. 23.
[12:21] 1196 tn Although BDAG 175 s.v. βῆμα 3 gives the meaning “speaker’s platform” for this verse, and a number of modern translations use similar terms (“rostrum,” NASB; “platform,” NRSV), since the bema was a standard feature in Greco-Roman cities of the time, there is no need for an alternative translation here.
[12:21] sn The judgment seat (βῆμα, bhma) was a raised platform mounted by steps and sometimes furnished with a seat, used by officials in addressing an assembly or making pronouncements, often on judicial matters. The judgment seat was a familiar item in Greco-Roman culture, often located in the agora, the public square or marketplace in the center of a city.
[12:21] 1197 tn Or “delivered a public address.”
[12:22] 1198 tn The translation “crowd” is given by BDAG 223 s.v. δῆμος; the word often means a gathering of citizens to conduct public business. Here it is simply the group of people gathered to hear the king’s speech.
[12:22] 1199 tn The imperfect verb ἐπεφώνει (epefwnei) is taken ingressively in the sequence of events. Presumably the king had started his speech when the crowd began shouting.
[12:22] 1200 sn The voice of a god. Contrast the response of Paul and Barnabas in Acts 14:13-15.
[12:23] 1201 tn Or “the angel of the Lord.” See the note on the word “Lord” in 5:19.
[12:23] 1202 sn On being struck…down by an angel, see Acts 23:3; 1 Sam 25:28; 2 Sam 12:15; 2 Kgs 19:35; 2 Chr 13:20; 2 Macc 9:5.
[12:23] 1203 tn Grk “him”; the referent (Herod) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[12:23] 1204 sn He was eaten by worms and died. Josephus, Ant. 19.8.2 (19.343-352), states that Herod Agrippa I died at Caesarea in
[12:24] 1205 sn A metonymy for the number of adherents to God’s word.
[12:24] 1206 tn Or “spreading.”
[12:25] 1207 tc There are a number of variants at this point in the text: εἰς (eis, “to”) in א B Ï sams syhmg; ἀπό (apo, “from”) in D E Ψ 36 323 453 614 1175 al; ἐξ (ex, “from”) in Ì74 A 33 945 1739 al; ἐξ ᾿Ιερουσαλήμ εἰς ᾿Αντιόχειαν (ex Ierousalhm ei" Antioceian, “from Jerusalem to Antioch”) in {a few later manuscripts and part of the Itala}. A decision on this problem is very difficult, but for several reasons εἰς can be preferred. It is the most difficult reading by far in light of the context, since Paul and Barnabas were going to Jerusalem in 11:30. It is found in better witnesses, א and B being very strong evidence. The other readings, ἐξ and ἀπό, are different from εἰς yet bear essentially the same meaning as each other; this seems to suggest that scribes had problems with εἰς and tried to choose an acceptable revision. If εἰς is the earliest reading, ἀπό may be a clarification of ἐξ, and ἐξ could have arisen through confusion of letters. Or ἐξ and ἀπό could both have independently arisen from εἰς as a more acceptable preposition. Despite such arguments, however, the case for εἰς is not airtight: either ἐξ or ἀπό could be preferred on other lines of reasoning. The reading ἐξ enjoys the earliest support, and εἰς could have arisen through the same confusion of letters mentioned above. The immediate and wider context seems to mitigate against εἰς as the original reading: The aorist participle πληρώσαντες (plhrwsante", “when they had completed”) seems to signal the end of the mission to Jerusalem with the famine relief, so it would make sense in the context for the team to be coming from Jerusalem (to Antioch) rather than to Jerusalem, and 13:1 certainly presents the scene at Antioch. The later addition εἰς ᾿Αντιόχειαν after ᾿Ιερουσαλήμ in some
[12:25] 1208 sn That is, from Jerusalem to Antioch (see Acts 11:29-30).
[12:25] map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[12:25] 1209 tn Grk “fulfilled.”
[12:25] 1210 tn Grk “ministry” or “service.”
[12:25] 1211 tn Grk “John who was also called Mark.”
[13:1] 1212 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia).
[13:1] map For location see JP1 F2; JP2 F2; JP3 F2; JP4 F2.
[13:1] 1213 sn Simeon may well have been from North Africa, since the Latin loanword Niger refers to someone as “dark-complexioned.”
[13:1] 1214 sn The Cyrenian refers to a native of the city of Cyrene, on the coast of northern Africa west of Egypt.
[13:1] 1215 sn Herod is generally taken as a reference to Herod Antipas, who governed Galilee from 4
[13:1] 1216 tn Or “the governor.”
[13:1] sn A tetrarch was a ruler with rank and authority lower than a king, who ruled only with the approval of the Roman authorities. This was roughly equivalent to being governor of a region. Several times in the NT, Herod tetrarch of Galilee is called a king (Matt 14:9, Mark 6:14-29), reflecting popular usage.
[13:1] 1217 tn Or “(a foster brother of Herod the tetrarch).” The meaning “close friend from childhood” is given by L&N 34.15, but the word can also mean “foster brother” (L&N 10.51). BDAG 976 s.v. σύντροφας states, “pert. to being brought up with someone, either as a foster-brother or as a companion/friend,” which covers both alternatives. Context does not given enough information to be certain which is the case here, although many modern translations prefer the meaning “close friend from childhood.”
[13:2] 1218 tn This term is frequently used in the LXX of the service performed by priests and Levites in the tabernacle (Exod 28:35, 43; 29:30; 30:20; 35:19; 39:26; Num 1:50; 3:6, 31) and the temple (2 Chr 31:2; 35:3; Joel 1:9, 13; 2:17, and many more examples). According to BDAG 591 s.v. λειτουργέω 1.b it is used “of other expression of religious devotion.” Since the previous verse described the prophets and teachers in the church at Antioch, it is probable that the term here describes two of them (Barnabas and Saul) as they were serving in that capacity. Since they were not in Jerusalem where the temple was located, general religious service is referred to here.
[13:3] 1220 tn The three aorist participles νηστεύσαντες (nhsteusante"), προσευξάμενοι (proseuxamenoi), and ἐπιθέντες (epiqente") are translated as temporal participles. Although they could indicate contemporaneous time when used with an aorist main verb, logically here they are antecedent. On fasting and prayer, see Matt 6:5, 16; Luke 2:37; 5:33; Acts 14:23.
[13:3] 1221 tn Normally English style, which uses a coordinating conjunction between only the last two elements of a series of three or more, would call for omission of “and” here. However, since the terms “fasting and prayer” are something of a unit, often linked together, the conjunction has been retained here.
[13:3] 1222 sn The placing of hands on Barnabas and Saul (traditionally known as “the laying on of hands”) refers to an act picturing the commission of God and the church for the task at hand.
[13:4] 1223 tn Grk “they”; the referents (Barnabas and Saul) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[13:4] 1224 sn Seleucia was the port city of Antioch in Syria.
[13:4] 1225 sn Cyprus was a large island in the Mediterranean off the south coast of Asia Minor.
[13:5] 1226 tn Grk “And when.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[13:5] 1227 tn The participle γενόμενοι (genomenoi) is taken temporally.
[13:5] 1228 sn Salamis was a city on the southeastern coast of the island of Cyprus. This was a commercial center and a center of Judaism.
[13:5] 1229 tn The imperfect verb κατήγγελλον (kathngellon) has been translated as an ingressive imperfect.
[13:5] 1230 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[13:5] 1231 sn John refers here to John Mark (see Acts 12:25).
[13:5] 1232 tn The word ὑπηρέτης (Juphreth") usually has the meaning “servant,” but it is doubtful John Mark fulfilled that capacity for Barnabas and Saul. He was more likely an apprentice or assistant to them.
[13:5] sn This is a parenthetical note by the author.
[13:6] 1233 tn Or “had passed through,” “had traveled through.”
[13:6] 1234 sn Paphos. A city on the southwestern coast of the island of Cyprus. It was the seat of the Roman proconsul.
[13:6] 1235 sn Named Bar-Jesus. “Jesus” is the Latin form of the name “Joshua.” The Aramaic “bar” means “son of,” so this man was surnamed “son of Joshua.” The scene depicts the conflict between Judaism and the emerging new faith at a cosmic level, much like the Simon Magus incident in Acts 8:9-24. Paul’s ministry looks like Philip’s and Peter’s here.
[13:7] 1236 sn The proconsul was the Roman official who ruled over a province traditionally under the control of the Roman senate.
[13:7] 1237 tn Grk “This one”; the referent (the proconsul) is specified in the translation for clarity.
[13:7] 1238 tn Grk “summoning Barnabas and Saul, wanted to hear.” The participle προσκαλεσάμενος (proskalesameno") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[13:7] 1239 sn The proconsul…wanted to hear the word of God. This description of Sergius Paulus portrays him as a sensitive, secular Gentile leader.
[13:8] 1240 tn On the debate over what the name “Elymas” means, see BDAG 320 s.v. ᾿Ελύμας. The magician’s behavior is more directly opposed to the faith than Simon Magus’ was.
[13:8] 1241 sn A parenthetical note by the author.
[13:8] 1242 sn The proconsul was the Roman official who ruled over a province traditionally under the control of the Roman senate.
[13:9] 1243 sn A parenthetical note by the author.
[13:9] 1244 sn This qualifying clause in the narrative indicates who represented God in the dispute.
[13:9] 1245 tn Or “gazed intently.”
[13:10] 1246 tn Or “unscrupulousness.”
[13:10] 1247 sn “You who…paths of the Lord?” This rebuke is like ones from the OT prophets: Jer 5:27; Gen 32:11; Prov 10:7; Hos 14:9. Five separate remarks indicate the magician’s failings. The closing rhetorical question of v. 10 (“will you not stop…?”) shows how opposed he is to the way of God.
[13:11] 1248 tn Grk “And now.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[13:11] 1249 tn Grk “upon,” but in a negative sense.
[13:11] 1250 sn The term translated mistiness here appears in the writings of the physician Galen as a medical technical description of a person who is blind. The picture of judgment to darkness is symbolic as well. Whatever power Elymas had, it represented darkness. Magic will again be an issue in Acts 19:18-19. This judgment is like that of Ananias and his wife in Acts 5:1-11.
[13:11] 1251 tn Grk “fell on.”
[13:11] 1252 tn The noun χειραγωγός (ceiragwgo") is plural, so “people” is used rather than singular “someone.”
[13:12] 1253 sn See the note on proconsul in v. 8.
[13:12] 1254 sn He believed. The faith of the proconsul in the face of Jewish opposition is a theme of the rest of Acts. Paul has indeed become “a light to the Gentiles” (Acts 13:47).
[13:12] 1255 tn The translation “greatly astounded” for ἐκπλησσόμενος (ekplhssomeno") is given by L&N 25.219.
[13:12] 1256 tn Grk “of,” but this could give the impression the Lord himself had done the teaching (a subjective genitive) when actually the Lord was the object of the teaching (an objective genitive).
[13:13] 1257 tn BDAG 62 s.v. ἀνάγω 4, “as a nautical t.t. (ἀ. τὴν ναῦν put a ship to sea), mid. or pass. ἀνάγεσθαι to begin to go by boat, put out to sea.”
[13:13] 1258 sn Paphos was a city on the southwestern coast of the island of Cyprus. See Acts 13:6.
[13:13] 1259 sn Perga was a city in Pamphylia near the southern coast of Asia Minor. The journey from Paphos to Perga is about 105 mi (175 km).
[13:13] 1260 sn Pamphylia was a province in the southern part of Asia Minor.
[13:13] 1261 sn That is, John Mark.
[13:13] 1262 sn Returned to Jerusalem. John Mark had originally accompanied them from Jerusalem (see Acts 12:25). John Mark’s decision to leave became an issue later for Barnabas and Paul (Acts 15:36-39).
[13:13] map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[13:14] 1263 tn Or “Passing by.”
[13:14] 1264 sn Perga was a city in Pamphylia near the southern coast of Asia Minor.
[13:14] 1265 tn Or “at Antioch in Pisidia.”
[13:14] sn Pisidian Antioch was a city in Pisidia about 100 mi (160 km) north of Perga. It was both a Roman colony and the seat of military and civil authority in S. Galatia. One had to trek over the Taurus Mountains to get there, since the city was 3,600 ft (1,100 m) above sea level.
[13:14] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2; JP4 E2.
[13:14] 1266 tn Grk “going into the synagogue they sat down.” The participle εἰσελθόντες (eiselqonte") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[13:14] 1267 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[13:15] 1268 sn After the reading from the law and the prophets. In the 1st century Jewish synagogue, it was customary after the reading of the Torah (law) and prophets for men to give exhortation from the scriptures.
[13:15] 1269 tn Normally ἀρχισυνάγωγος (arcisunagwgo") refers to the “president of a synagogue” (so BDAG 139 s.v. and L&N 53.93). Since the term is plural here, however, and it would sound strange to the English reader to speak of “the presidents of the synagogue,” the alternative translation “leaders” is used. “Rulers” would also be acceptable, but does not convey quite the same idea.
[13:15] 1270 tn Grk “sent to them”; the word “message” is an understood direct object. Direct objects in Greek were often omitted when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[13:15] 1271 tn Grk “Men brothers,” but this is both awkward and unnecessary in English.
[13:15] 1273 tn Or “encouragement.”
[13:16] 1275 tn This participle, ἀναστάς (anasta"), and the following one, κατασείσας (kataseisa"), are both translated as adverbial participles of attendant circumstance.
[13:16] 1276 tn Or “motioned.”
[13:16] 1277 tn Or “Israelite men,” although this is less natural English. The Greek term here is ἀνήρ (anhr), which only exceptionally is used in a generic sense of both males and females. In this context involving an address to a synagogue gathering, it is conceivable that this is a generic usage, although it can also be argued that Paul’s remarks were addressed primarily to the men present, even if women were there.
[13:16] 1278 tn Grk “and those who fear God,” but this is practically a technical term for the category called God-fearers, Gentiles who worshiped the God of Israel and in many cases kept the Mosaic law, but did not take the final step of circumcision necessary to become a proselyte to Judaism. See further K. G. Kuhn, TDNT 6:732-34, 743-44.
[13:17] 1279 tn Or “people of Israel.”
[13:17] 1280 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[13:17] sn Note how Paul identifies with his audience by referring to our ancestors. He speaks as a Jew. God’s design in history is the theme of the speech. The speech is like Stephen’s, only here the focus is on a promised Son of David.
[13:17] 1281 tn That is, in both numbers and in power. The implication of greatness in both numbers and in power is found in BDAG 1046 s.v. ὑψόω 2.
[13:17] 1282 tn Or “as resident aliens.”
[13:17] 1284 sn Here uplifted arm is a metaphor for God’s power by which he delivered the Israelites from Egypt. See Exod 6:1, 6; 32:11; Deut 3:24; 4:34; Ps 136:11-12.
[13:18] 1285 tn Grk “And for.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[13:18] 1286 tn For this verb, see BDAG 1017 s.v. τροποφορέω (cf. also Deut 1:31; Exod 16:35; Num 14:34).
[13:19] 1288 tn Grk “And after.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[13:19] 1289 tn The participle καθελών (kaqelwn) is taken temporally.
[13:19] 1290 sn Seven nations. See Deut 7:1.
[13:19] 1291 tn Grk “he gave their land as an inheritance.” The words “his people” are supplied to complete an ellipsis specifying the recipients of the land.
[13:20] 1292 tn The words “all this took” are not in the Greek text, but are supplied to make a complete statement in English. There is debate over where this period of 450 years fits and what it includes: (1) It could include the years in Egypt, the conquest of Canaan, and the distribution of the land; (2) some connect it with the following period of the judges. This latter approach seems to conflict with 1 Kgs 6:1; see also Josephus, Ant. 8.3.1 (8.61).
[13:20] 1293 tn Grk “And after these things.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[13:20] 1294 tn The words “the time of” are not in the Greek text, but are implied.
[13:21] 1295 tn The words “who ruled” are not in the Greek text, but are implied. They have been supplied as a clarification for the English reader. See Josephus, Ant. 6.14.9 (6.378).
[13:22] 1296 tn Grk “he”; the referent (God) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[13:22] 1297 sn The expression raised up refers here to making someone king. There is a wordplay here: “raising up” refers to bringing someone onto the scene of history, but it echoes with the parallel to Jesus’ resurrection.
[13:22] 1298 tn Grk “about whom.” The relative pronoun (“whom”) was replaced by the pronoun “him” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style, due to the length of the sentence in Greek. The verb εἶπεν (eipen) has not been translated (literally “he said testifying”) because it is redundant when combined with the participle μαρτυρήσας (marturhsa", “testifying”). Instead the construction of verb plus participle has been translated as a single English verb (“testified”).
[13:22] 1299 sn A quotation from Ps 89:20.
[13:22] 1300 sn A quotation from 1 Sam 13:14.
[13:22] 1301 tn Or “who will perform all my will,” “who will carry out all my wishes.”
[13:23] 1302 tn Or “From the offspring”; Grk “From the seed.”
[13:23] sn From the descendants (Grk “seed”). On the importance of the seed promise involving Abraham, see Gal 3:6-29.
[13:23] 1303 sn The phrase this man is in emphatic position in the Greek text.
[13:23] 1304 tn Grk “according to [his] promise.” The comparative clause “just as he promised” is less awkward in English.
[13:23] sn Just as he promised. Note how Paul describes Israel’s history carefully to David and then leaps forward immediately to Jesus. Paul is expounding the initial realization of Davidic promise as it was delivered in Jesus.
[13:24] 1305 tn Grk “John having already proclaimed before his coming a baptism…,” a genitive absolute construction which is awkward in English. A new sentence was begun in the translation at this point.
[13:24] 1306 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Jesus) has been specified in the context for clarity, since God is mentioned in the preceding context and John the Baptist in the following clause.
[13:24] 1307 sn John refers here to John the Baptist.
[13:24] 1308 tn Grk “a baptism of repentance”; the genitive has been translated as a genitive of purpose.
[13:25] 1310 tn The verb ἔλεγεν (elegen) has been translated as an iterative imperfect, since John undoubtedly said this or something similar on numerous occasions.
[13:25] 1311 tn Literally a relative clause, “of whom I am not worthy to untie the sandals of his feet.” Because of the awkwardness of this construction in English, a new sentence was begun here.
[13:26] 1312 tn Grk “Men brothers,” but this is both awkward and unnecessary in English.
[13:26] 1315 tn Grk “and those among you who fear God,” but this is practically a technical term for the category called God-fearers, Gentiles who worshiped the God of Israel and in many cases kept the Mosaic law, but did not take the final step of circumcision necessary to become a proselyte to Judaism. See further K. G. Kuhn, TDNT 6:732-34, 743-44. Note how Paul includes God-fearing Gentiles as recipients of this promise.
[13:27] 1317 tn BDAG 12-13 s.v. ἀγνοέω 1.b gives “not to know w. acc. of pers.” as the meaning here, but “recognize” is a better translation in this context because recognition of the true identity of the one they condemned is the issue. See Acts 2:22-24; 4:26-28.
[13:27] 1318 tn Grk “this one.”
[13:27] 1319 tn Usually φωνή (fwnh) means “voice,” but BDAG 1071-72 s.v. φωνή 2.c has “Also of sayings in scripture…Ac 13:27.”
[13:27] sn They fulfilled the sayings. The people in Jerusalem and the Jewish rulers should have known better, because they had the story read to them weekly in the synagogue.
[13:27] 1320 tn The participle κρίναντες (krinante") is instrumental here.
[13:27] 1321 tn The word “him” is not in the Greek text but is implied. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[13:28] 1322 tn Grk “And though.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[13:28] 1323 tn The participle εὑρόντες (Jeuronte") has been translated as a concessive adverbial participle.
[13:28] 1324 sn No basis. Luke insists on Jesus’ innocence again and again in Luke 23:1-25.
[13:28] 1325 tn Grk “no basis for death,” but in this context a sentence of death is clearly indicated.
[13:29] 1326 tn Or “carried out.”
[13:29] 1327 sn That is, everything that was written in OT scripture.
[13:29] 1328 tn Grk “taking him down from the cross, they placed him.” The participle καθελόντες (kaqelonte") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[13:29] 1329 tn Grk “tree,” but frequently figurative for a cross. The allusion is to Deut 21:23. See Acts 5:30; 10:39.
[13:29] 1330 tn The word “him” is not in the Greek text but is implied. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[13:30] 1331 sn See the note on the phrase “raised up” in v. 22, which is the same Greek verb used here.
[13:31] 1332 tn Grk “who.” The relative pronoun (“who”) was replaced by the conjunction “and” and the pronoun “he” at this point to improve the English style.
[13:31] 1333 sn Those who had accompanied him refers to the disciples, who knew Jesus in ministry. Luke is aware of resurrection appearances in Galilee though he did not relate any of them in Luke 24.
[13:31] 1334 tn Grk “who.” The relative pronoun (“who”) was replaced by the demonstrative pronoun “these” and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style, due to the length of the sentence in Greek and the awkwardness of two relative clauses (“who for many days appeared” and “who are now his witnesses”) following one another.
[13:32] 1335 tn Or “to our forefathers”; Grk “the fathers.”
[13:33] 1336 tn Grk “that this”; the referent (the promise mentioned in the previous verse) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[13:33] sn This promise refers to the promise of a Savior through the seed (descendants) of David that is proclaimed as fulfilled (Rom 1:1-7).
[13:33] 1337 tn Or “by resurrecting.” The participle ἀναστήσας (anasthsa") is taken as instrumental here.
[13:33] sn By raising (i.e., by resurrection) tells how this promise came to be realized, though again the wordplay also points to his presence in history through this event (see the note on “raised up” in v. 22).
[13:33] 1338 sn You are my Son. The key to how the quotation is used is the naming of Jesus as “Son” to the Father. The language is that of kingship, as Ps 2 indicates. Here is the promise about what the ultimate Davidic heir would be.
[13:33] 1339 tn Grk “I have begotten you.” The traditional translation for γεγέννηκα (gegennhka, “begotten”) is misleading to the modern English reader because it is no longer in common use. Today one speaks of “fathering” a child in much the same way speakers of English formerly spoke of “begetting a child.”
[13:33] sn A quotation from Ps 2:7.
[13:34] 1340 tn Grk “him”; the referent (Jesus) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[13:34] 1341 tn Although μηκέτι (mhketi) can mean “no longer” or “no more,” the latter is more appropriate here, since to translate “no longer” in this context could give the reader the impression that Jesus did experience decay before his resurrection. Since the phrase “no more again to be” is somewhat awkward in English, the simpler phrase “never again to be” was used instead.
[13:34] 1342 tn The translation “to be in again” for ὑποστρέφω (Jupostrefw) is given in L&N 13.24.
[13:34] 1343 tn Grk “he”; the referent (God) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[13:34] 1344 tn The pronoun “you” is plural here. The promises of David are offered to the people.
[13:34] 1345 tn Or “the trustworthy decrees made by God to David.” The phrase τὰ ὅσια Δαυὶδ τὰ πιστά (ta Josia Dauid ta pista) is “compressed,” that is, in a very compact or condensed form. It could be expanded in several different ways. BDAG 728 s.v. ὅσιος 3 understands it to refer to divine decrees: “I will grant you the sure decrees of God relating to David.” BDAG then states that this quotation from Isa 55:3 is intended to show that the following quotation from Ps 16:10 could not refer to David himself, but must refer to his messianic descendant (Jesus). L&N 33.290 render the phrase “I will give to you the divine promises made to David, promises that can be trusted,” although they also note that τὰ ὅσια in Acts 13:34 can mean “divine decrees” or “decrees made by God.” In contemporary English it is less awkward to translate πιστά as an adjective (“trustworthy”). The concept of “divine decrees,” not very understandable to the modern reader, has been replaced by “promises,” and since God is the implied speaker in the context, it is clear that these promises were made by God.
[13:34] 1346 sn A quotation from Isa 55:3. The point of this citation is to make clear that the promise of a Davidic line and blessings are made to the people as well.
[13:35] 1347 tn Grk “Therefore he also says in another”; the word “psalm” is not in the Greek text but is implied.
[13:35] 1348 tn The Greek word translated “Holy One” here (ὅσιόν, {osion) is related to the use of ὅσια (Josia) in v. 34. The link is a wordplay. The Holy One, who does not die, brings the faithful holy blessings of promise to the people.
[13:35] 1349 tn Grk “to see,” but the literal translation of the phrase “to see decay” could be misunderstood to mean simply “to look at decay,” while here “see decay” is really figurative for “experience decay.”
[13:35] 1350 sn A quotation from Ps 16:10.
[13:36] 1351 tn The participle ὑπηρετήσας (Juphrethsa") is taken temporally.
[13:36] 1352 tn The verb κοιμάω (koimaw) literally means “sleep,” but it is often used in the Bible as a euphemism for the death of a believer.
[13:36] 1353 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “was gathered to his fathers” (a Semitic idiom).
[13:36] 1354 tn Grk “saw,” but the literal translation of the phrase “saw decay” could be misunderstood to mean simply “looked at decay,” while here “saw decay” is really figurative for “experienced decay.” This remark explains why David cannot fulfill the promise.
[13:37] 1355 sn The one whom God raised up refers to Jesus.
[13:37] 1356 tn Grk “see,” but the literal translation of the phrase “did not see decay” could be misunderstood to mean simply “did not look at decay,” while here “did not see decay” is really figurative for “did not experience decay.”
[13:38] 1357 tn That is, Jesus. This pronoun is in emphatic position in the Greek text. Following this phrase in the Greek text is the pronoun ὑμῖν (Jumin, “to you”), so that the emphasis for the audience is that “through Jesus to you” these promises have come.
[13:39] 1358 sn This one refers here to Jesus.
[13:39] 1359 tn Or “is freed.” The translation of δικαιωθῆναι (dikaiwqhnai) and δικαιοῦται (dikaioutai) in Acts 13:38-39 is difficult. BDAG 249 s.v. δικαιόω 3 categorizes δικαιωθῆναι in 13:38 (Greek text) under the meaning “make free/pure” but categorizes δικαιοῦται in Acts 13:39 as “be found in the right, be free of charges” (BDAG 249 s.v. δικαιόω 2.b.β). In the interest of consistency both verbs are rendered as “justified” in this translation.
[13:39] 1360 tn Or “could not free.”
[13:39] 1361 tn Grk “from everything from which you could not be justified by the law of Moses.” The passive construction has been converted to an active one in the translation, with “by the law of Moses” becoming the subject of the final clause. The words “from everything from which the law of Moses could not justify you” are part of v. 38 in the Greek text, but due to English style and word order must be placed in v. 39 in the translation.
[13:40] 1362 sn The speech closes with a warning, “Watch out,” that also stresses culpability.
[13:41] 1365 sn A quotation from Hab 1:5. The irony in the phrase even if someone tells you, of course, is that Paul has now told them. So the call in the warning is to believe or else face the peril of being scoffers whom God will judge. The parallel from Habakkuk is that the nation failed to see how Babylon’s rising to power meant perilous judgment for Israel.
[13:42] 1366 tn Grk “they”; the referents (Paul and Barnabas) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[13:42] 1367 tn Or “were leaving.” The participle ἐξιόντων (exiontwn) is taken temporally.
[13:42] 1368 tn Grk “they”; the referent (the people) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[13:42] 1369 tn Or “begging,” “inviting.”
[13:43] 1371 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[13:43] 1372 tn BDAG 607 s.v. λύω 3 has “λυθείσης τ. συναγωγῆς when the meeting of the synagogue had broken up Ac 13:43.”
[13:43] 1373 tn Normally the phrase σεβόμενοι τὸν θεόν (sebomenoi ton qeon) refers to Gentiles (“God-fearers”) who believed in God, attended the synagogue, and followed the Mosaic law to some extent, but stopped short of undergoing circumcision. BDAG 918 s.v. σέβω 1.b lists in this category references in Acts 16:14; 18:7; with σεβόμενοι alone, Acts 13:50; 17:4, 17; the phrase is also found in Josephus, Ant. 14.7.2 (14.110). Unique to this particular verse is the combination σεβόμενοι προσηλύτων (sebomenoi proshlutwn). Later rabbinic discussion suggests that to be regarded as a proper proselyte, a Gentile male had to submit to circumcision. If that is the case here, these Gentiles in the synagogue at Pisidian Antioch should be regarded as full proselytes who had converted completely to Judaism and undergone circumcision. It is probably more likely, however, that προσηλύτων is used here in a somewhat looser sense (note the use of σεβομένας [sebomena"] alone to refer to women in Acts 13:50) and that these Gentiles were still in the category commonly called “God-fearers” without being full, technical proselytes to Judaism. See further K. G. Kuhn, TDNT 6:732-34, 743-44. Regardless, the point is that many Gentiles, as well as Jews, came to faith.
[13:43] 1374 tn This is the meaning given for ἔπειθον (epeiqon) in this verse by BDAG 791 s.v. πείθω 1.b.
[13:43] 1375 tn Grk “who, as they were speaking with them, were persuading them.”
[13:43] 1376 tn The verb προμένειν (promenein) is similar in force to the use of μένω (menw, “to reside/remain”) in the Gospel and Epistles of John.
[13:44] 1377 tc Most
[13:44] sn The word of the Lord is a technical expression in OT literature, often referring to a divine prophetic utterance (e.g., Gen 15:1, Isa 1:10, Jonah 1:1). In the NT it occurs 15 times: 3 times as ῥῆμα τοῦ κυρίου (rJhma tou kuriou; Luke 22:61, Acts 11:16, 1 Pet 1:25) and 12 times as λόγος τοῦ κυρίου (logo" tou kuriou; here and in vv. 48 and 49; Acts 8:25; 15:35, 36; 16:32; 19:10, 20; 1 Thess 1:8, 4:15; 2 Thess 3:1). As in the OT, this phrase focuses on the prophetic nature and divine origin of what has been said.
[13:45] 1378 sn They were filled with jealousy. Their foolish response to the gospel is noted again (see Acts 5:17). The same verb is used in Acts 7:9; 17:5.
[13:45] 1379 tn The imperfect verb ἀντέλεγον (antelegon) has been translated as an ingressive imperfect in the logical sequence of events: After they were filled with jealousy, the Jewish opponents began to contradict what Paul said.
[13:45] 1380 tn Grk “the things being said by Paul.” For smoothness and simplicity of English style, the passive construction has been converted to active voice in the translation.
[13:45] 1381 tn The participle βλασφημοῦντες (blasfhmounte") has been regarded as indicating the means of the action of the main verb. It could also be translated as a finite verb (“and reviled him”) in keeping with contemporary English style. The direct object (“him”) is implied rather than expressed and could be impersonal (“it,” referring to what Paul was saying rather than Paul himself), but the verb occurs more often in contexts involving defamation or slander against personal beings (not always God). For a very similar context to this one, compare Acts 18:6. The translation “blaspheme” is not used because in contemporary English its meaning is more narrowly defined and normally refers to blasphemy against God (not what Paul’s opponents were doing here). The modern term “slandering” comes close to what was being done to Paul here.
[13:46] 1382 tn Grk “Both Paul and Barnabas spoke out courageously and said.” The redundancy is removed in the translation and the verb “replied” is used in keeping with the logical sequence of events. The theme of boldness reappears: Acts 4:24-30; 9:27-28.
[13:46] 1383 tn Grk “It was necessary that the word of God be spoken.” For smoothness and simplicity of English style, the passive construction has been converted to active voice in the translation.
[13:46] 1384 tn Or “and consider yourselves unworthy.”
[13:46] 1385 tn Grk “behold, we.” In this context ἰδού (idou) is not easily translated into English.
[13:46] 1386 sn This turning to the Gentiles would be a shocking rebuke to 1st century Jews who thought they alone were the recipients of the promise.
[13:47] 1387 tn Here οὕτως (Joutws) is taken to refer to what follows, the content of the quotation, as given for this verse by BDAG 742 s.v. οὕτω/οὕτως 2.
[13:47] 1388 tn BDAG 1004 s.v. τίθημι 3.a has “τιθέναι τινὰ εἴς τι place/appoint someone to or for (to function as) someth….Ac 13:47.” This is a double accusative construction of object (“you”) and complement (“a light”).
[13:47] 1389 sn Paul alludes here to the language of the Servant in Isaiah, pointing to Isa 42:6; 49:6. He and Barnabas do the work of the Servant in Isaiah.
[13:47] 1390 tn Grk “that you should be for salvation,” but more simply “to bring salvation.”
[13:47] 1391 sn An allusion to Isa 42:6 and 49:6. The expression the ends of the earth recalls Luke 3:6 and Acts 1:8. Paul sees himself and Barnabas as carrying out the commission of Luke 24:27. (See 2 Cor 6:2, where servant imagery also appears concerning Paul’s message.)
[13:48] 1392 tn The imperfect verb ἔχαιρον (ecairon) and the following ἐδόξαζον (edoxazon) are translated as ingressive imperfects.
[13:48] 1393 tn Or “glorify.” Although “honor” is given by BDAG 258 s.v. δοξάζω as a translation, it would be misleading here, because the meaning is “to honor in the sense of attributing worth to something,” while in contemporary English usage one speaks of “honoring” a contract in the sense of keeping its stipulations. It is not a synonym for “obey” in this context (“obey the word of the Lord”), but that is how many English readers would understand it.
[13:48] 1394 sn Note the contrast to v. 46 in regard to eternal life.
[13:49] 1395 tn BDAG 239 s.v. διαφέρω 1 has “spread” for διαφέρετο (diafereto) in connection with a teaching. This is the first summary since Acts 9:31.
[13:50] 1396 tn For the translation of παρώτρυναν (parwtrunan) as “incited” see BDAG 780 s.v. παροτρύνω.
[13:50] 1397 tn BDAG 299 s.v. ἐκβάλλω 1 has “throw out.” Once again, many Jews reacted to the message (Acts 5:17, 33; 6:11; 13:45).
[13:51] 1398 tn The participle ἐκτιναξάμενοι (ektinaxamenoi) is taken temporally. It could also be translated as a participle of attendant circumstance (“So they shook…and went”).
[13:51] 1399 sn Shaking the dust off their feet was a symbolic gesture commanded by Jesus to his disciples, Matt 10:14; Mark 6:11; Luke 9:5. It shows a group of people as culpable before God.
[13:51] 1400 sn Iconium was a city in Lycaonia about 90 mi (145 km) east southeast of Pisidian Antioch. It was the easternmost city of Phrygia.
[13:52] 1401 sn The citizens of Pisidian Antioch were not discouraged by the persecution, but instead were filled with joy.
[14:1] 1402 sn Iconium. See the note in 13:51.
[14:1] 1403 tn Grk “they”; the referents (Paul and Barnabas) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[14:1] 1404 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[14:1] 1405 tn Or “that a large crowd.”
[14:2] 1406 tn Or “who would not believe.”
[14:2] 1407 tn Or “embittered their minds” (Grk “their souls”). BDAG 502 s.v. κακόω 2 has “make angry, embitter τὰς ψυχάς τινων κατά τινος poison the minds of some persons against another Ac 14:2.”
[14:3] 1408 tn The word “there” is not in the Greek text, but is implied.
[14:3] 1409 sn The Lord testified to the message by granting the signs described in the following clause.
[14:3] 1411 tn Here the context indicates the miraculous nature of the signs mentioned.
[14:4] 1412 tn BDAG 825 s.v. πλῆθος 2.b.γ has this translation for πλῆθος (plhqo").
[14:4] 1413 tn These clauses are a good example of the contrastive μὲν…δέ (men…de) construction: Some “on the one hand” sided with the Jews, but some “on the other hand” sided with the apostles.
[14:5] 1414 tn Grk “So there came about an attempt” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[14:5] 1415 tn On this verb see BDAG 1022 s.v. ὑβρίζω.
[14:5] 1416 tn The direct object “them” is repeated after both verbs in the translation for stylistic reasons, although it occurs only after λιθοβολῆσαι (liqobolhsai) in the Greek text.
[14:6] 1417 tn Grk “they”; the referents (Paul and Barnabas) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[14:6] 1418 tn Grk “learning about it, fled.” The participle συνιδόντες (sunidonte") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. It could also be taken temporally (“when they learned about it”) as long as opening clause of v. 5 is not translated as a temporal clause too, which results in a redundancy.
[14:6] 1419 sn Lystra was a city in Lycaonia about 18 mi (30 km) south of Iconium, a Roman colony that was not on the main roads of Lycaonia. Because of its relative isolation, its local character was able to be preserved.
[14:6] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2.
[14:6] 1420 sn Derbe was a city in Lycaonia about 35 mi (60 km) southeast of Lystra.
[14:6] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2.
[14:7] 1421 tn Grk “region, and there.” Because of the length and complexity of the Greek sentence, καί (kai) has not been translated and a new sentence begun in the translation.
[14:7] 1422 tn The periphrastic construction εὐαγγελιζόμενοι ἦσαν (euangelizomenoi hsan) has been translated as a progressive imperfect.
[14:8] 1423 tn Grk “And in.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[14:8] 1424 sn Lystra was a city in Lycaonia about 18 mi (30 km) south of Iconium.
[14:8] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2.
[14:8] 1425 tn Grk “powerless in his feet,” meaning he was unable to use his feet to walk.
[14:8] 1426 tn Grk “lame from his mother’s womb” (an idiom).
[14:8] sn The description lame from birth makes clear how serious the condition was, and how real it was. This event is very similar to Acts 3:1-10, except here the lame man’s faith is clear from the start.
[14:9] 1427 tn Grk “speaking, who.” The relative pronoun has been replaced by the noun “Paul,” and a new sentence begun in the translation because an English relative clause would be very awkward here.
[14:10] 1429 tn BDAG 722 s.v. ὀρθός 1.a has “stand upright on your feet.”
[14:10] 1430 tn Grk “he”; the referent (the man) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[14:10] 1431 tn This verb is imperfect tense in contrast to the previous verb, which is aorist. It has been translated ingressively, since the start of a sequence is in view here.
[14:11] 1432 tn Grk “they lifted up their voice” (an idiom).
[14:11] 1433 tn Grk “in Lycaonian, saying.” The word “language” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. The participle λέγοντες (legontes) is redundant in English and has not been translated.
[14:11] 1434 tn So BDAG 707 s.v. ὁμοιόω 1. However, L&N 64.4 takes the participle ὁμοιωθέντες (Jomoiwqente") as an adjectival participle modifying θεοί (qeoi): “the gods resembling men have come down to us.”
[14:11] sn The gods have come down to us in human form. Greek culture spoke of “divine men.” In this region there was a story of Zeus and Hermes visiting the area (Ovid, Metamorphoses 8.611-725). The locals failed to acknowledge them, so judgment followed. The present crowd was determined not to make the mistake a second time.
[14:12] 1435 tn The imperfect verb ἐκάλουν (ekaloun) has been translated as an ingressive imperfect.
[14:12] 1436 sn Zeus was the chief Greek deity, worshiped throughout the Greco-Roman world (known to the Romans as Jupiter).
[14:12] 1437 sn Hermes was a Greek god who (according to Greek mythology) was the messenger of the gods and the god of oratory (equivalent to the Roman god Mercury).
[14:13] 1438 tn The words “the temple of” are not in the Greek text, but are implied. The translation “the priest of (the temple/shrine of) Zeus located before the city” is given for this phrase by BDAG 426 s.v. Ζεύς.
[14:13] 1439 sn See the note on Zeus in the previous verse.
[14:13] sn Garlands were commonly wreaths of wool with leaves and flowers woven in, worn on a person’s head or woven around a staff. They were an important part of many rituals used to worship pagan gods. Although it was an erroneous reaction, the priest’s reaction shows how all acknowledged their power and access to God.
[14:13] 1442 tn The words “to them” are not in the Greek text, but are clearly implied by the response of Paul and Barnabas in the following verse.
[14:14] 1443 sn The apostles Barnabas and Paul. This is one of only two places where Luke calls Paul an apostle, and the description here is shared with Barnabas. This is a nontechnical use here, referring to a commissioned messenger.
[14:14] 1444 tn The participle ἀκούσαντες (akousante") is taken temporally.
[14:14] 1445 tn Grk “tearing their clothes they rushed out.” The participle διαρρήξαντες (diarrhxante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. This action is a Jewish response to blasphemy (m. Sanhedrin 7.5; Jdt 14:16-17).
[14:14] 1446 tn So BDAG 307 s.v. ἐκπηδάω 1, “rush (lit. ‘leap’) out…εἰς τὸν ὄχλον into the crowd Ac 14:14.”
[14:14] 1447 tn Grk “shouting and saying.” The participle λέγοντες (legontes, in v. 15) has not been translated because it is redundant.
[14:14] sn What follows is one of two speeches in Acts to a purely pagan audience (Acts 17 in Athens is the other). So Paul focused on God as Creator, a common link.
[14:15] 1448 tn Grk “with the same kinds of feelings,” L&N 25.32. BDAG 706 s.v. ὁμοιοπαθής translates the phrase “with the same nature τινί as someone.” In the immediate context, the contrast is between human and divine nature, and the point is that Paul and Barnabas are mere mortals, not gods.
[14:15] 1449 tn Grk “in order that you should turn,” with ἐπιστρέφειν (epistrefein) as an infinitive of purpose, but this is somewhat awkward contemporary English. To translate the infinitive construction “proclaim the good news, that you should turn,” which is much smoother English, could give the impression that the infinitive clause is actually the content of the good news, which it is not. The somewhat less formal “to get you to turn” would work, but might convey to some readers manipulativeness on the part of the apostles. Thus “proclaim the good news, so that you should turn,” is used, to convey that the purpose of the proclamation of good news is the response by the hearers. The emphasis here is like 1 Thess 1:9-10.
[14:15] 1450 tn Or “useless,” “futile.” The reference is to idols and idolatry, worshiping the creation over the Creator (Rom 1:18-32). See also 1 Kgs 16:2, 13, 26; 2 Kgs 17:15; Jer 2:5; 8:19; 3 Macc 6:11.
[14:15] 1451 tn Grk “and the earth, and the sea,” but καί (kai) has not been translated before “the earth” and “the sea” since contemporary English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[14:16] 1452 tn Grk “them, who in.” The relative pronoun (“who”) was replaced by the pronoun “he” (“In past generations he”) and a new sentence was begun in the translation at this point to improve the English style, due to the length of the sentence in Greek and the awkwardness of two relative clauses (“who made the heaven” and “who in past generations”) following one another.
[14:16] 1453 tn On this term see BDAG 780 s.v. παροίχομαι. The word is a NT hapax legomenon.
[14:16] 1454 tn Or “all the Gentiles” (in Greek the word for “nation” and “Gentile” is the same). The plural here alludes to the variety of false religions in the pagan world.
[14:17] 1455 tn The participle ἀγαθουργῶν (agaqourgwn) is regarded as indicating means here, parallel to the following participles διδούς (didou") and ἐμπιπλῶν (empiplwn). This is the easiest way to understand the Greek structure. Semantically, the first participle is a general statement, followed by two participles giving specific examples of doing good.
[14:17] 1456 tn Or “from the sky” (the same Greek word means both “heaven” and “sky”).
[14:17] 1457 tn Grk “satisfying [filling] your hearts with food and joy.” This is an idiomatic expression; it strikes the English reader as strange to speak of “filling one’s heart with food.” Thus the additional direct object “you” has been supplied, separating the two expressions somewhat: “satisfying you with food and your hearts with joy.”
[14:17] 1458 sn God’s general sovereignty and gracious care in the creation are the way Paul introduces the theme of the goodness of God. He was trying to establish monotheism here. It is an OT theme (Gen 8:22; Ps 4:7; 145:15-16; 147:8-9; Isa 25:6; Jer 5:24) which also appears in the NT (Luke 12:22-34).
[14:18] 1459 tn The participle λέγοντες (legontes) is regarded as indicating means.
[14:18] 1460 tn BDAG 524 s.v. καταπαύω 2.b gives both “restrain” and “dissuade someone fr. someth.,” but “they scarcely dissuaded the crowds from offering sacrifice,” while accurate, is less common in contemporary English than saying “they scarcely persuaded the crowds not to offer sacrifice.” Paganism is portrayed as a powerful reality that is hard to reverse.
[14:19] 1461 sn Antioch was a city in Pisidia about 90 mi (145 km) west northwest of Lystra.
[14:19] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2; JP4 E2.
[14:19] 1462 sn Iconium was a city in Lycaonia about 18 mi (30 km) north of Lystra. Note how Jews from other cities were chasing Paul (2 Cor 11:4-6; Gal 2:4-5; Acts 9:16).
[14:19] 1463 tn The participle πείσαντες (peisante") is taken temporally (BDAG 791 s.v. πείθω 1.c).
[14:19] 1464 tn Grk “stoning Paul they dragged him.” The participle λιθάσαντες (liqasante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[14:20] 1465 tn Grk “and entered”; the word “back” is not in the Greek text but is implied.
[14:20] 1466 tn Grk “And on.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[14:20] 1467 sn Derbe was a city in Lycaonia about 35 mi (60 km) southeast of Lystra. This was the easternmost point of the journey.
[14:20] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2.
[14:21] 1468 sn Lystra was a city in Lycaonia about 35 mi (60 km) northwest of Derbe.
[14:21] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2.
[14:21] 1469 sn Iconium was a city in Lycaonia about 18 mi (30 km) north of Lystra.
[14:21] 1470 sn Antioch was a city in Pisidia about 90 mi (145 km) west northwest of Lystra.
[14:21] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2; JP4 E2.
[14:22] 1471 tn Grk “to Antioch, strengthening.” Due to the length of the Greek sentence and the tendency of contemporary English to use shorter sentences, a new sentence was started here. This participle (ἐπιστηρίζοντες, episthrizonte") and the following one (παρακαλοῦντες, parakalounte") have been translated as finite verbs connected by the coordinating conjunction “and.”
[14:22] 1472 sn And encouraged them to continue. The exhortations are like those noted in Acts 11:23; 13:43. An example of such a speech is found in Acts 20:18-35. Christianity is now characterized as “the faith.”
[14:22] 1473 sn This reference to the kingdom of God clearly refers to its future arrival.
[14:22] 1474 tn Or “sufferings.”
[14:23] 1475 sn Appointed elders. See Acts 20:17.
[14:23] 1476 tn The preposition κατά (kata) is used here in a distributive sense; see BDAG 512 s.v. κατά B.1.d.
[14:23] 1477 tn Literally with a finite verb (προσευξάμενοι, proseuxamenoi) rather than a noun, “praying with fasting,” but the combination “prayer and fasting” is so familiar in English that it is preferable to use it here.
[14:23] 1478 tn BDAG 772 s.v. παρατίθημι 3.b has “entrust someone to the care or protection of someone” for this phrase. The reference to persecution or suffering in the context (v. 22) suggests “protection” is a better translation here. This looks at God’s ultimate care for the church.
[14:24] 1479 tn Grk “Then passing through Pisidia they came.” The participle διελθόντες (dielqonte") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[14:24] 1480 sn Pamphylia was a province along the southern coast of Asia Minor.
[14:25] 1482 sn Perga was a city in Pamphylia near the southern coast of Asia Minor.
[14:25] 1483 sn Attalia was a seaport in the province of Pamphylia on the southern coast of Asia Minor, about 12 mi (20 km) southwest of Perga.
[14:26] 1484 sn Antioch was the city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia) from which Paul’s first missionary journey began (see Acts 13:1-4). That first missionary journey ends here, after covering some 1,400 mi (2,240 km).
[14:26] map For location see JP1 F2; JP2 F2; JP3 F2; JP4 F2.
[14:26] 1485 tn Or “committed.” BDAG 762 s.v. παραδίδωμι 2 gives “commended to the grace of God for the work 14:26” as the meaning for this phrase, although “give over” and “commit” are listed as alternative meanings for this category.
[14:26] 1486 tn BDAG 829 s.v. πληρόω 5 has “to bring to completion an activity in which one has been involved from its beginning, complete, finish” as meanings for this category. The ministry to which they were commissioned ends with a note of success.
[14:27] 1487 tn Or “announced.”
[14:27] 1488 sn Note that God is the subject of the activity. The outcome of this mission is seen as a confirmation of the mission to the Gentiles.
[14:27] 1489 sn On the image of opening, or of the door, see 1 Cor 16:9; 2 Cor 2:12; Col 4:3.
[14:28] 1490 tn BDAG 238 s.v. διατρίβω gives the meaning as “spend” when followed by an accusative τὸν χρόνον (ton cronon) which is the case here.
[14:28] 1491 tn Grk “no little (time)” (an idiom).
[15:1] 1492 sn That is, they came down from Judea to Antioch in Syria.
[15:1] 1493 tc Codex Bezae (D) and a few other witnesses have “and walk” here (i.e., instead of τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως [tw eqei tw Mwu>sew"] they read καὶ τῷ ἔθει τῷ Μωϋσέως περιπατῆτε [kai tw eqei tw Mwu>sew" peripathte]). This is a decidedly stronger focus on obedience to the Law. As well, D expands vv. 1-5 in various places with the overall effect of being “more sympathetic to the local tradition of the church at Jerusalem” while the Alexandrian witnesses are more sympathetic to Paul (TCGNT 377). Codex D is well known for having a significantly longer text in Acts, but modern scholarship is generally of the opinion that the text of D expands on the original wording of Acts, with a theological viewpoint that especially puts Peter in a more authoritarian light. The expansion in these five verses is in keeping with that motif even though Peter is not explicitly in view.
[15:1] sn Unless you are circumcised. These teachers from Judea were teaching that Gentiles could not be saved unless they kept the law of Moses in regard to circumcision. Thus according to them a Gentile had first to become a proselyte to Judaism, including circumcision, before one could become a Christian. This party is sometimes known (collectively) as Judaizers. They did not question that Gentiles could come into the community, but disagreed with Paul and Barnabas on what basis they could do so.
[15:2] 1494 tn Grk “no little argument and debate” (an idiom).
[15:2] 1495 tn Grk “they”; the referent (the church, or the rest of the believers at Antioch) has been specified to avoid confusion with the Judaizers mentioned in the preceding clause.
[15:2] 1496 tn Grk “go up to,” but in this context a meeting is implied.
[15:2] 1497 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[15:2] 1498 tn Or “point of controversy.” It is unclear whether this event parallels Gal 2:1-10 or that Gal 2 fits with Acts 11:30. More than likely Gal 2:1-10 is to be related to Acts 11:30.
[15:3] 1499 sn Phoenicia was an area along the Mediterranean coast north of Palestine in ancient Syria.
[15:3] 1500 tn L&N 33.201 indicates that ἐκδιηγέομαι (ekdihgeomai) means to provide detailed information in a systematic manner, “to inform, to relate, to tell fully.” “Relating at length” conveys this effectively in the present context.
[15:3] 1501 tn For ἐποίουν (epoioun) in this verse BDAG 839 s.v. ποιέω 2.c has “they brought joy to the members.”
[15:4] 1502 tn BDAG 761 s.v. παραδέχομαι 2 has “receive, accept” for the meaning here.
[15:4] 1503 tn Or “announced.”
[15:4] 1504 tn “They reported all the things God had done with them” – an identical phrase occurs in Acts 14:27. God is always the agent.
[15:5] 1505 sn See the note on Pharisee in 5:34.
[15:5] 1506 sn The Greek word used here (δεῖ, dei) is a strong term that expresses divine necessity. The claim is that God commanded the circumcision of Gentiles.
[15:5] 1507 tn Grk “them”; the referent (the Gentiles) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[15:6] 1509 tn The translation for ἰδεῖν (idein) in this verse is given by BDAG 279-80 s.v. εἶδον 3 as “deliberate concerning this matter.” A contemporary idiom would be to “look into” a matter.
[15:7] 1510 tn Or “discussion.” This term is repeated from v. 2.
[15:7] 1511 tn Or “long ago” (an idiom, literally “from ancient days”). According to L&N 67.26, “this reference to Peter having been chosen by God sometime before to bring the gospel to the Gentiles can hardly be regarded as a reference to ancient times, though some persons understand this to mean that God’s decision was made at the beginning of time. The usage of ἀφ᾿ ἡμερῶν ἀρχαίων is probably designed to emphasize the established nature of God’s decision for Peter to take the gospel to the Gentiles beginning with the centurion Cornelius. The fact that this was relatively early in the development of the church may also serve to explain the use of the idiom.”
[15:7] 1512 sn God chose. The theme of God’s sovereign choice is an important point, because 1st century Jews believed Israel’s unique position and customs were a reflection of God’s choice.
[15:7] 1514 tn Or “of the good news.”
[15:7] 1515 tn Grk “God chose among you from my mouth the Gentiles to hear the message of the gospel and to believe.” The sense of this sentence in Greek is difficult to render in English. The Greek verb ἐκλέγομαι (eklegomai, “choose”) normally takes a person or thing as a direct object; in this verse the verb has neither clearly stated. The translation understands the phrase “from my mouth,” referring to Peter, as a description of both who God chose and the task to be done. This coupled with the following statement about Gentiles hearing the message of the gospel leads to the more dynamic rendering in the translation.
[15:8] 1516 sn The expression who knows the heart means “who knows what people think.”
[15:8] 1517 tn Or “has borne witness.”
[15:8] 1518 sn By giving them…just as he did to us. The allusion is to the events of Acts 10-11, esp. 10:44-48 and Peter’s remarks in 11:15-18.
[15:9] 1519 tn BDAG 231 s.v. διακρίνω 1.b lists this passage under the meaning “to conclude that there is a difference, make a distinction, differentiate.”
[15:9] 1520 tn Or “purifying.”
[15:10] 1521 tn According to BDAG 793 s.v. πειράζω 2.c, “In Ac 15:10 the πειράζειν τὸν θεόν consists in the fact that after God’s will has been clearly made known through granting of the Spirit to the Gentiles (v. 8), some doubt and make trial to see whether God’s will really becomes operative.” All testing of God in Luke is negative: Luke 4:2; 11:16.
[15:10] 1522 sn A yoke is a wooden bar or frame that joins two animals like oxen or horses so that they can pull a wagon, plow, etc. together. Here it is used figuratively of the restriction that some in the early church wanted to place on Gentile converts to Christianity of observing the law of Moses and having males circumcised. The yoke is a decidedly negative image: Matt 23:4, but cf. Matt 11:29-30.
[15:10] 1523 tn Or “forefathers”; Grk “fathers.”
[15:11] 1525 tn Or “Jesus, just as they are.” BDAG 1016-17 s.v. τρόπος 1 translates καθ᾿ ὃν τρόπον (kaq’ Jon tropon) here as “in the same way as.”
[15:11] sn In the same way as they are. Here is an interesting reversal of the argument. Jews are saved by grace (without law), as Gentiles are.
[15:12] 1526 tn BDAG 922 s.v. σιγάω 1.a lists this passage under the meaning “say nothing, keep still, keep silent.”
[15:12] 1527 tn Here in connection with τέρατα (terata) the miraculous nature of these signs is indicated.
[15:13] 1528 tn BDAG 922 s.v. σιγάω 1.b lists this passage under the meaning “stop speaking, become silent.”
[15:13] 1529 tn Grk “answered, saying”; the redundant participle λέγων (legwn) has not been translated.
[15:14] 1530 sn Simeon is a form of the apostle Peter’s Aramaic name. James uses Peter’s “Jewish” name here.
[15:14] 1531 tn Or “reported,” “described.”
[15:14] 1532 tn BDAG 378 s.v. ἐπισκέπτομαι 3 translates this phrase in Acts 15:14, “God concerned himself about winning a people fr. among the nations.”
[15:14] 1533 tn Grk “to take,” but in the sense of selecting or choosing (accompanied by the preposition ἐκ [ek] plus a genitive specifying the group selected from) see Heb 5:1; also BDAG 584 s.v. λαμβάνω 6.
[15:14] 1534 sn In the Greek text the expression “from among the Gentiles” is in emphatic position.
[15:15] 1535 tn Grk “And the.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[15:15] 1536 sn The term agree means “match” or “harmonize with.” James’ point in the introduction argues that many of the OT prophets taught this. He gives one example (which follows).
[15:16] 1537 tn Grk “After these things.”
[15:16] 1538 sn The first person pronoun I refers to God and his activity. It is God who is doing this.
[15:16] 1539 tn Or more generally, “dwelling”; perhaps, “royal tent.” According to BDAG 928 s.v. σκηνή the word can mean “tent” or “hut,” or more generally “lodging” or “dwelling.” In this verse (a quotation from Amos 9:11) BDAG refers this to David’s ruined kingdom; it is possibly an allusion to a king’s tent (a royal tent). God is at work to reestablish David’s line (Acts 2:30-36; 13:32-39).
[15:16] 1540 tn BDAG 86 s.v. ἀνορθόω places this verb under the meaning “to build someth. up again after it has fallen, rebuild, restore,” but since ἀνοικοδομέω (anoikodomew, “rebuild”) has occurred twice in this verse already, “restore” is used here.
[15:17] 1541 tn Or “so that all other people.” The use of this term follows Amos 9:11 LXX.
[15:17] 1542 tn Here καί (kai) introduces an explanatory clause that explains the preceding phrase “the rest of humanity.” The clause introduced by καί (kai) could also be punctuated in English as a parenthesis.
[15:17] 1543 tn Or “all the nations” (in Greek the word for “nation” and “Gentile” is the same).
[15:17] sn Note the linkage back to v. 14 through the mention of Gentiles. What Simeon explained is what the OT text says would happen.
[15:17] 1544 tn Grk “all the Gentiles on whom my name has been called.” Based on well-attested OT usage, the passive of ἐπικαλέω (epikalew) here indicates God’s ownership (“all the Gentiles who belong to me”) or calling (“all the Gentiles whom I have called to be my own”). See L&N 11.28.
[15:17] 1545 sn A quotation from Amos 9:11-12 LXX. James demonstrated a high degree of cultural sensitivity when he cited a version of the text (the Septuagint, the Greek translation of the Old Testament) that Gentiles would use.
[15:18] 1546 sn Who makes these things known. The remark emphasizes how God’s design of these things reaches back to the time he declared them.
[15:18] 1547 sn An allusion to Isa 45:21.
[15:19] 1548 tn Or “I have decided,” “I think.” The verb κρίνω (krinw) has a far broader range of meaning than the often-used English verb “judge.” BDAG 568 s.v. κρίνω 3 places this use in Acts 15:19 in the category “judge, think, consider, look upon” followed by double accusative of object and predicate. However, many modern translations give the impression that a binding decision is being handed down by James: “it is my judgment” (NASB, NIV); “I have reached the decision” (NRSV). L&N 22.25, on the other hand, translate the phrase here “I think that we should not cause extra difficulty for those among the Gentiles.” This gives more the impression of an opinion than a binding decision. The resolution of this lies not so much in the lexical data as in how one conceives James’ role in the leadership of the Jerusalem church, plus the dynamics of the specific situation where the issue of Gentile inclusion in the church was being discussed. The major possibilities are: (1) James is handing down a binding decision to the rest of the church as the one who has ultimate authority to decide this matter; (2) James is offering his own personal opinion in the matter, which is not binding on the church; (3) James is voicing a consensus opinion of all the apostles and elders, although phrasing it as if it were his own; (4) James is making a suggestion to the rest of the leadership as to what course they should follow. In light of the difficulty in reconstructing the historical situation in detail, it is best to use a translation which maintains as many of the various options as possible. For this reason the translation “Therefore I conclude” has been used, leaving open the question whether in reaching this conclusion James is speaking only for himself or for the rest of the leadership.
[15:19] 1549 tn Or “trouble.” This term is a NT hapax legomenon (BDAG 775 s.v. παρενοχλέω).
[15:19] 1550 tn Or “among the nations” (in Greek the word for “nation” and “Gentile” is the same).
[15:20] 1551 tn The translation “to write a letter, to send a letter to” for ἐπιστέλλω (epistellw) is given in L&N 33.49.
[15:20] 1552 tn Three of the four prohibitions deal with food (the first, third and fourth) while one prohibition deals with behavior (the second, refraining from sexual immorality). Since these occur in the order they do, the translation “abstain from” is used to cover both sorts of activity (eating food items, immoral behavior).
[15:20] sn Telling them to abstain. These restrictions are not on matters of salvation, but are given as acts of sensitivity to their Jewish brethren, as v. 21 makes clear. Another example of such sensitivity is seen in 1 Cor 10:14-11:1.
[15:20] 1553 tn Or “polluted.”
[15:20] 1554 sn What has been strangled. That is, to refrain from eating animals that had been killed without having the blood drained from them. According to the Mosaic law (Lev 17:13-14), Jews were forbidden to eat flesh with the blood still in it (note the following provision in Acts 15:20, and from blood).
[15:21] 1555 tn Grk “from generations of old”; the translation “fr. ancient times” is given by BDAG 192 s.v. γενεά 3.b.
[15:21] 1556 tn The translation “read aloud” is used to indicate the actual practice; translating as “read” could be misunderstood to mean private, silent reading.
[15:21] 1557 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[15:22] 1558 tn BDAG 255 s.v. δοκέω 2.b.β lists this verse under the meaning “it seems best to me, I decide, I resolve.”
[15:22] 1559 sn Silas. See 2 Cor 1:19; 1 Thess 1:1; 2 Thess 1:1 (= Silvanus).
[15:22] 1560 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia).
[15:22] map For location see JP1 F2; JP2 F2; JP3 F2; JP4 F2.
[15:23] 1561 tn Grk “writing by their hand” (an idiom for sending a letter).
[15:23] 1562 tn Grk “The apostles.” The word “from” is not in the Greek text, but has been supplied to indicate the sender of the letter.
[15:23] 1563 tn Grk “brothers,” but “your” is supplied to specify the relationship, since without it “brothers” could be understood as vocative in English.
[15:23] 1564 tn Grk “to the brothers who are from the Gentiles.”
[15:23] 1565 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia).
[15:23] 1566 tn Grk “and Syria,” but καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[15:24] 1567 tn Here BDAG 990-91 s.v. ταράσσω 2 states, “Of mental confusion caused by false teachings ταρ. τινά Ac 15:24 (w. λόγοις foll.).”
[15:24] 1568 tn BDAG 71 s.v. ἀνασκευάζω describes this verb with a figurative meaning: “to cause inward distress, upset, unsettle.”
[15:24] 1570 tn Grk “by words”; L&N 25.231 translates the phrase “they troubled and upset you by what they said.”
[15:25] 1571 tn Grk “having become of one mind, we have decided.” This has been translated “we have unanimously decided” to reduce the awkwardness in English.
[15:25] 1572 tn BDAG 255 s.v. δοκέω 2.b.β lists this verse under the meaning “it seems best to me, I decide, I resolve.”
[15:26] 1573 tn Grk “men who”; but this can be misleading because in English the referent could be understood to be the men sent along with Barnabas and Paul rather than Barnabas and Paul themselves. This option does not exist in the Greek original, however, since ἀνθρώποις (anqrwpoi") is dative and must agree with “Barnabas and Paul,” while ἄνδρας (andra") is accusative. By omitting the word “men” from the translation here, it is clear in English that the phrase refers to the immediately preceding nouns “Barnabas and Paul.”
[15:26] 1574 tn Grk “who have risked their souls”; the equivalent English idiom is “risk one’s life.” The descriptions commend Barnabas and Paul as thoroughly trustworthy.
[15:26] 1575 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[15:27] 1576 tn This verb has been translated as an epistolary aorist.
[15:27] 1577 sn Judas and Silas were the “two witnesses” who would vouch for the truth of the recommendation.
[15:27] 1578 tn Grk “by means of word” (an idiom for a verbal report).
[15:28] 1579 tn This is the same expression translated “decided” in Acts 15:22, 25. BDAG 255 s.v. δοκέω 2.b.β lists “decide” as a possible gloss for this verse, and this translation would be consistent with the translation of the same expression in Acts 15:22, 25. However, the unusually awkward “the Holy Spirit and we have decided” would result. Given this approach, it would be more natural in English to say “We and the Holy Spirit have decided,” but changing the order removes the emphasis the Greek text gives to the Holy Spirit. Thus, although the similarity to the phrases in 15:22, 25 is obscured, it is better to use the alternate translation “it seems best to me” (also given by BDAG): “it seemed best to the Holy Spirit and to us.” Again the scope of agreement is highlighted.
[15:28] 1580 tn L&N 71.39 translates “indispensable (rules)” while BDAG 358 s.v. ἐπάναγκες has “the necessary things.”
[15:29] 1581 tn There is no specific semantic component in the Greek word εἰδωλόθυτος that means “meat” (see BDAG 280 s.v. εἰδωλόθυτος; L&N 5.15). The stem –θυτος means “sacrifice” (referring to an animal sacrificially killed) and thereby implies meat.
[15:29] 1582 tc Codex Bezae (D) and a few other witnesses lack the restriction “and from what has been strangled” (καὶ πνικτῶν, kai pniktwn), though the words are supported by a wide variety of early and important witnesses otherwise and should be considered authentic.
[15:29] sn What has been strangled. That is, to refrain from eating animals that had been killed without having the blood drained from them. According to the Mosaic law (Lev 17:13-14), Jews were forbidden to eat flesh with the blood still in it (note the preceding provision in this verse, and from blood).
[15:29] 1583 tc Codex Bezae (D) as well as 323 614 945 1739 1891 sa and other witnesses have after “sexual immorality” the following statement: “And whatever you do not want to happen to yourselves, do not do to another/others.” By adding this negative form of the Golden Rule, these witnesses effectively change the Apostolic Decree from what might be regarded as ceremonial restrictions into more ethical demands. The issues here are quite complicated, and beyond the scope of this brief note. Suffice it to say that D and its allies here are almost surely an expansion and alteration of the original text of Acts. For an excellent discussion of the exegetical and textual issues, see TCGNT 379-83.
[15:29] 1584 tn Grk “from which things keeping yourselves.” Because of the length and complexity of the Greek sentence, the relative pronoun (ὧν, |wn) has been replaced by a pronoun (“these things”) and a new English sentence begun. The participle διατηροῦντες (diathrounte") has been translated as a conditional adverbial participle (“if you keep yourselves”). See further L&N 13.153.
[15:29] 1585 tn The phrase ἔρρωσθε (errwsqe) may be understood as a stock device indicating a letter is complete (“good-bye,” L&N 33.24) or as a sincere wish that the persons involved may fare well (“may you fare well,” L&N 23.133).
[15:30] 1586 tn Or “sent away.”
[15:30] 1587 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia).
[15:30] 1588 tn Or “congregation” (referring to the group of believers).
[15:31] 1589 tn Grk “read it.” The translation “read aloud” is used to indicate the actual practice of public reading; translating as “read” could be misunderstood to mean private, silent, or individual reading.
[15:31] 1590 tn Grk “they”; the referent (the people) is specified in the translation for clarity.
[15:31] 1591 tn Or “at its encouraging message.”
[15:32] 1592 tn Here λόγου (logou) is singular. BDAG 599-600 s.v. λόγος 1.a.β has “in a long speech” for this phrase.
[15:33] 1593 tn Grk “And after.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[15:33] 1594 tn The word “there” is not in the Greek text, but is implied.
[15:34] 1595 tc A few
[15:35] 1596 sn Antioch was a city in Syria (not Antioch in Pisidia).
[15:35] 1597 sn This is a parenthetical note by the author.
[15:35] 1598 sn The word of the Lord is a technical expression in OT literature, often referring to a divine prophetic utterance (e.g., Gen 15:1, Isa 1:10, Jonah 1:1). In the NT it occurs 15 times: 3 times as ῥῆμα τοῦ κυρίου (rJhma tou kuriou; Luke 22:61, Acts 11:16, 1 Pet 1:25) and 12 times as λόγος τοῦ κυρίου (logo" tou kuriou; here and in v. 36; Acts 8:25; 13:44, 48, 49; 16:32; 19:10, 20; 1 Thess 1:8, 4:15; 2 Thess 3:1). As in the OT, this phrase focuses on the prophetic nature and divine origin of what has been said.
[15:36] 1599 tn Grk “Returning let us visit.” The participle ἐπιστρέψαντες (epistreyante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[15:36] 1600 tn See the note on the phrase “word of the Lord” in v. 35.
[15:36] 1601 tn BDAG 422 s.v. ἔχω 10.b has “how they are” for this phrase.
[15:38] 1602 tn BDAG 94 s.v. ἀξιόω 2.a has “he insisted (impf.) that they should not take him along” for this phrase.
[15:38] 1603 sn Pamphylia was a province in the southern part of Asia Minor. See Acts 13:13, where it was mentioned previously.
[15:39] 1604 tn Grk “There happened a sharp disagreement.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[15:39] 1605 tn BDAG 780 s.v. παροξυσμός 2 has “sharp disagreement” here; L&N 33.451 has “sharp argument, sharp difference of opinion.”
[15:39] 1606 tn Grk “taking along Mark sailed.” The participle παραλαβόντα (paralabonta) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[15:39] 1607 sn Cyprus is a large island in the Mediterranean off the south coast of Asia Minor.
[15:40] 1608 tn Or “committed.” BDAG 762 s.v. παραδίδωμι 2 gives “be commended by someone to the grace of the Lord” as the meaning for this phrase, although “give over” and “commit” are listed as alternatives for this category.
[15:40] 1609 tn Grk “by the brothers.” Here it it is highly probable that the entire congregation is in view, not just men, so the translation “brothers and sisters” has been used for the plural ἀδελφῶν (adelfwn),.
[15:41] 1610 sn Strengthening. See Acts 14:22; 15:32; 18:23.
[16:1] 1611 sn Derbe was a city in Lycaonia about 35 mi (60 km) southeast of Lystra. It was about 90 mi (145 km) from Tarsus.
[16:1] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2.
[16:1] 1612 sn Lystra was a city in Lycaonia about 25 mi (40 km) south of Iconium.
[16:1] map For location see JP1 E2; JP2 E2; JP3 E2.
[16:1] 1613 tn Grk “And behold, a disciple.” Here ἰδού (idou) has not been translated.
[16:1] 1614 tn L&N 31.103 translates this phrase “the son of a Jewish woman who was a believer.”
[16:1] 1615 sn His father was a Greek. Timothy was the offspring of a mixed marriage between a Jewish woman (see 2 Tim 1:5) and a Gentile man. On mixed marriages in Judaism, see Neh 13:23-27; Ezra 9:1-10:44; Mal 2:10-16; Jub. 30:7-17; m. Qiddushin 3.12; m. Yevamot 7.5.
[16:2] 1616 sn Lystra was a city in Lycaonia about 25 mi (40 km) south of Iconium.
[16:2] 1617 sn Iconium was a city in Lycaonia about 110 mi (175 km) east of Pisidian Antioch.
[16:2] 1618 tn For this sense of μαρτυρέω (marturew), see BDAG 618 s.v. 2.b.
[16:2] 1619 tn Grk “who was well spoken of by the brothers in Lystra and Iconium.” Because of the awkwardness in English of having two relative clauses follow one another (“who was a believer…who was well spoken of”) and the awkwardness of the passive verb (“was well spoken of”), the relative pronoun at the beginning of 16:2 (“who”) has been translated as a pronoun (“him”) and the construction converted from passive to active at the same time a new sentence was started in the translation.
[16:3] 1620 tn Grk “this one”; the referent (Timothy) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[16:3] 1621 tn Grk “and taking him he circumcised him.” The participle λαβών (labwn) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. Paul’s cultural sensitivity showed in his action here. He did not want Timothy’s lack of circumcision to become an issue (1 Cor 9:15-23).
[16:3] 1622 tn The verb περιέτεμεν (perietemen) here may be understood as causative (cf. ExSyn 411-12) if Paul did not personally perform the circumcision.
[16:3] 1623 tn Or “who lived in the area.”
[16:3] 1624 tn The anarthrous predicate nominative has been translated as qualitative (“Greek”) rather than indefinite (“a Greek”).
[16:3] sn His father was Greek. Under Jewish law at least as early as the 2nd century, a person was considered Jewish if his or her mother was Jewish. It is not certain whether such a law was in effect in the 1st century, but even if it was, Timothy would not have been accepted as fully Jewish because he was not circumcised.
[16:4] 1626 tn BDAG 762-63 s.v. παραδίδωμι 3 has “they handed down to them the decisions to observe Ac 16:4.”
[16:4] 1627 map For location see Map5 B1; Map6 F3; Map7 E2; Map8 F2; Map10 B3; JP1 F4; JP2 F4; JP3 F4; JP4 F4.
[16:4] 1628 tn Grk “for them”; the referent (Gentile believers) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[16:4] 1629 tn Or “observe” or “follow.”
[16:5] 1630 tn BDAG 437 s.v. ἡμέρα 2.c has “every day” for this phrase.
[16:6] 1631 sn Phrygia was a district in central Asia Minor west of Pisidia.
[16:6] 1632 sn Galatia refers to either (1) the region of the old kingdom of Galatia in the central part of Asia Minor (North Galatia), or (2) the Roman province of Galatia, whose principal cities in the 1st century were Ancyra and Pisidian Antioch (South Galatia). The exact extent and meaning of this area has been a subject of considerable controversy in modern NT studies.
[16:6] 1633 tn Or “forbidden.”
[16:6] 1635 tn Grk “Asia”; in the NT this always refers to the Roman province of Asia, made up of about one-third of the west and southwest end of modern Asia Minor. Asia lay to the west of the region of Phrygia and Galatia. The words “the province of” are supplied to indicate to the modern reader that this does not refer to the continent of Asia.
[16:7] 1636 tn BDAG 511 s.v. κατά B.1.b has “to Mysia” here.
[16:7] 1637 sn Mysia was a province in northwest Asia Minor.
[16:7] 1638 sn Bithynia was a province in northern Asia Minor northeast of Mysia.
[16:7] 1639 tn Or “permit”; see BDAG 269 s.v. ἐάω 1.
[16:7] 1640 tn The words “do this” are not in the Greek text, but are supplied for stylistic reasons, since English handles ellipses differently than Greek.
[16:8] 1641 tn Although the normal meaning for παρέρχομαι (parercomai) is “pass by, go by,” it would be difficult to get to Troas from where Paul and his companions were without going through rather than around Mysia. BDAG 776 s.v. παρέρχομαι 6 list some nonbiblical examples of the meaning “go through, pass through,” and give that meaning for the usage here.
[16:8] 1642 sn Mysia was a province in northwest Asia Minor.
[16:8] 1643 sn Troas was a port city (and surrounding region) on the northwest coast of Asia Minor, near ancient Troy.
[16:9] 1644 tn Grk “And a.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[16:9] 1645 tn The word “there” is not in the Greek text, but is implied.
[16:9] 1646 tn The participle λέγων (legwn) is redundant and has not been translated.
[16:9] 1647 tn Grk “Coming over.” The participle διαβάς (diabas) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:9] 1648 sn Macedonia was the Roman province of Macedonia in Greece.
[16:10] 1649 tn Grk “he”; the referent (Paul) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[16:10] 1651 sn Macedonia was the Roman province of Macedonia in Greece.
[16:10] 1652 tn Or “summoned.”
[16:11] 1653 tn BDAG 62 s.v. ἀνάγω 4, “as a nautical t.t. (ἀ. τὴν ναῦν put a ship to sea), mid. or pass. ἀνάγεσθαι to begin to go by boat, put out to sea.”
[16:11] 1654 sn Troas was a port city (and surrounding region) on the northwest coast of Asia Minor. See v. 8.
[16:11] 1655 tn BDAG 406 s.v. εὐθυδρομέω has “of a ship run a straight course” here; L&N 54.3 has “to sail a straight course, sail straight to.”
[16:11] 1656 sn Samothrace is an island in the northern part of the Aegean Sea.
[16:11] 1657 sn Neapolis was a seaport on the southern coast of Macedonia. It was 10 mi (16 km) from Philippi.
[16:12] 1658 map For location see JP1 C1; JP2 C1; JP3 C1; JP4 C1.
[16:12] 1659 tc ‡ Or perhaps, “a city in the first district” (there are a number of textual variants). L&N 1.85 follow the text of UBS4 and NA27 here: “In Ac 16:12…the Greek New Testament published by the United Bible Societies has adopted a conjectural emendation, since the more traditional text, πρώτη τῆς μερίδος, literally ‘first of the district,’ is not only misleading in meaning but does not reflect the historical fact that Philippi was a city in one of the four districts of Macedonia but was not a capital city.” The original text is probably πρώτη τῆς μερίδος (prwth th" merido", “first of that district”) as found in Ì74 א A C Ψ 33vid 36 81 323 945 1175 1891 pc. This has traditionally been translated to give the impression that Philippi was the capital city of the district, but it does not necessarily have to be translated this way. The translation of the article before μερίδος as “that” acknowledges that there were other districts in the province of Macedonia.
[16:12] 1660 sn Macedonia was the Roman province of Macedonia in Greece.
[16:12] 1661 sn A Roman colony was a city whose residents were regarded as Roman citizens, since such cities were originally colonized by citizens of Rome. From Troas to Philippi was 130 mi (208 km).
[16:13] 1662 tn Grk “and sitting down we began to speak.” The participle καθίσαντες (kaqisante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:13] 1663 tn The imperfect verb ἐλαλοῦμεν (elaloumen) has been translated as an ingressive imperfect.
[16:13] 1664 sn To the women. Apparently there were not enough Jews present in Philippi to have a synagogue (ten men would have been required to have one).
[16:13] 1665 tn The word “there” is not in the Greek text, but is implied.
[16:14] 1666 tn Grk “And a.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[16:14] 1667 tn On the term translated “a dealer in purple cloth” see BDAG 855 s.v. πορφυρόπωλις.
[16:14] 1668 sn Thyatira was a city in the province of Lydia in Asia Minor.
[16:14] 1669 tn The words “to us” are not in the Greek text, but are implied. Direct objects in Greek were often omitted when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[16:14] 1670 tn Although BDAG 880 s.v. προσέχω 2.b gives the meaning “pay attention to” here, this could be misunderstood by the modern English reader to mean merely listening intently. The following context, however, indicates that Lydia responded positively to Paul’s message, so the verb here was translated “to respond.”
[16:14] sn Lydia is one of several significant women in Acts (see 17:4, 12, 34; 18:20).
[16:15] 1671 tn Grk “urged us, saying.” The participle λέγουσα (legousa) is redundant in English and has not been translated.
[16:15] 1672 tn This is a first class condition in Greek, with the statement presented as real or true for the sake of the argument.
[16:15] 1673 tn Or “faithful to the Lord.” BDAG 821 s.v. πίστος 2 states concerning this verse, “Of one who confesses the Christian faith believing or a believer in the Lord, in Christ, in God πιστ. τῷ κυρίῳ Ac 16:15.” L&N 11.17 has “one who is included among the faithful followers of Christ – ‘believer, Christian, follower.’”
[16:15] 1674 tn Although BDAG 759 s.v. παραβιάζομαι has “urge strongly, prevail upon,” in contemporary English “persuade” is a more frequently used synonym for “prevail upon.”
[16:16] 1675 tn Grk “Now it happened that.” The introductory phrase ἐγένετο (egeneto, “it happened that”), common in Luke (69 times) and Acts (54 times), is redundant in contemporary English and has not been translated.
[16:16] 1676 tn Or “who had a spirit of divination”; Grk “who had a spirit of Python.” According to BDAG 896-97 s.v. πύθων, originally Πύθων (Puqwn) was the name of the serpent or dragon that guarded the Delphic oracle. According to Greek mythology, it lived at the foot of Mount Parnassus and was killed by Apollo. From this, the word came to designate a person who was thought to have a spirit of divination. Pagan generals, for example, might consult someone like this. So her presence here suggests a supernatural encounter involving Paul and her “spirit.” W. Foerster, TDNT 6:920, connects the term with ventriloquism but states: “We must assume, however, that for this girl, as for those mentioned by Origen…, the art of ventriloquism was inseparably connected with a (supposed or authentic) gift of soothsaying.” It should also be noted that if the girl in question here were only a ventriloquist, the exorcism performed by Paul in v. 18 would not have been effective.
[16:16] 1677 tn Grk “who.” Because of the awkwardness in English of having two relative clauses follow one another (“who had a spirit…who brought her owners a great profit”) the relative pronoun here (“who”) has been translated as a pronoun (“she”) and a new sentence begun in the translation.
[16:16] 1679 tn On this term see BDAG 616 s.v. μαντεύομαι. It was used of those who gave oracles.
[16:17] 1680 tn Grk “crying out, saying”; the participle λέγουσα (legousa) is redundant in English and has not been translated. The imperfect verb ἔκραζεν (ekrazen) has been translated as a progressive imperfect.
[16:17] 1681 tn Grk “slaves.” See the note on the word “servants” in 2:18. The translation “servants” was used here because in this context there appears to be more emphasis on the activity of Paul and his companions (“proclaiming to you the way of salvation”) than on their status as “slaves of the Most High God.”
[16:17] 1682 tn Or “a way.” The grammar of this phrase is a bit ambiguous. The phrase in Greek is ὁδὸν σωτηρίας (Jodon swthria"). Neither the head noun nor the genitive noun has the article; this is in keeping with Apollonius’ Canon (see ExSyn 239-40). Since both nouns are anarthrous, this construction also fits Apollonius’ Corollary (see ExSyn 250-54); since the genitive noun is abstract it is most naturally qualitative, so the head noun could either be definite or indefinite without being unusual as far as the grammar is concerned. Luke’s usage of ὁδός elsewhere is indecisive as far as this passage is concerned. However, when one looks at the historical background it is clear that (1) the woman is shut up (via exorcism) not because her testimony is false but because of its source (analogous to Jesus’ treatment of demons perhaps), and (b) “the way” is a par excellence description of the new faith throughout Acts. It thus seems that at least in Luke’s presentation “the way of salvation” is the preferred translation.
[16:17] 1683 sn Proclaiming to you the way of salvation. The remarks were an ironic recognition of Paul’s authority, but he did not desire such a witness, possibly for fear of confusion. Her expression the Most High God might have been understood as Zeus by the audience.
[16:18] 1684 tn Grk “becoming greatly annoyed.” The participle διαπονηθείς (diaponhqei") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. The aorist has been translated as an ingressive aorist (entry into a state or condition). See BDAG 235 s.v. διαπονέομαι.
[16:18] 1685 tn Grk “and turning.” The participle ἐπιστρέψας (epistreya") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:18] 1686 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[16:18] 1687 tn BDAG 1102-3 s.v. ὥρα 2.c has “at that very time, at once, instantly” for the usage in this verse.
[16:19] 1689 tn On this use of ἐργασία (ergasia), see BDAG 390 s.v. 4. It is often the case that destructive practices and commerce are closely tied together.
[16:19] 1690 tn Grk “was gone, seizing.” The participle ἐπιλαβόμενοι (epilabomenoi) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:19] 1691 tn On the term ἕλκω ({elkw) see BDAG 318 s.v. 1.
[16:20] 1692 tn Grk “And when.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[16:20] 1693 tn Grk “having brought them.” The participle ἐπιλαβόμενοι (epilabomenoi) has been taken temporally. It is also possible in English to translate this participle as a finite verb: “they brought them before the magistrates and said.”
[16:20] 1694 tn BDAG 309 s.v. ἐκταράσσω has “agitate, cause trouble to, throw into confusion” for the meaning of this verb.
[16:20] 1695 tn Grk “being Jews, and they are proclaiming.” The participle ὑπάρχοντες (Juparconte") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:21] 1696 tn Grk “proclaiming,” but in relation to customs, “advocating” is a closer approximation to the meaning.
[16:21] 1697 tn Or “acknowledge.”
[16:21] 1698 sn Customs that are not lawful for us to accept or practice. Ironically, the charges are similar to those made against Jesus in Luke 23:2, where Jews argued he was “twisting” their customs. The charge has three elements: (1) a racial element (Jewish); (2) a social element (unlawful); and (3) a traditional element (not their customs).
[16:21] 1699 tn Grk “we being Romans.” The participle οὖσιν (ousin) has been translated as a causal adverbial participle.
[16:22] 1700 tn L&N 39.50 has “the crowd joined the attack against them” for συνεπέστη (sunepesth) in this verse.
[16:22] 1701 tn Grk “tearing the clothes off them, the magistrates ordered.” The participle περιρήξαντες (perirhxante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. Although it may be possible to understand the aorist active participle περιρήξαντες in a causative sense (“the magistrates caused the clothes to be torn off Paul and Silas”) in the mob scene that was taking place, it is also possible that the magistrates themselves actively participated. This act was done to prepare them for a public flogging (2 Cor 11:25; 1 Thess 2:2).
[16:22] 1702 tn Grk “off them”; the referents (Paul and Silas) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[16:22] 1703 tn The infinitive ῥαβδίζειν (rJabdizein) means “to beat with rods or sticks” (as opposed to fists or clubs, BDAG 902 s.v. ῥαβδίζω).
[16:23] 1704 tn Grk “Having inflicted many blows on them.” The participle ἐπιθέντες (epiqente") has been taken temporally. BDAG 384 s.v. ἐπιτίθημι 1.a.β has “inflict blows upon someone” for this expression, but in this context it is simpler to translate in English as “they had beaten them severely.”
[16:23] 1705 tn Grk “commanding.” The participle παραγγείλαντες (parangeilante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:24] 1707 tn L&N 6.21 has “stocks” for εἰς τὸ ξύλον (ei" to xulon) here, as does BDAG 685 s.v. ξύλον 2.b. However, it is also possible (as mentioned in L&N 18.12) that this does not mean “stocks” but a block of wood (a log or wooden column) in the prison to which prisoners’ feet were chained or tied. Such a possibility is suggested by v. 26, where the “bonds” (“chains”?) of the prisoners loosened.
[16:25] 1708 tn Grk “praying, were singing.” The participle προσευχόμενοι (proseucomenoi) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:25] 1709 sn Praying and singing hymns to God. Tertullian said, “The legs feel nothing in the stocks when the heart is in heaven” (To the Martyrs 2; cf. Rom 5:3; Jas 1:2; 1 Pet 5:6). The presence of God means the potential to be free (cf. v. 26).
[16:25] 1710 tn The words “the rest of” are not in the Greek text, but are implied.
[16:26] 1711 tn Or perhaps, “chains.” The translation of τὰ δεσμά (ta desma) is to some extent affected by the understanding of ξύλον (xulon, “stocks”) in v. 24. It is possible (as mentioned in L&N 18.12) that this does not mean “stocks” but a block of wood (a log or wooden column) in the prison to which prisoners’ feet were chained or tied.
[16:27] 1712 tn L&N 23.75 has “had awakened” here. It is more in keeping with contemporary English style, however, to keep the two verbal ideas parallel in terms of tense (“when the jailer woke up and saw”) although logically the second action is subsequent to the first.
[16:27] 1713 tn The additional semantic component “standing” is supplied (“standing open”) to convey a stative nuance in English.
[16:27] 1714 sn Was about to kill himself. The jailer’s penalty for failing to guard the prisoners would have been death, so he contemplated saving the leaders the trouble (see Acts 12:19; 27:42).
[16:28] 1716 tn Grk “But Paul called out with a loud voice, saying.” The dative phrase μεγάλῃ φωνῇ (megalh fwnh) has been simplified as an English adverb (“loudly”), and the participle λέγων (legwn) has not been translated since it is redundant in English.
[16:28] 1717 sn Do not harm yourself. Again the irony is that Paul is the agent through whom the jailer is spared.
[16:29] 1718 tn Grk “he”; the referent (the jailer) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[16:29] 1719 tn Or “and prostrated himself.”
[16:29] sn Fell down. The earthquake and the freeing of the prisoners showed that God’s power was present. Such power could only be recognized. The open doors opened the jailer’s heart.
[16:30] 1720 tn Grk “And bringing them outside, he asked.” The participle προαγαγών (proagagwn) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun by supplying the conjunction “then” to indicate the logical sequence.
[16:30] 1721 tn The Greek term (δεῖ, dei) is used by Luke to represent divine necessity.
[16:31] 1723 sn Here the summary term of response is a call to believe. In this context it refers to trusting the sovereign God’s power to deliver, which events had just pictured for the jailer.
[16:31] 1724 tc The majority of
[16:32] 1725 tn Grk “And they.” Here καί (kai) has been translated as “then” to indicate the continuity with the preceding verse. Greek style often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” but English style does not.
[16:32] 1726 sn The word of the Lord is a technical expression in OT literature, often referring to a divine prophetic utterance (e.g., Gen 15:1, Isa 1:10, Jonah 1:1). In the NT it occurs 15 times: 3 times as ῥῆμα τοῦ κυρίου (rJhma tou kuriou; Luke 22:61, Acts 11:16, 1 Pet 1:25) and 12 times as λόγος τοῦ κυρίου (logo" tou kuriou; here and in Acts 8:25; 13:44, 48, 49; 15:35, 36; 19:10, 20; 1 Thess 1:8, 4:15; 2 Thess 3:1). As in the OT, this phrase focuses on the prophetic nature and divine origin of what has been said.
[16:33] 1727 tn Grk “And at.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[16:33] 1728 tn Grk “taking them…he washed.” The participle παραλαβών (paralabwn) has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:33] 1729 tn On this phrase BDAG 603 s.v. λούω 1 gives a literal translation as “by washing he freed them from the effects of the blows.”
[16:33] 1730 tn Here καί (kai) has been translated as “then” to indicate the logical sequence.
[16:33] 1731 sn All his family. It was often the case in the ancient world that conversion of the father led to the conversion of all those in the household.
[16:33] 1732 tn Or “immediately.”
[16:34] 1733 tn Grk “He”; the referent (the jailer) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[16:34] 1734 tn Grk “placed [food] on the table” (a figurative expression). Since the actual word for food is not specified, it would also be possible to translate “set a meal before them,” but since this is taking place in the middle of the night, the preparations necessary for a full meal would probably not have been made. More likely Paul and Silas were given whatever was on hand that needed little or no preparation.
[16:34] 1735 tn Or “he was overjoyed.”
[16:34] 1736 tn The translation “come to believe” reflects more of the resultative nuance of the perfect tense here.
[16:34] 1737 tn The phrase “together with his entire household” is placed at the end of the English sentence so that it refers to both the rejoicing and the belief. A formal equivalence translation would have “and he rejoiced greatly with his entire household that he had come to believe in God,” but the reference to the entire household being baptized in v. 33 presumes that all in the household believed.
[16:35] 1738 tn The translation “day is breaking” for ἡμέρα γίνεται (Jhmera ginetai) in this verse is given by BDAG 436 s.v. ἡμέρα 1.a.
[16:35] 1739 tn On the term translated “magistrates,” see BDAG 947-48 s.v. στρατηγός 1. These city leaders were properly called duoviri, but were popularly known as praetors (στρατηγοί, strathgoi). They were the chief officials of Philippi. The text leaves the impression that they came to the decision to release Paul and Silas independently. God was at work everywhere.
[16:35] 1740 tn On the term ῥαβδοῦχος (rJabdouco") see BDAG 902 s.v. The term was used of the Roman lictor and roughly corresponds to contemporary English “constable, policeman.”
[16:36] 1741 tn The word “saying” is not in the Greek text, but is implied; it is necessary in English because the content of what the jailer said to Paul and Silas is not the exact message related to him by the police officers, but is a summary with his own additions.
[16:36] 1742 tn The word “orders” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects in Greek were often omitted when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[16:36] 1743 tn Grk “So coming out now go in peace.” The participle ἐξελθόντες (exelqonte") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:37] 1744 tn Grk “to them”; the referent (the police officers) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[16:37] 1745 tn Grk “Having us beaten in public.” The participle δείραντες (deirante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:37] 1746 tn Or “in public, uncondemned.” BDAG 35 s.v. ἀκατάκριτος has “uncondemned, without due process” for this usage.
[16:37] 1747 tn The participle ὑπάρχοντας (Juparconta") has been translated as a concessive adverbial participle.
[16:37] 1748 tn The word “us” is not in the Greek text, but is implied. Direct objects were often omitted in Greek when clear from the context, but must be supplied for the modern English reader.
[16:37] 1749 tn L&N 28.71 has “send us away secretly” for this verse.
[16:37] 1750 tn Grk “But they.”
[16:37] 1751 sn They themselves must come and escort us out! Paul was asking for the injustice he and Silas suffered to be symbolically righted. It was a way of publicly taking their actions off the record and showing the apostles’ innocence, a major public statement. Note the apology given in v. 39.
[16:38] 1752 tn Grk “heard they”; the referents (Paul and Silas) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[16:38] 1753 sn Roman citizens. This fact was disturbing to the officials because due process was a right for a Roman citizen, well established in Roman law. To flog a Roman citizen was considered an abomination. Such punishment was reserved for noncitizens.
[16:39] 1754 tn Grk “and coming, they apologized.” The participle ἐλθόντες (elqonte") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[16:39] 1755 tn Grk “and after.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun.
[16:39] 1756 tn The verb ἐρώτων (erwtwn) has been translated as an iterative imperfect; the English adverb “repeatedly” brings out the iterative force in the translation.
[16:40] 1757 tn “Then” is not in the Greek text, but has been supplied to clarify the logical sequence in the translation.
[17:1] 1758 tn BDAG 250 s.v. διοδεύω 1 has “go, travel through” for this verse.
[17:1] 1759 sn Amphipolis. The capital city of the southeastern district of Macedonia (BDAG 55 s.v. ᾿Αμφίπολις). It was a military post. From Philippi this was about 33 mi (53 km).
[17:1] 1760 sn Apollonia was a city in Macedonia about 27 mi (43 km) west southwest of Amphipolis.
[17:1] 1761 sn Thessalonica (modern Salonica) was a city in Macedonia about 33 mi (53 km) west of Apollonia. It was the capital of Macedonia. The road they traveled over was called the Via Egnatia. It is likely they rode horses, given their condition in Philippi. The implication of v. 1 is that the two previously mentioned cities lacked a synagogue.
[17:1] map For location see JP1 C1; JP2 C1; JP3 C1; JP4 C1.
[17:1] 1762 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[17:2] 1763 tn Grk “he went in to them”; the referent (the Jews in the synagogue) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[17:2] 1764 tn Although the word διελέξατο (dielexato; from διαλέγομαι, dialegomai) is frequently translated “reasoned,” “disputed,” or “argued,” this sense comes from its classical meaning where it was used of philosophical disputation, including the Socratic method of questions and answers. However, there does not seem to be contextual evidence for this kind of debate in Acts 17:2. As G. Schrenk (TDNT 2:94-95) points out, “What is at issue is the address which any qualified member of a synagogue might give.” Other examples of this may be found in the NT in Matt 4:23 and Mark 1:21.
[17:3] 1765 tn BDAG 772 s.v. παρατίθημι 2.b has “demonstrate, point out” here.
[17:3] 1766 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[17:3] sn See the note on Christ in 2:31.
[17:3] 1767 sn The Christ had to suffer and to rise from the dead. These two points (suffering and resurrection) would have been among the more controversial aspects of Paul’s messianic preaching. The term translated “had to” (δεῖ, dei) shows how divine design and scripture corresponded here.
[17:3] 1768 tn The Greek words used here (καὶ ὅτι, kai {oti, “and that”) mark the switch from indirect to direct discourse. Contemporary English requires the use of an introductory verb of speaking or saying to make this transition.
[17:3] 1769 tn Or “Messiah”; both “Christ” (Greek) and “Messiah” (Hebrew and Aramaic) mean “one who has been anointed.”
[17:3] sn See the note on Christ in 2:31. The identification of the Messiah with Jesus indicates Paul was proclaiming the fulfillment of messianic promise.
[17:4] 1770 tn Or “convinced.”
[17:4] 1771 tn Or “a large crowd.”
[17:4] 1772 tn Or “of devout Greeks,” but this is practically a technical term for the category called God-fearers, Gentiles who worshiped the God of Israel and in many cases kept the Mosaic law, but did not take the final step of circumcision necessary to become a proselyte to Judaism. See further K. G. Kuhn, TDNT 6:732-34, 743-44. Luke frequently mentions such people (Acts 13:43, 50; 16:14; 17:17; 18:7).
[17:4] 1773 tn Grk “not a few”; this use of negation could be misleading to the modern English reader, however, and so has been translated as “quite a few” (which is the actual meaning of the expression).
[17:5] 1774 tn Grk “becoming jealous.” The participle ζηλώσαντες (zhlwsante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. So elsewhere in Acts (5:17; 7:9; 13:45).
[17:5] 1775 tn Literally ἀγοραῖος (agoraio") refers to the crowd in the marketplace, although BDAG 14-15 s.v. ἀγοραῖος 1 gives the meaning, by extension, as “rabble.” Such a description is certainly appropriate in this context. L&N 15.127 translates the phrase “worthless men from the streets.”
[17:5] 1776 tn On this term, which is a NT hapax legomenon, see BDAG 745 s.v. ὀχλοποιέω.
[17:5] 1777 tn BDAG 458 s.v. θορυβέω 1 has “set the city in an uproar, start a riot in the city” for the meaning of ἐθορύβουν (eqoruboun) in this verse.
[17:5] 1778 sn The attack took place at Jason’s house because this was probably the location of the new house church.
[17:5] 1779 tn Grk “them”; the referents (Paul and Silas) have been specified in the translation for clarity.
[17:5] 1780 tn BDAG 223 s.v. δῆμος 2 has “in a Hellenistic city, a convocation of citizens called together for the purpose of transacting official business, popular assembly προάγειν εἰς τὸν δ. Ac 17:5.”
[17:6] 1781 tn See BDAG 977-78 s.v. σύρω on this verb. It was used in everyday speech of dragging in fish by a net, or dragging away someone’s (presumably) dead body (Paul in Acts 14:19).
[17:6] 1782 tn L&N 37.93 defines πολιτάρχης (politarch") as “a public official responsible for administrative matters within a town or city and a member of the ruling council of such a political unit – ‘city official’” (see also BDAG 845 s.v.).
[17:6] 1783 tn Or “rebellion.” BDAG 72 s.v. ἀναστατόω has “disturb, trouble, upset,” but in light of the references in the following verse to political insurrection, “stirred up rebellion” would also be appropriate.
[17:6] 1784 tn Or “the empire.” This was a way of referring to the Roman empire (BDAG 699 s.v. οἰκουμένη 2.b).
[17:6] sn Throughout the world. Note how some of those present had knowledge of what had happened elsewhere. Word about Paul and his companions and their message was spreading.
[17:7] 1785 tn Grk “whom.” Because of the awkwardness in English of having two relative clauses follow one another (“who have stirred up trouble…whom Jason has welcomed”) the relative pronoun here (“whom”) has been replaced by the conjunction “and,” creating a clause that is grammatically coordinate but logically subordinate in the translation.
[17:7] 1786 tn Grk “and they.” Because of the length of the Greek sentence, the conjunction καί (kai) has not been translated here. Instead a new English sentence is begun.
[17:7] 1787 tn Or “the emperor’s” (“Caesar” is a title for the Roman emperor).
[17:7] 1788 tn The word “named” is not in the Greek text, but is supplied for clarity.
[17:7] 1789 sn Acting…saying…Jesus. The charges are serious, involving sedition (Luke 23:2). If the political charges were true, Rome would have to react.
[17:8] 1790 tn Grk “They troubled the crowd and the city officials”; but this could be understood to mean “they bothered” or “they annoyed.” In reality the Jewish instigators managed to instill doubt and confusion into both the mob and the officials by their false charges of treason. Verse 8 suggests the charges raised again Paul, Silas, Jason, and the others were false.
[17:8] 1791 tn L&N 37.93 defines πολιτάρχης (politarch") as “a public official responsible for administrative matters within a town or city and a member of the ruling council of such a political unit – ‘city official.’”
[17:9] 1792 tn Grk “And after.” Because of the difference between Greek style, which often begins sentences or clauses with “and,” and English style, which generally does not, καί (kai) has not been translated here.
[17:9] 1793 tn Grk “they”; the referent (the city officials) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[17:9] 1794 tn That is, “a payment” or “a pledge of security” (BDAG 472 s.v. ἱκανός 1) for which “bail” is the most common contemporary English equivalent.
[17:10] 1795 sn Berea (alternate spelling in NRSV Beroea; Greek Beroia) was a very old city in Macedonia on the river Astraeus about 45 mi (75 km) west of Thessalonica.
[17:10] map For location see JP1 C1; JP2 C1; JP3 C1; JP4 C1.
[17:10] 1796 tn Grk “who arriving there, went to.” Because of the length and complexity of the Greek sentence, the relative pronoun (οἵτινες, Joitine") has been left untranslated and a new English sentence begun. The participle παραγενόμενοι (paragenomenoi) has been taken temporally.
[17:10] 1797 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[17:11] 1798 tn Grk “These”; the referent (the Jews in the synagogue at Berea) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[17:11] 1799 tn Or “more willing to learn.” L&N 27.48 and BDAG 404 s.v. εὐγενής 2 both use the term “open-minded” here. The point is that they were more receptive to Paul’s message.
[17:11] 1800 sn Thessalonica was a city in Macedonia (modern Salonica).
[17:11] map For location see JP1 C1; JP2 C1; JP3 C1; JP4 C1.
[17:11] 1801 tn Or “willingly,” “readily”; Grk “with all eagerness.”
[17:11] 1802 tn Grk “who received.” Here the relative pronoun (“who”) has been translated as a pronoun (“they”) preceded by a semicolon, which is less awkward in contemporary English than a relative clause at this point.
[17:11] 1803 tn This verb (BDAG 66 s.v. ἀνακρίνω 1) refers to careful examination.
[17:11] 1804 tn BDAG 437 s.v. ἡμέρα 2.c has “every day” for this phrase in this verse.
[17:12] 1805 tn Grk “not a few”; this use of negation could be misleading to the modern English reader, however, and so has been translated as “quite a few” (which is the actual meaning of the expression).
[17:12] 1806 tn Or “respected.”
[17:13] 1807 sn Thessalonica was a city in Macedonia (modern Salonica).
[17:13] 1808 tn Grk “that the word of God had also been proclaimed by Paul.” This passive construction has been converted to an active one in the translation for stylistic reasons.
[17:13] 1809 sn Berea (alternate spelling in NRSV Beroea; Greek Beroia) was a very old city in Macedonia on the river Astraeus about 45 mi (75 km) from Thessalonica.
[17:13] 1810 tn BDAG 911 s.v. σαλεύω 2 has “incite” for σαλεύοντες (saleuonte") in Acts 17:13.
[17:13] sn Inciting. Ironically, it was the Jews who were disturbing the peace, not the Christians.
[17:13] 1811 tn Or “stirring up” (BDAG 990-91 s.v. ταράσσω 2). The point is the agitation of the crowds.
[17:14] 1812 tn Grk “to the sea.” Here ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν ({ew" epi thn qalassan) must mean “to the edge of the sea,” that is, “to the coast.” Since there is no mention of Paul taking a ship to Athens, he presumably traveled overland. The journey would have been about 340 mi (550 km).
[17:14] 1813 tn Grk “remained there”; the referent (Berea) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[17:15] 1814 map For location see JP1 C2; JP2 C2; JP3 C2; JP4 C2.
[17:15] 1815 sn They left. See 1 Thess 3:1-2, which shows they went from here to Thessalonica.
[17:16] 1816 map For location see JP1 C2; JP2 C2; JP3 C2; JP4 C2.
[17:16] 1817 tn Grk “greatly upset within him,” but the words “within him” were not included in the translation because they are redundant in English. See L&N 88.189. The term could also be rendered “infuriated.”
[17:16] sn His spirit was greatly upset. See Rom 1:18-32 for Paul’s feelings about idolatry. Yet he addressed both Jews and Gentiles with tact and reserve.
[17:16] 1818 tn Or “when he saw.” The participle θεωροῦντος (qewrounto") has been translated as a causal adverbial participle; it could also be translated as temporal.
[17:17] 1819 tn Although the word διελέξατο (dielexato; from διαλέγομαι, dialegomai) is frequently translated “reasoned,” “disputed,” or “argued,” this sense comes from its classical meaning where it was used of philosophical disputation, including the Socratic method of questions and answers. However, there does not seem to be contextual evidence for this kind of debate in Acts 17:17. As G. Schrenk (TDNT 2:94-95) points out, “What is at issue is the address which any qualified member of a synagogue might give.” Other examples of this may be found in the NT in Matt 4:23 and Mark 1:21.
[17:17] 1820 tn Or “and the devout,” but this is practically a technical term for the category called God-fearers, Gentiles who worshiped the God of Israel and in many cases kept the Mosaic law, but did not take the final step of circumcision necessary to become a proselyte to Judaism. See further K. G. Kuhn, TDNT 6:732-34, 743-44, and the note on the phrase “God-fearing Greeks” in 17:4.
[17:17] 1821 sn See the note on synagogue in 6:9.
[17:17] 1822 tn BDAG 437 s.v. ἡμέρα 2.c has “every day” for this phrase in this verse.
[17:18] 1823 sn An Epicurean was a follower of the philosophy of Epicurus, who founded a school in Athens about 300
[17:18] 1824 sn A Stoic was a follower of the philosophy founded by Zeno (342-270
[17:18] 1825 tn BDAG 956 s.v. συμβάλλω 1 has “converse, confer” here.
[17:18] 1827 tn Or “ignorant show-off.” The traditional English translation of σπερμολόγος (spermologo") is given in L&N 33.381 as “foolish babbler.” However, an alternate view is presented in L&N 27.19, “(a figurative extension of meaning of a term based on the practice of birds in picking up seeds) one who acquires bits and pieces of relatively extraneous information and proceeds to pass them off with pretense and show – ‘ignorant show-off, charlatan.’” A similar view is given in BDAG 937 s.v. σπερμολόγος: “in pejorative imagery of persons whose communication lacks sophistication and seems to pick up scraps of information here and there scrapmonger, scavenger…Engl. synonyms include ‘gossip’, ‘babbler’, chatterer’; but these terms miss the imagery of unsystematic gathering.”
[17:18] 1828 tn The meaning of this phrase is not clear. Literally it reads “strange deities” (see BDAG 210 s.v. δαιμόνιον 1). The note of not being customary is important. In the ancient world what was new was suspicious. The plural δαιμονίων (daimoniwn, “deities”) shows the audience grappling with Paul’s teaching that God was working through Jesus.
[17:18] 1829 sn This is a parenthetical note by the author.
[17:19] 1830 tn Grk “him”; the referent (Paul) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[17:19] 1831 tn Or “to the council of the Areopagus.” See also the term in v. 22.
[17:19] sn The Areopagus has been traditionally understood as reference to a rocky hill near the Acropolis in Athens, although this place may well have been located in the marketplace at the foot of the hill (L&N 93.412; BDAG 129 s.v. ῎Αρειος πάγος). This term does not refer so much to the place, however, as to the advisory council of Athens known as the Areopagus, which dealt with ethical, cultural, and religious matters, including the supervision of education and controlling the many visiting lecturers. Thus it could be translated the council of the Areopagus. See also the term in v. 22.
[17:20] 1832 tn BDAG 684 s.v. ξενίζω 2 translates the substantival participle ξενίζοντα (xenizonta) as “astonishing things Ac 17:20.”
[17:20] 1833 tn Grk “these things”; but since the referent (“surprising things”) is so close, the repetition of “these things” sounds redundant in English, so the pronoun “they” was substituted in the translation.
[17:21] 1834 tn The imperfect verb ηὐκαίρουν (hukairoun) has been translated as a customary or habitual imperfect.
[17:21] 1835 tn BDAG 406-7 s.v. εὐκαιρέω has “used to spend their time in nothing else than telling Ac 17:21.”
[17:21] 1836 sn This is a parenthetical note by the author. The reference to newness may be pejorative.
[17:22] 1837 tn Grk “standing…said.” The participle ζηλώσαντες (zhlwsante") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style.
[17:22] 1838 tn The term δεισιδαιμονεστέρους (deisidaimonesterou") is difficult. On the one hand it can have the positive sense of “devout,” but on the other hand it can have the negative sense of “superstitious” (BDAG 216 s.v. δεισιδαίμων). As part of a laudatory introduction (the technical rhetorical term for this introduction was capatatio), the term is probably positive here. It may well be a “backhanded” compliment, playing on the ambiguity.
[17:22] 1839 tn BDAG 513 s.v. κατά B.6 translates the phrase κατὰ πάντα (kata panta) as “in all respects.”
[17:23] 1840 tn Or “your sanctuaries.” L&N 53.54 gives “sanctuary” (place of worship) as an alternate meaning for the word σεβάσματα (sebasmata).
[17:23] 1841 tn Grk “on which was written,” but since it would have been carved in stone, it is more common to speak of an “inscription” in English. To simplify the English the relative construction with a passive verb (“on which was inscribed”) was translated as a prepositional phrase with a substantive (“inscription”).
[17:23] 1842 tn BDAG 13 s.v. ἀγνοέω 1.b has “Abs. ὅ ἀγνοοῦντες εὐσεβεῖτε what you worship without knowing it (on the subject matter Maximus Tyr. 11, 5e: all sorts of philosophers ἴσασιν οὐκ ἑκόντες καὶ λέγουσιν ἄκοντες sc. τὸ θεῖον = they know and name God without intending to do so) Ac 17:23.” Paul, in typical Jewish Christian style, informs them of the true God, of whom their idols are an ignorant reflection.
[17:24] 1843 tn Grk “all the things that are in it.” The speech starts with God as Creator, like 14:15.
[17:24] 1844 tn Or “because he is.” The participle ὑπάρχων (Juparcwn) could be either adjectival, modifying οὗτος (Joutos, “who is Lord…”) or adverbial of cause (“because he is Lord…”). Since the participle διδούς (didou") in v. 25 appears to be clearly causal in force, it is preferable to understand ὑπάρχων as adjectival in this context.
[17:24] 1845 sn On the statement does not live in temples made by human hands compare Acts 7:48. This has implications for idols as well. God cannot be represented by them or, as the following clause also suggests, served by human hands.
[17:25] 1846 tn L&N 57.45 has “nor does he need anything more that people can supply by working for him.”
[17:25] 1847 tn Grk “he himself gives to all [people] life and breath and all things.”
[17:26] 1848 sn The one man refers to Adam (the word “man” is understood).
[17:26] 1849 tn Or “mankind.” BDAG 276 s.v. ἔθνος 1 has “every nation of humankind Ac 17:26.”
[17:26] 1850 tn Grk “to live over all the face of the earth.”
[17:26] 1851 tn BDAG 884-85 s.v. προστάσσω has “(οἱ) προστεταγμένοι καιροί (the) fixed times Ac 17:26” here, but since the following phrase is also translated “fixed limits,” this would seem redundant in English, so the word “set” has been used instead.
[17:26] 1852 tn Grk “the boundaries of their habitation.” L&N 80.5 has “fixed limits of the places where they would live” for this phrase.
[17:27] 1853 tn See BDAG 1097-98 s.v. ψηλαφάω, which lists “touch, handle” and “to feel around for, grope for” as possible meanings.
[17:27] 1854 sn Perhaps grope around for him and find him. The pagans’ struggle to know God is the point here. Conscience alone is not good enough.
[17:27] 1855 tn The participle ὑπάρχοντα (Juparconta) has been translated as a concessive adverbial participle.
[17:28] 1856 tn According to L&N 15.1, “A strictly literal translation of κινέω in Ac 17:28 might imply merely moving from one place to another. The meaning, however, is generalized movement and activity; therefore, it may be possible to translate κινούμεθα as ‘we come and go’ or ‘we move about’’ or even ‘we do what we do.’”
[17:28] 1857 sn This quotation is from Aratus (ca. 310-245
[17:29] 1858 tn Or “the divine being.” BDAG 446 s.v. θεῖος 1.b has “divine being, divinity” here.
[17:29] 1859 tn Or “a likeness.” Again idolatry is directly attacked as an affront to God and a devaluation of him.
[17:29] 1860 tn Grk “by the skill and imagination of man,” but ἀνθρώπου (anqrwpou) has been translated as an attributive genitive.
[17:29] 1861 tn Or “craftsmanship” (cf. BDAG 1001 s.v. τέχνη).
[17:29] 1862 tn Or “thought.” BDAG 336 s.v. ἐνθύμησις has “thought, reflection, idea” as the category of meaning here, but in terms of creativity (as in the context) the imaginative faculty is in view.
[17:30] 1863 tn Or “has deliberately paid no attention to.”
[17:30] 1864 tn Or “times when people did not know.”
[17:30] 1865 tn Here ἀνθρώποις (anqrwpoi") has been translated as a generic noun (“people”).
[17:30] 1866 sn He now commands all people everywhere to repent. God was now asking all mankind to turn to him. No nation or race was excluded.
[17:31] 1868 sn The world refers to the whole inhabited earth.
[17:31] 1869 tn Or “appointed.” BDAG 723 s.v. ὁρίζω 2.b has “of persons appoint, designate, declare: God judges the world ἐν ἀνδρὶ ᾧ ὥρισεν through a man whom he has appointed Ac 17:31.”
[17:31] sn A man whom he designated. Jesus is put in the position of eschatological judge. As judge of the living and the dead, he possesses divine authority (Acts 10:42).
[17:31] 1870 tn The participle ἀναστήσας (anasthsa") indicates means here.
[17:32] 1871 tn The participle ἀκούσαντες (akousante") has been taken temporally.
[17:32] 1872 tn L&N 33.408 has “some scoffed (at him) Ac 17:32” for ἐχλεύαζον (ecleuazon) here; the imperfect verb has been translated as an ingressive imperfect (“began to scoff”).
[17:33] 1873 tn Grk “left out of their midst”; the referent (the Areopagus) has been specified in the translation for clarity.
[17:34] 1874 tn Although the Greek word here is ἀνήρ (anhr), which normally refers to males, husbands, etc., in this particular context it must have a generic force similar to that of ἄνθρωπος (anqrwpo"), since “a woman named Damaris” is mentioned specifically as being part of this group (cf. BDAG 79 s.v. ἀνήρ 1.a).
[17:34] 1875 tn Grk “joining him, believed.” The participle κολληθέντες (kollhqente") has been translated as a finite verb due to requirements of contemporary English style. On the use of this verb in Acts, see 5:13; 8:29; 9:26; 10:28.
[17:34] 1876 tn Grk “among whom.” Due to the length of the Greek sentence, the relative pronoun (“whom”) has been translated as a third person plural pronoun (“them”) and a new sentence begun in the translation.
[17:34] 1877 tn Grk “the Areopagite” (a member of the council of the Areopagus). The noun “Areopagite” is not in common usage today in English. It is clearer to use a descriptive phrase “a member of the Areopagus” (L&N 11.82). However, this phrase alone can be misleading in English: “Dionysius, a member of the Areopagus, and a woman named Damaris” could be understood to refer to three people (Dionysius, an unnamed member of the Areopagus, and Damaris) rather than only two. Converting the descriptive phrase to a relative clause in English (“who was a member of the Areopagus”) removes the ambiguity.
[17:34] 1878 tn Grk “and a woman”; but this καί (kai) has not been translated since English normally uses a coordinating conjunction only between the last two elements in a series of three or more.
[19:6] 1880 sn The coming of the Holy Spirit here is another case where the Spirit comes and prophesy results in Acts (see Acts 2). Paul’s action parallels that of Peter (Acts 8) and not just with Gentiles.
[19:6] 1881 tn The imperfect verb ἐλάλουν (elaloun) has been translated as an ingressive imperfect.
[19:6] 1882 tn The imperfect verb ἐπροφήτευον (eprofhteuon) has been translated as an ingressive imperfect.